OUR  FOREIGN 
•MISSIONARY- 
ENTERPRISE 


♦  United  Brethren* 
Mission  Study  course 


tibvary  of  Che  theological  ^eminarp 

PRINCETON  •  NEW  JERSEY 


•a  @  SI- 


PRESENTED  BY 

Rufus  H.    LeFevre 

1 


M 


OUR  FOREIGN  MISSIONARY 
ENTERPRISE 


(N.  B. — Special  helps  for  the  leaders  of  mission  study 
classes  may  be  obtained  by  corresponding  with  the  Young 
People's  Department,  Foreign  Missionary  Society,  1003  U.  B. 
Building,  Dayton,  Ohio.) 


JUL  16  1952   . 

UNITED  BRETHREN  MISSION  STUDY  COI 


Our 

Foreign  Missionary 

Enterprise 


/      BY 

J.  S.  MILLS,  D.D.,  LL.D. 

Bishop  of  East  District 

W.  R.  FUNK,  D.D. 

Agent  U.  B.  Publishing  House 

S.  S.  HOUGH,  D.D. 

Secretary  Foreign  Missionary  Society 


United  Brethren  Publishing  House 
dayton,  ohio 


Copyright  by 

United  Brethren  Publishing  House 

Dayton,  Ohio 

1908 


TO 
THE  MISSIONARIES 

on  the  field,  and  to 

those  who  shall  join  them, 

with 

warmest  affection 

and 
highest  admiration. 


m 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER  PAGE 

I      SIERRA  LEONE,  WEST  AFRICA 1 

By  Rev.  W.  R.   Funk,  D.D. 

1  General   conditions 

2  Religious  conditions 

II      SIERRA    LEONE,    WEST    AFRICA    (con- 
tinued)          35 

United  Brethren  Missions 

1  Organization  and  growth  of  our  for- 

eign   missionary    work 

2  Present    conditions    of    the   work    of 

the  Foreign  Missionary  Society 

3  Cooperative  work 

4  Work    of    the    Woman's    Missionary 

Association 

III  CHINA 75 

By  Bishop  J.  S.  Mills,  D.D.,  LL.D. 

1  Old   China 

2  New  China 

3  Christian  China 

4  United  Brethren  in  China 

IV  JAPAN   125 

By  Bishop  J.  S.  Mills,  D.D.,  LL.D. 

1  The  land  and  the  people 

2  The  new  era  in  Japan 

3  Manners,  traits,  and  customs 

4  Christian   Japan 

5  The     United     Brethren     Church     in 

Japan 


V      PORTO   RICO    171 

By  Rev.  S.  S.  Hough,  D.D. 

1  Physical,     historical,     political,     and 

commercial  features 

2  Educational  and  religious  conditions 

3  The    work    of    the    United    Brethren 

Church 

VI      THE   PHILIPPINE   ISLANDS    217 

By  Bishop  J.  S.  Mills,  D.D.,  LL.D. 

1  The  Philippines   under  Spanish  rule 

2  The  Philippines  under  American  rule 

3  Religious    influences    in    the    Philip- 

pines 

4  The  United  Brethren  Mission  in  the 

Philippines 

APPENDIXES 

A     Bibliography    2  63 

B     List   of   United   Brethren   Foreign   Mission- 
aries     266 

C      Statistics  of  United  Brethren  Missions 276 

D     Analytical  Index 277 


ILLUSTRATIONS 

SIERRA  LEONE 

PAGE 

Albert  Academy,   Freetown    Frontispiece 

A  Village  in  Sierra  Leone 10 

Native  Chief  and  Councilors 10 

Preparing  the  Ground  for  Rice  Sowing 11 

Construction  Corps,  Sierra  Leone  Government. 

Railroad 11 

African  Fetishes    2  6 

Devil  House 26 

Bundu  Devils,  Sierra  Leone 2  6 

One  of  Our  First  Converts 2  7 

A  Christian  Family 2  7 

West  Africa  United  Brethren  Conference 2  7 

Map  of  Sierra  Leone 42 

Day   School,   Shenge 48 

Distant  View  of  Albert  Academy 48 

Manual  Training  Class,  Albert  Academy 49 

Brick  Yard,  Rotifunk 4  9 

Academy   Students   Preaching  Among   Mendis, 

Freetown    64 

Christian  Endeavor  Society,  Shenge 64 

United  Brethren  Sunday  School,  Freetown.  .  .  64 

United  Brethren  Church,  Bonthe 65 

Martyrs   Memorial  Church,  Rotifunk 65 

Church  Building  Committee,  Bompetoke 65 

CHINA 

Emperor's   Temple,    Peking 96 

Bound  Feet  Compared  with  Number  Five  Shoe  9  6 

View  of  Canton 97 

Boat    Life,    Canton 97 

U.    B.    Dispensary   and   Physician's    Residence, 

Canton    112 

Street  Chapel,  Siu  Lam 112 

China  United  Brethren  Conference 112 

Two  Rescued  Foundlings 113 

Girls'  Boarding  School,  Canton 113 

Map  of  Canton  and  Environs,  Showing  United 

Brethren  Work    118 


JAPAN 

PAGE 

Beautiful  Mount  Fuji 144 

Preparing  a  Rice  Field,  Japan 144 

A  Shinto   Shrine 145 

The  Great  Buddha,   Kamakura 145 

Buddhist  Temple,    Kyoto 145 

Map  of  Japan  Showing  United  Brethren  Work  156 

United  Brethren  Sunday  School,  Honjo,  Tokyo  160 
Members   of   Japan    United   Brethren    Mission 

Conference     160 

Y.  P.  C.  U.  Church,  Shizuoka 161 

Kyoto  United  Brethren   Church,   1908 161 

A  Group  of  Christians,  Shizuoka 161 

PORTO  RICO 

A  Country  Public  School 176 

Poor  Native's  Home 176 

Military  Road,  Porto  Rico 176 

Coffee  Plantation     177 

Hauling  Sugar  Cane 177 

A  Sugar  Mill,  Porto  Rico 177 

Map  of   Porto  Rico  Showing  United  Brethren 

Work 189 

A   Circuit   Rider 192 

United  Brethren  Chapel,  La  Playa  Guayanilla.  192 

United  Brethren  Sunday  School,  Ponce 192 

Preaching  in  the  Market  Place,  Yauco 193 

Our  Porto  Rican  Pastors 193 

PHILIPPINE   ISLANDS 

Igorot   Rice   Terraces 224 

Planting   Rice    224 

Types  of  Igorot  Tribe 225 

Ilocano  Women  and  Children 225 

Roman  Catholic  Church,  San  Fernando 240 

United    Brethren    Chapel    and    Congregation, 

Balaoan    240 

Bible  Conference 241 

Philippine    Islands    United    Brethren    Mission 

Conference      241 

Map  of  Luzon  Showing  United  Brethren  Terri- 
tory        244 


xii 


FOREWORD 


About  two  years  ago  the  Foreign  Mission  Boards 
of  our  Church  decided  to  send  a  deputation  to  each 
of  our  foreign  fields  to  make  a  thorough  investiga- 
tion of  our  missions,  and  of  the  present  conditions 
of  the  people  whom  we  seek  to  evangelize. 

Bishop  J.  S.  Mills,  D.D.,  went  to  Japan,  China,  and 
the  Philippines;  W.  R.  Funk,  D.D.,  accompanied 
by  John  W.  Ruth,  went  to  West  Africa;  and  S.  S. 
Hough,  D.D.,  accompanied  by  Messrs.  Alfred 
Baltzly,  C.  M.  Benson,  and  W.  L.  Hough,  went  to 
Porto  Rico.  They  all  returned  in  safety  in  the 
spring  of  1908. 

The  laymen  in  the  delegations  went  at  their  own 
expense,  making  a  worthy  precedent  which  we  ear- 
nestly hope  many  other  laymen  will  follow. 

As  there  is  no  one  volume  from  which  a  knowledge 
of  all  our  foreign  missionary  enterprises  can  be 
obtained,  the  production  of  such  a  book  was  planned 
from  the  beginning  of  these  journies.  For  this  pur- 
pose observations  were  constantly  recorded,  and  val- 
uable information  obtained  from  the  latest  literature, 
and  from  missionaries  and  natives,  and  especially 
from  our  own  superintendents  and  their  associates  in 
these  several  fields.  Grateful  acknowledgment  of 
indebtedness  is  hereby  made  to  all  these  friends  and 
sources. 

We  found  everywhere  the  fields  "white  unto  the 
harvest,"  and  the  weary  laborers  praying  the  Lord 
of  the  harvest  to  send  forth  more  laborers.  Paul's 
vision  of  the  Macedonian  was  always  present. 

The  counterpart  of  this  conscious  need  among  all 
nations  is  the  Providential  awakening  of  all  Chris- 
tians and  their  desire  and  purpose  to  "preach  the 
gospel  to  every  creature" — "to  make  disciples  of 
all  the  nations." 


To  accomplish  this  end  more  money  is  needed 
for  new  buildings,  and  to  train  and  employ  a  larger 
native  ministry;  and  more  consecrated,  cultured, 
capable,  Christ-like  missionaries,  teachers,  and 
physicians  to  plant  and  to  train  the  Church  of 
Christ  in  foreign  lands. 

As  the  members  of  the  deputation  visited  the  mis- 
sionaries at  work,  and  observed  them  under  trying 
circumstances,  their  admiration  for  these  workers 
constantly  increased  as  their  knowledge  of  them  en- 
larged. The  ability,  character,  and  efficiency  of  our 
foreign  workers,  as  well  as  those  in  the  home  field,  are 
of  the  highest  order.  There  they  are,  laboring  pa- 
tiently and  faithfully,  often  in  unsanitary  places,  tried 
by  anxieties  unknown  at  home,  deprived  of  congenial 
fellowship  and  dying  daily  for  Jesus'  sake.  They  are 
true  heroes,  who,  in  the  midst  of  this  pleasure-loving 
and  money-mad  age,  are  seeking  to  bring  the  gospel 
to  the  millions  of  our  fellow-beings  who  are  without 
the  knowledge  of  the  riches  of  glory  in  Christ  Jesus. 
They  are  a  living  illustration  of  the  spirit  of  our 
Master  who  sought  "not  to  be  ministered  unto  but  to 
minister,  and  to  give  his  life  a  ransom  for  many." 

The  Authors. 


xiv 


SIERRA  LEONE,  WEST  AFRICA 

By  W.  R.  Funk,  D.D. 


"Where  is  light  most  needed?  Without  question  in 
dark,  dark  Africa.  Then  let  my  light  blaze  out  for 
Christ  in  Africa." 

— Bishop  Hill. 

"The  battle  royal  for  Africa's  redemption  is  on, 
and  must  be  fought  during  the  present  generation. 
No  easily  won  laurels  here,  for  'there  are  many 
adversaries' — dense  ignorance,  immoral  customs,  an 
aggressive,  degraded  rum  traffic,  and  an  unhealthful 
climate,  but  the  banner  of  King  Jesus  must  and  will 
wave  victoriously.  The  next  ten  years  will  witness 
a  greater  advance  in  the  evangelization  of  Africa 
than  the  past  one  hundred  years.  We  expect  every 
United  Brethren  to  join  in  the  battle,  and  participate 
in  the  shout  of  final  victory." 

—From  one  of  our  missionaries. 


SIERRA  LEONE,  WEST  AFRICA. 
General  Conditions. 

The  great  continent  of  Africa  is  a  land  of 
mysteries,  geographical,  commercial,  and  reli- 
gious. The  explorations  have  been  comparatively 
recent  achievements,  and  much  local  and  detail 
investigation  remains  yet  to  be  made  before 
Africa  shall  be  considered  a  known  country.  Its 
possibilities  are  yet  to  be  discovered.  Religiously, 
only  beginnings  have  been  made  in  different 
parts  of  the  Dark  Continent,  and  the  conquest  of 
this  land  of  great  possibilities  is  to  be  the  splen- 
did achievement  of  the  church  of  Christ  in  this 
century.  No  more  hopeful  field  for  missionary 
activity  can  be  found  anywhere  than  among  these 
whole-souled  people,  who  seem  quite  ready  for 
the  gospel. 

The  great  surface  areas  of  the  African  con- 
tinent are  not  well  understood.  Its  location  is 
between  forty  degrees  north  and  forty  degrees 
south  of  the  equator.  It  is  nearly  five  thousand 
miles  long  and  over  three  thousand  miles  wide, 
and  is  large  enough  to  furnish  food  for  the 
whole  human  family,  if  its  productive  soil  were 


A  Land  Largely 
Unknown 


Location   and 
Extent 


Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Compared 
With  Other 
Countries 


Climate 


Productive 
Soil 


properly  cultivated.  Bishop  Hartzell  says: 
"There  is  room  enough  in  the  lower  end  of  the 
continent  for  the  whole  of  the  United  States  with 
her  eighty-two  millions  of  people ;  Europe,  with 
her  many  states  and  hundreds  of  millions,  can  be 
placed  in  one  side  of  Central  Africa ;  China,  with 
her  four  hundred  millions,  could  be  accommo- 
dated in  the  other  half  of  Central  x\frica,  and 
there  is  room  for  all  India  and  Wales,  Scotland 
and  Ireland  in  the  lower  valley  of  the  Nile  and 
along  the  coasts  of  the  Mediterranean." 

On  account  of  the  location  between  the  seas, 
the  southern  part  of  Africa  has  a  very  mild 
climate.  The  mountains  snow-capped,  with  the 
lakes  and  large  rivers,  modify  the  climate,  which, 
without  these  influences,  would  be  very  hot. 
Even  the  northern  and  central  parts  of  the  con- 
tinent are  favorably  affected  by  the  physical  con- 
ditions, and  it  is  a  matter  of  record  that  the 
average  temperature  in  the  Sudan  region  is  but 
a  little  above  eighty  degrees.  In  Sierra  Leone 
the  temperature  is,  on  the  average,  about  seventy- 
eight  degrees.  The  coast  line,  with  the  moun- 
tains and  great  desert,  gives  to  Africa  a  great 
variety  of  climate. 

In  Sierra  Leone  the  soil  is  as  productive  as 
can  be  found  on  the  continent.  There  seems  to 
be  a  spontaneity  in  the  soil  which  produces  with- 
out a  reduction  in  the  fertility.  It  has,  therefore, 
an  unlimited  productiveness,  such  as  cannot  be 


Sierra  Leone,  West  Africa 


found  in  land  that  has  been  weakened  by  tillage. 
The  growth  of  bush,  vines,  giant  trees,  fruits, 
and  vegetables,  all  so  luxuriant  and  splendid, 
attests  the  vitality  of  the  soil  and  the  continuance 
of  its  productive  power. 

The  latest  estimates  place  the  population  of 
Africa  at  160,000,000.  In  the  vast  Sudan  region 
there  are  supposed  to  be  from  50,000,000  to 
80,000,000  people.  Outside  of  this  territory  there 
is  mixed  blood,  as  in  Egypt  and  the  Nile  region, 
where  Arabian  blood  controls,  while  south  of  the 
Sudan  we  find  the  Pygmy,  Bushman,  and  Hot- 
tentot. As  our  mission  work  is  in  the  extreme 
western  part  of  the  Sudan  country,  we  have  the 
opportunity  to  train  the  best  type  of  the  negro 
race.  Sierra  Leone  is  not  densely  populated, 
having  not  nearly  so  many  inhabitants  per  square 
mile  as  England,  Germany,  or  Italy.  Freetown, 
the  capital  city,  has  a  population  of  forty  thou- 
sand. 

The  life  of  the  people  is  very  primitive.  Where 
Christianity  has  not  effected  a  change,  they  are 
very  decidedly  the  children  of  nature,  and  live  in 
squalid  habitations. 

Their  houses  are  nearly  always  grouped  into 
little  towns  or  fakai.  A  house  is  built  of  bush 
poles  placed  in  the  ground  and  fastened  together 
at  the  top  with  strips  of  tough  bark.  These  poles 
are  usually  set  six  to  eight  inches  apart  and  de- 
scribe a  perfect  circle.     The  poles  stand  perpen- 


Population 


Children 
of  Nature 


A   Native 

House 

Described 


Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


House- 
keeping 


Dress 


Customs 


dicularly,  eight  to  ten  feet  high,  and  upon  them 
other  poles  are  fastened,  making  the  support  for 
the  roof.  Between  the  side  poles  soft  clay  is 
packed,  which,  when  it  becomes  dry,  is  very  hard 
and  almost  impervious.  The  roof  is  made  of 
long  grasses  or  palm,  both  of  which  are  plentiful. 
As  to  the  interior,  there  is  no  floor.  On  the 
bare  ground  rudely-constructed  sleeping-places 
may  be  found ;  but,  in  most  cases,  a  mat  of  leaves 
or  grass  furnishes  a  bed  for  the  raw  native.  As 
civilization  touches  their  lives  they  change  their 
way  of  living.  Since  the  houses  are  entirely 
lacking  in  conveniences,  of  course  the  women 
are  poor  housekeepers.  Indeed,  they  have  noth- 
ing in  the  way  of  cooking  utensils  with  which  to 
keep  house.  One  pot  serves  for  all  the  cooking 
done.  No  knives,  forks,  plates,  or  dishes.  They 
eat  their  food  out  of  the  pot  in  which  it  was 
cooked,  and  use  their  hands  to  convey  it  to  their 
mouths. 

Their  dress  is  very  simple.  The  boys  and  girls 
under  twelve  years,  in  purely  native  communities, 
have  little  or  no  clothing.  The  little  tots  from 
one  to  eight  years,  and  even  up  to  ten  and  twelve, 
are  satisfied  with  a  string  of  beads.  In  no  case 
do  you  find  among  the  adults  of  native  com- 
munities more  than  a  breech  or  country  cloth 
worn. 

Much  could  be  said  of  the  customs  of  the 
people.    It  must  be  remembered  that  the  African 


Sierra  Leone,  West  Africa 


is  not  naturally  an  energetic  person.  Nature  has 
been  so  kind  to  him  in  the  abundant  supply  of 
food,  and  the  climate  is  so  mild  that  little  cloth- 
ing is  necessary.  This  being  the  case,  he  has  not 
felt  the  need  of  being  industrious  in  order  to 
obtain  a  livelihood.  This  yielding  to  climate  has 
led  to  very  bad  customs.  The  native  does  not 
know  how  to  care  for  his  health.  He  surfeits 
himself  at  one  meal  for  fear  he  may  not  have  an 
opportunity  to  obtain  another.  He  goes  on  the 
theory  that  he  has  only  what  he  eats.  Hence  he 
is  a  stranger  to  regular  habits  of  eating,  such  as 
in  civilized  countries  are  known  to  be  healthful. 
In  Sierra  Leone  there  are  found  almost  every- 
where some  of  the  results  of  Christian  civiliza- 
tion, so  that  the  customs  of  the  people  are  decid- 
edly changed  for  the  better  when  compared  with 
those  of  the  interior,  where  only  leaves  of  palms 
or  grasses  are  used  as  clothing. 

The  barbarous  method  of  having  women  do 
all  the  work  is  the  result  of  the  pagan  notion 
that  man  is  superior  to  woman,  and,  on  that 
account,  she  must  be  a  slave.  The  change 
wrought  where  men  get  a  vision  of  their  respon- 
sibility in  labor  is  most  encouraging.  In  sharing 
the  burden  with  the  weaker  sex,  the  finer  qual- 
ities of  manhood,  such  as  protection  and  gal- 
lantry, are  developed,  and  womanhood  is  exalted. 
The  custom  of  slavery,  known  as  "domestic,"  is 
prevalent,  even  in  Sierra  Leone.    The  paramount 


Christianity 

Changes 

Customs 


Labor 


Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Marriage 


Polygamy 


Food 


chief  directs  the  public  service,  such  as  highway 
and  railroad  building.  He  draws  the  wages  for 
all  service  rendered  by  his  people,  and  appor- 
tions it  to  the  heads  of  families,  the  individual 
getting  little  or  nothing  more  than  his  allowance 
of  rice  for  his  toil. 

Marriage  is  not  a  question  of  affection.  It  is 
a  bartering  custom  that  has  fastened  itself  upon 
the  native  people,  so  that  a  little  girl  is  bought 
for  so  many  hides  or  goats  or  pieces  of  cloth, 
when  she  is  from  five  to  ten  years  of  age.  There 
is  no  marriage  ceremony  among  the  native  peo- 
ple. The  deal  is  complete  when  the  transfer  of 
the  goods  or  animals  has  been  made  to  the  one 
controlling  the  child. 

Polygamy  is  extensively  practised  even  in 
Sierra  Leone,  where  a  great  many  men  and 
women  speak  English.  Mohammedanism  favors 
it,  and  the  English  government  has  not  yet  pro- 
hibited it  as  a  custom  of  the  people.  As  a  result, 
the  family  is  a  loose  organization. 

The  food  of  the  people  is  quite  simple.  Rice 
plantain,  cassada,  yams,  bananas,  oranges,  with 
fish,  chicken,  goat,  cattle,  and  small  animals, 
form  the  staple  bill  of  fare.  The  people  use  palm 
oil  instead  of  fat,  and  it  serves  them  very  well, 
and  is  undoubtedly  healthful. 

The  custom  of  personal  adornment  is  very 
striking.  The  hair  is  carefully  dressed  and  many 
charms  are  used  to  decorate  the  body. 


Sierra  Leone,  West  Africa 


The  most  barbarous  customs  prevail  in  regard 
to  the  sick  and  dying.  No  special  medical  atten- 
tion is  paid  the  sick,  even  if  dying,  while  singing 
and  dancing  around  the  sick  may  be  used  to 
drive  away  the  evil  spirits  that  are  causing  the 
malady. 

Funerals  are  often  seasons  of  debauchery. 
Pomp  is  a  part  of  the  life  of  the  native  African, 
and  he  buries  his  dead  with  great  ceremony. 
The  custom  is  followed  of  burying  the  dead  in 
the  hut  where  they  lived  or  near  by,  so  that  they 
may  be  protected  from  the  evil  spirits.  This  is  a 
common  practice.  Witches  or  cannibals  may 
steal  the  body  if  the  grave  is  remote  from  the 
dwelling,  and  that  is  another  reason  for  burying 
a  body  near  or  in  the  house.  A  person  dying 
with  a  contagious  disease  is  sometimes  buried  in 
this  manner,  and  frequently  no  more  than  two 
inches  of  earth  cover  the  body. 

That  sin  has  wrought  great  havoc  in  the  life 
and  character  of  the  people  no  one  will  doubt 
who  has  been  brought  in  touch  with  them, 
although  it  must  be  remembered  that  their  vices, 
in  the  main,  are  not  very  different  from  those 
found  among  civilized  people.  The  only  question 
is  that  of  degree.  There  can  be  little  doubt  that 
there  has  been  a  development  of  parts  of  the 
human  race  and  a  retrogression  of  another  part. 
The  former  is  seen  at  its  best  in  the  Anglo-Saxon, 
while  the  latter  is  seen  in  its  awfulness  in  the  de- 


Treatment 

of  the 
Sick 


Burial 
Customs 


Effects 
of  Sin 


8  Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

graded  lives  of  the  raw  Africans.  This  is  espe- 
cially true  of  the  Hottentot,  where  the  lowest 
strata  of  human  life  may  be  found. 

The  list  of  vices  known  among  them  is  as  fol- 
lows: Stealing,  lying,  gluttony,  drunkenness, 
lust,  with  promiscuous  living,  witchcraft,  mur- 
der, polygamy,  slavery,  wife-slavery,  child- 
slavery,  human  sacrifice,  cannibalism,  burial 
alive,  and  suicide. 


Religious  Conditions  in  Sierra  Leone. 
Paganism. 

The  African  is,  above  everything,  a  religious 
individual.  His  places  of  worship  are  to  be  seen 
wherever  he  is  found.  The  devil-house  is  the 
center  of  every  native  town  or  village.  The 
chiefs  have  their  devil-houses  in  order  to  be  sure 
they  are  safe  and  to  satisfy  the  feelings  of  their 
people  when  they  visit  the  chief's  compound. 

All  spirits,  of  whatever  kind,  are  gods,  and  the 
evil  spirits  exert  a  slavish  influence  of  fear  over 
the  native  mind.  To  appease  these  spiritual  per- 
sonalities, the  pagan  offers  his  sacrifice. 

Rev.  W.  S.  Naylor  well  says:  "Nearly  all  of 
the  pagan's  gods  are  demons.  .  .  .  The  cruel  bar- 
barities of  the  pagan  do  not  necessarily  spring 
from  an  inborn  brutality  of  nature,  but  from  his 
ideas  of  gods  and  religion."  This  gives  a  true 
view  of  the  awful  state  of  mind  in  which  these 


Sierra  Leone,  West  Africa 


Africans  live.  The  conception  that  a  god  should 
love  is  to  them  almost  an  impossibility. 

To  satisfy  the  evil  and  debauching  spirits  they 
make  sacrifices  of  possessions  and  even  of  human 
life.  It  is  a  common  thing  to  find  offerings  of 
rice,  meat,  cloth,  and  charms  in  the  devil-houses, 
put  there  to  win  the  favor  of  the  gods  that,  to 
the  mind  of  the  pagan,  are  in  control  of  every- 
thing about  them.  When,  in  some  of  their  vil- 
lages, I  ventured  to  examine  these  devil-houses, 
going  so  far  as  to  lift  the  curtain  door  and  shout, 
the  people  all  ran  in  panic  to  places  of  seclusion, 
expecting  me,  as  I  was  told  afterwards,  to  be 
destroyed  by  the  devil  or  devils,  as  the  case 
might  be. 

It  is  this  same  idea  that  controls  the  people, 
restraining  them  from  entering  on  any  ground 
where  a  certain  sign  is  found.  These  signs  are 
like  our  "Keep  off  the  Grass"  or  "No  Admit- 
tance," except  in  Africa  they  are  not  printed  in 
words,  but  are  in  the  shape  of  a  peculiarly-cut 
twig,  with  some  cloth  or  grass  about  it,  to  attract 
the  attention  of  the  passerby. 

Such  signs  are  placed  by  the  big  man  of  the 
Poro  Society.  .This  is  a  secret  society,  but  it 
makes  its  appeal  to  the  religious  ideas  of  the 
people  for  the  control  of  its  members,  as  well  as 
those  who  are  outside  of  its  mysteries.  The 
"devil"  is  the  principal  personage  recognized  in 
the  work  of  this  organization,  and  fear  of  the 


Offerings 
to  Evil 
Spirits 


Controlling 
by   Signs 


Secret 
Societies 


10        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

evil  spirits  is  the  only  element  of  power  in  it. 
The  same  can  be  said  of  the  Bundu  Society  for 
women.  Bishop  Mills,  in  his  splendid  book, 
"Africa,"  pages  67-69,  gives  a  true  statement  of 
these  societies,  and  I  refer  the  reader  to  his 
description. 

Cannibalism  Even  the  cannibalism  that  is  practised  is  almost 

altogether  a  religious  ceremony,  in  which  "medi- 
cine" made  from  certain  parts  of  the  human  body 
is  regarded  as  almost  perfect  protection  from  all 
evil  spirits.  As  they  worship  the  evil  rather  than 
the  good  spirits,  you  can  readily  imagine  the 
slavishness  of  their  devotion. 

Controlled  Fear  and  dread  enter  into  all  of  their  religious 

rites  and  services.  To  appease  the  wrath  of  the 
bad  spirits  is  their  only  desire,  as  the  good  spirits, 
if  they  believe  that  such  exist,  will  not  in  any 
way  ever  harm  them.  It  is  hard  to  make  com- 
parisons between  those  who  are  in  the  darkness 
of  sin,  especially  when  living  under  the  different 
forms  of  paganism  ;  but  it  does  seem  reasonable 
to  suppose  that  the  mind  that  finds  its  satisfaction 
in  the  worship  of  evil  spirits  only,  is  in  the  great- 
est need  and  deepest  gloom.  This,  in  a  word,  is 
the  state  of  the  heathen  African  mind  untouched 
by  the  light  of  divine  revelation. 

Mohammedanism. 

Mohammedanism,  or  Islam,  as  it  is  called,  is 
rapidly    gaining    headway    in     many    parts    of 


Sierra  Leone,  West  Africa 


11 


Africa,  and  its  present  field  of  conquest  is  in  the 
Sudan  country,  and  especially  in  Sierra  Leone. 
Mohammedanism  is  a  better  system  of  life  than 
paganism.  It  has  elements  of  truth  in  it,  which 
makes  it  a  dangerous  foe  to  Christianity.  It  has 
been  truly  said,  "The  better  is  always  enemy  to 
the  best." 

Mohammedanism  certainly  has  done  some 
good  for  the  African.  It  has  given  him  a  better 
view  of  his  needs  and  corrected  some  of  his 
worst  customs.  Under  the  teachings  of  Islam 
he  wears  more  clothes  and  is  instructed  against 
infanticide,  witchcraft,  burial  alive,  cannibalism, 
etc.,  but  it  places  its  approval  upon  slavery, 
polygamy,  and  social  impurity,  thus  making  it 
very  difficult  to  convince  the  native  mind  that 
these  things  are  sinful  or  even  socially  wrong. 

In  fact,  the  religion  of  the  Moslem  does  not 
change  the  heart.  Outward  appearance  may  be 
better  while  the  spirit  is  still  unclean.  Any  reli- 
gion that  sanctions  such  vices  as  stealing,  in- 
temperance, lying,  slavery,  social  vice,  and  mur- 
der, with  a  promise  of  an  immoral  life  beyond 
the  portals  of  death,  will  certainly  not  elevate 
its  followers  very  much  in  this  life.  All  this,  and 
more,  Mohammedanism  does. 

As  a  religion,  it  appeals  to  the  untutored  mind 
of  the  African.  It  presents  ceremony  in  all  it 
does.  A  strong,  formal,  ritualistic  service  is  fur- 
nished in  its  worship.     This  pleases  the  people. 


Some   Good 
Results 


No  Change 
of   Heart 


Ceremonies 


12        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Mohammed's 
Childhood 


Assumes  the 
Role  of  a 
Prophet 


Then  this  religion  urges  a  loose-flowing  costume 
for  the  people.  It  is  usually  white,  with  bright 
headwear,  and  in  some  cases,  especially  among 
those  who  would  rank  higher  socially,  a  rich  gar- 
ment of  fine  cloth  of  some  pronounced  color ;  all 
this  in  distinction  to  the  close-fitting  garments 
worn  by  the  English  people.  The  latter  is  un- 
comfortable, at  best,  in  that  tropical  climate,  and 
not  nearly  so  spectacular  as  the  loose-flowing 
robes. 

This  is  not  all  that  can  be  said  of  this  system 
of  religion.  Its  founder,  Mohammed,  was  born 
about  the  year  A.D.  570,  in  the  town  of  Mecca, 
Arabia.  The  personality  of  this  boy,  born  to  a 
widowed  mother,  who  died  when  he  was  but  six 
years  of  age,  leaving  him  a  complete  orphan, 
soon  manifested  itself  in  a  remarkable  manner. 
It  is  supposed  that  when  he  was  twelve  years  of 
age  he  came  in  contact  with  our  holy  Christian- 
ity, and  from  meeting  some  monks  he  gained  his 
first  conception  of  fastings  and  sacrifice,  and 
gathered  the  thought  or  inspiration  which  doubt- 
less led  him  finally  to  assume  the  role  of  a 
prophet.  In  this  relation,  Mohammed,  in  the 
cave  of  Hira,  received  what  he  claimed  were 
divine  communications,  and  after  seasons  of  con- 
tinued depression  and  revelation,  he  entered  upon 
the  work  of  preaching. 

It  is  claimed  that  "inside  of  one  hundred  years 
from  his  birth  his  name  was  joined  to  that  of  the 


Sierra  Leone,  West  Africa 


13 


Almighty  and  was  called  out  in  ten  thousand 
minarets  five  times  daily  from  the  Persian  Gulf 
to  the  Atlantic,  and  his  new  religion  was  sweep- 
ing everything  before  it  in  three  continents." 
This  shows  very  clearly  the  strong  personality 
of  the  man,  the  strength  of  his  system,  and  the 
devotion  of  his  followers. 

Of  his  character  much  could  be  said.  Sir 
William  Muir,  in  his  "Life  of  Mohammed,"  gives 
the  most  comprehensive  and  also,  perhaps,  the 
most  analytical  description  of  this  marvelous 
man  to  be  found  anywhere.  Samuel  M.  Zwemer, 
F.R.G.S.,  in  his  book,  "The  Moslem  World," 
presents  a  condensed  and  yet  complete  history  of 
the  prophet  and  his  religion  down  to  the  present 
day. 

It  seems  very  probable  that  Mohammed  was 
sincere  at  first,  but,  becoming  intoxicated  by  suc- 
cess, he  lost  his  position  of  strength.  As 
Zwemer  says :  "It  is  possible  to  measure  the 
prophet  by  three  standards — the  law  of  the 
pagan  Arabs,  the  law  he  himself  professed  to  re- 
veal, and  the  law  of  the  Old  and  New  Testa- 
ments, which  he  professed  to  approve  and  super- 
sede. By  the  New-Testament  law  of  Jesus 
Christ,  who  was  the  last  prophet  before  Moham- 
med, and  whom  Mohammed  acknowledged  as  the 
Word  of  God,  the  Arabian  prophet  stands  self- 
condemned.  He  repeatedly  broke  every  precept 
of  the  Sermon  on  the  Mount,  not  only  in  his  pri- 


Best  Books 
on  Mohamme- 
danism 


Condemned  by 
New  Testament 


14        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

vate   life,   but   in    his   prophetic   office,   and   the 
Koran  itself  proves  that  the  spirit  of  Jesus  was 
entirely  absent  from  the  mind  of  Mohammed. 
Ereaks  the  The    Arabs    among    whom    Mohammed    was 

Arabian  Laws  born  and  grew  to  manhood  also  had  a  law,  al- 
though they  were  idolaters,  slave-holders,  and 
polygamists.  Even  the  robbers  of  the  desert, 
who,  like  Mohammed,  lay  in  wait  for  caravans, 
had  a  code  of  honor.  Three  flagrant  breaches  of 
this  code  stain  the  character  of  Mohammed.  It 
was  quite  lawful  to  marry  a  captive  woman, 
whose  relatives  had  been  slain  in  battle,  but  not 
until  three  months  after  their  death.  Mohammed 
waited  only  three  days  in  the  case  of  the  Jewess 
Safiyah.  It  was  lawful  to  rob  merchants,  but 
not  pilgrims,  on  their  way  to  Mecca.  Mohammed 
broke  this  old  law  and  "revealed  a  verse"  to  jus- 
tify his  conduct.  Among  the  pagan  Arabs  it  was 
incest  to  marry  the  wife  of  an  adopted  son,  even 
after  his  decease.  The  prophet  Mohammed  fell 
in  love  with  the  lawful  wife  of  his  adopted  son. 
Zeid,  prevailed  on  him  to  divorce  her,  and  then 
married  her  immediately.  For  this,  also,  he  had 
a  "special  revelation." 
Disobeys  His  Mohammed  was  not  only  guilty  of  breaking 

own  Laws  tnc  Q]fi  j\rafo  ]aws  ancj  coming  infinitely  short  of 

the  law  of  Christ,  but  he  never  kept  the  laws  of 
which  he  claimed  to  be  the  divinely-appointed 
medium  and  custodian.  His  followers  were  to  be 
content   with    four  lawful  wives.     According  to 


Sierra  Leone,  West  Africa 


15 


tradition,  he  took  to  himself  eleven  lawful  wives 
and  two  slave  girls.  In  all  these  particulars  Mo- 
hammed was  not  an  ideal  character;  yet  his  life 
and  character  have  become  the  ideal  for  millions. 

Of  the  spread  of  Mohammedanism  we  give  the 
following  as  the  latest  figures,  and  they  are 
accepted  by  such  men  as  Naylor  and  Zwemer. 
To-day  there  are  two  hundred  and  twenty-five 
million  Mohammedans.  Fifty  million  of  these 
are  in  Africa ;  sixty-two  million  in  India ;  thirty 
million  in  China;  twenty-nine  million  in  the 
Malay  Islands.  Thus  they  have  been  gaining 
under  a  well-directed  missionary  effort,  for  it 
must  be  granted  that  Mohammedanism  is  one  of 
the  strongest  missionary  religions  of  the  world. 
Tactful  and  artful,  as  well  as  warlike,  they  have 
adopted  every  opportunity  to  enter  new  terri- 
tory, and,  if  need  be,  crush  by  war  the  inhabitants 
and  establish  the  system  of  their  "Allah." 

Their  beliefs  and  practices  are  not  at  all  con- 
sistent, for  the  teachings  of  Mohammed  are 
much  better  than  the  lives  of  his  followers.  This 
might  be  said  of  all  religions,  but  it  is  especially 
true  of  the  creed  of  the  Moslems. 

They  teach  six  cardinal  doctrines — "God. 
Angels,  Divine  Book,  Holy  Prophets,  Day  of 
Judgment,  and  the  Predestination  of  Good  and 
Evil."  "The  monotheism  of  Mohammed  must  be 
distinguished  from  that  of  the  Bible."  James 
Freeman    Clarke    savs    the    Mohammedan    is    a 


A  Propagating 
Religion 


His    Followers 
Inconsistent 


False 

Conception    of 
Monotheism 


16        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Attacks  the 
Trinity 


Perverted 
Ideas  About 
Jesus   Christ 


monotheist,  but  it  is  the  worst  kind  of  monothe- 
ism, and  sums  up  the  distinction  thus:  "Islam 
saw  God,  but  not  man;  saw  the  claims  of  deity, 
but  not  the  rights  of  humanity ;  saw  authority, 
but  failed  to  see  freedom,  therefore  hardened  into 
despotism,  stiffened  into  formalism,  and  sank 
into  death.  .  .  .  Mohammed  teaches  a  God  above 
us;  Moses  teaches  a  God  above  us,  and  yet  with 
us ;  Jesus  Christ  teaches  God  above  us,  God  with 
us,  and  God  in  us." 

In  conversation  with  a  Moslem  prophet  at 
Ronietta  I  soon  learned  that  the  main  attack  on 
Christianity  was  on  the  trinity,  denying  Christ  a 
place  in  the  God-head.  Their  false  conceptions 
of  the  relation  of  Jesus  Christ  to  the  world  are 
summed  up  in  the  following  from  The  Moslem 
World: 

"A  Christian  studying  the  faith  of  Islam  soon 
learns  not  only  that  Christ  has  no  place  in  the 
Moslem  idea  of  God,  as  they  deny  the  trinity, 
but  that  the  portrait  of  our  Savior,  as  given  in 
the  Koran  and  in  tradition,  is  a  sad  caricature. 
According  to  Moslem  teaching,  Jesus  was  mirac- 
ulously born  of  the  Virgin  Mary ;  he  spoke  while 
still  a  babe  in  the  cradle ;  performed  many  puerile 
miracles  in  his  youth ;  healed  the  sick  and  raised 
the  dead  when  he  reached  manhood.  He  was 
specially  commissioned  to  confirm  the  law  and 
reveal  the  gospel.  He  was  strengthened  by  the 
Holy    Spirit    (Gabriel).      Pie    foretold    another 


A  Village   ix  Sierra   Leone 


Native  Chief  and  Councilors. 


Freparing  tiih  Ground  foe  Rice  Sowing. 


Construction   Conrs.   Sierra   Leone  Government   Railroad 


Sierra  Leone,  West  Africa 


17 


prophet,  whose  name  should  be  Ahmed  (Mo- 
hammed). They  believe  that  Jesus  was,  by  de- 
ception and  substitution,  saved  from  crucifixion 
and  taken  to  heaven,  and  that  he  is  now  in  one 
of  the  inferior  stages  of  celestial  bliss ;  that  he 
will  come  again  at  the  last  day,  slay  antichrist, 
kill  all  the  swine,  break  the  cross,  and  remove  the 
poll-tax  from  infidels.  He  will  reign  as  a  just 
king  for  forty-five  years,  marry  and  leave  chil- 
dren, then  die  and  be  buried  near  Mohammed  at 
Medina.  The  place  of  his  future  grave  is  already 
marked  out  between  the  graves  of  Omar,  the 
Caliph,  and  Fatima,  Mohammed's  daughter." 

There  is  not  much  required  of  the  convert  to 
Islam  in  the  way  of  a  creed.  It  is  very  short : 
"There  is  no  god  but  God ;  Mohammed  is  the 
apostle  of  God."  You  find  these  words  shouted 
everywhere,  and  engraved  and  emblazoned  on 
posts  and  banners.  This  is  about  all  the  Sierra 
Leone  Mohammedan  knows  of  his  religion. 

The  danger  we  face  in  our  work  in  Sierra 
Leone  is  in  relation  to  the  propaganda  of  the  re- 
ligion of  Islam.  The  uprising  of  the  native 
people  in  Sierra  Leone  in  1898  was,  without 
doubt,  a  result  of  Mohammedan  agitation  made 
possible  by  the  attitude  of  the  government  on  the 
question  of  taxes.  The  formidable  stand  taken 
by  Mohammedans  all  over  the  protectorate  has 
caused  the  government  to  respect  them  with 
unusual  courtesy. 


Their   Creed 


Our  Danger 

in  Sierra  Leone 


18        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


The    English 
Government 
and   Mohamme- 
danism 


Must  be 
Measured  by 
Its   Results 


Some  of 
Its   Evils 


Islam  influences  have  caused  all  religious 
teaching  to  be  excluded  from  the  government 
school  at  Bo.  This  is  carried  so  far  that  the 
government  has  appointed  a  committee  (and 
pays  all  its  expenses),  whose  duty  it  is  to  visit 
the  school  quarterly  to  investigate  and  learn  if 
Christianity  is  being  taught  in  any  form.  This 
board  of  inspectors  is  composed  of  leading  Mo- 
hammedans. 

This  is  a  sad  condition,  for  it  is  well  to  remem- 
ber that  we  must  measure  Mohammedanism  by 
its  results  on  the  people  who  have  lived  under 
its  rule  for  centuries.  Who  can  study  the  his- 
tory of  the  Semites,  Aryan,  negro,  and  Slavic 
races  and  not  mark  the  weakness  of  the  teach- 
ings of  Mohammed  as  manifest  in  the  social  and 
moral  sinfulness  of  their  people?  The  countries 
of  Morocco,  Persia,  and  Arabia  are  distinctively 
Mohammedan  in  belief  and  practice.  They  have 
been  under  the  sway  of  Mohammedanism  for 
many  centuries,  and  it  is  in  these  countries  that 
you  find  the  lowest  ideals  and  the  most  corrupt 
practices  that  can  be  found  in  any  country  that 
even  approaches  civilization. 

It  must  not  be  forgotten  that  polygamy  and 
slavery  are  in  perfect  accord  with  the  Koran 
and  all  the  sacred  books  of  the  Islam  faith. 
Under  its  teachings  marriage  is  a  form  of 
slavery,  and  wife-beating  is  allowed  by  the 
Koran.     Zwemer,  in  The  Moslem   World,  says: 


Sierra  Leone,  West  Africa  19 

"Here  is  a  sketch  of  the  slave-market  at  siave-Market 
Mecca,  within  a  stone's  throw  of  'the  house  of 
God,'  at  the  center  of  the  Moslem  world.  'Go 
there  and  see  for  yourself  the  condition  of  the 
human  chattels  you  purchase.  You  will  find 
them,  thanks  to  the  vigilance  of  British  cruisers, 
less  numerous  and  consequently  more  expensive 
than  they  were  in  former  years ;  but  there  they 
are,  flung  pell-mell  in  the  open  square.'  .  .  .  The 
dealer,  standing  by,  cried  out :  'Come  and  buy  ; 
the  first-fruits  of  the  season,  delicate,  fresh,  and 
green ;  come  and  buy,  strong  and  useful,  faithful 
and  honest.  Come  and  buy.'  The  day  of  sacri- 
fice was  past  and  the  richer  pilgrims  in  their 
brightest  robes  gathered  around. 

"One  among  them  singled  out  the  girl.  They  Revolting 
entered  a  booth  together.  The  mother  was  left 
behind.  Soon  after  the  girl  came  back;  and  the 
dealer,  when  the  bargain  was  over,  said  to  the 
purchaser,  'I  sell  you  this  property  of  mine,  the 
female  slave,  Narcissus,  for  the  sum  of  forty 
pounds.'  Thus  the  bargain  was  clinched.  .  .  . 
Men  slaves  could  be  bought  for  sums  varying 
from  fifteen  to  forty  pounds.  The  children  in 
arms  were  sold  with  their  mothers,  an  act  of 
mercy;  but  those  that  could  feed  themselves  had 
to  take  their  chance.  More  often  than  not  they 
were  separated  from  their  mothers,  which  gave 
lise  to  scenes  that  many  a  sympathetic  pilgrim 
would  willingly  forget  if  he  could." 


20        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Our   Opportunity 
in  Sierra  Leone 


Conversions 
from  Mohamme- 
danism 


It  would  be  well  for  all  students  of  missions 
to  study  the  life  of  Raymond  Lull,  the  first  mis- 
sionary to  the  Mohammedans.  The  Christian 
church  owes  the  gospel  to  these  millions  of 
people,  and  our  Church  should  remember  its 
great  privilege  in  Sierra  Leone  and  seek  to  lead 
these  people  into  the  light  of  divine  truth  as  re- 
vealed in  Jesus  Christ  our  Lord.  In  our  work  in 
Sierra  Leone  we  must  reckon  with  Islamism  as 
an  opposing  force,  and  as  a  fertile  field  for  the 
spread  of  the  holy  truth  of  God. 

The  gospel  has  won  some  important  victories 
over  Mohammedanism  in  Sierra  Leone.  Re- 
cently, at  an  evangelistic  meeting  at  Mano  in  the 
Mendi  country,  two  women,  wives  of  Mohamme- 
dans, were  converted.  Only  a  few  months  ago, 
in  Rotifunk,  a  man  who  had  been  a  stanch  Mo- 
hammedan was  deeply  convicted  and  professed 
conversion.  In  testifying  of  his  joy  in  finding 
the  Savior  he  said,  "The  Christian  religion  is  the 
only  one  to  die  by."  We  have  in  our  employ  in 
mission  work  a  minister  who  was  brought  up  a 
Mohammedan.  .  He  was  to  be  a  preacher  and 
prophet  in  the  Islam  faith,  but  the  Spirit  of  God 
touched  his  heart  and  life  through  the  ministry 
of  a  missionary,  and  now  this  man  is  changing 
the  whole  section  of  country  in  which  he  is  work- 
ing. 

It  should,  therefore,  be  remembered  by  all  that 
our  Church  has  an  important  part  in  the  glorious 


Turkish 
Empire 


Sierra  Leone,  West  Africa  21 

but  difficult  task  of  carrying  the  gospel  to  the 
225,000,000  Mohammedans,  who  are  now  in  as 
great  danger  as  the  pagans  who  have  never 
heard  of  the  Christ. 

The  recent  change  of  attitude  on  the  part  of  change  in 
the  Sultan  of  Turkey,  and  the  coming  of  two 
Christian  ministers  into  the  Cabinet  of  Counsel- 
lors of  the  Empire,  is  a  very  hopeful  indication. 
God  is  opening  the  way,  and  means  that  we  as  a 
Church  should  be  ready  to  do  our  part  in  the 
territory  where  we  are  working. 

Christianity. 

It  would  be  hard  to  measure  the  work  already  °nly  a 
done  in  Africa  by  the  gospel  of  our  Lord.  True,  Evangelized 
only  a  line  of  the  country  has  been  touched,  as 
you  follow  the  coast  of  the  continent.  A  few 
interior  stations  have  been  opened,  in  the  Niger 
country,  in  the  Congo  Free  States,  and  in 
Uganda,  but  the  chief  amount  of  work  so  far 
accomplished  has  been  within  a  few  hundred 
miles  of  the  coast.  The  reason  for  this  is  appar- 
ent. The  people  of  these  coast  districts  are  as 
needy  as  any,  and  they  are  very  much  more  con- 
venient to  reach.  It  means  much  to  go  interior. 
Even  to  travel  up  the  Niger  two  thousand  miles 
in  a  rowboat  is  a  hard  proposition,  and  yet  that 
is  easy  in  comparison  with  five  hundred  miles 
through  the  jungles,  walking,  or  in  a  hammock. 
Then,  too,  the  interior  people  come  down  to  the 


22        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Everybody 
Benefited 


The    Changed 
Condition 


Uplifting 
Agencies 


coast  towns  more  or  less,  and  the  people  of  the 
coast  towns  do  trading  up  country,  so  it  has  been 
wise  from  every  standpoint  to  seek  to  Christian- 
ize the  coast  people  first. 

It  is  but  fair  to  state  that  much  of  the  work  of 
Christianity  is  indirect.  People  are  being  lifted 
up  who  do  not  make  a  profession  of  the  truth  of 
Jesus  Christ  as  a  personal  Savior.  It  is  in  Africa 
as  it  is  America,  where  multiplied  thousands  of 
sinful,  wicked  men  and  women  are  living  under 
the  blessings  of  our  Christian  civilization,  reap- 
ing very  many  of  its  benefits  and  helping  influ- 
ences, without  even  a  thought  of  thankfulness  to 
Almighty  God  for  the  good  which  they  enjoy. 

Sierra  Leone  is  not,  as  a  whole,  what  it  was 
when  our  missionaries  went  there  more  than  a 
half  century  ago.  Many  persons  have  seen  a 
great  light  and  are  in  a  receptive  mood  as  com- 
pared with  those  who  have  never  heard  anything 
about  the  truth  of  our  Christ.  So  we  cannot 
measure  anywhere,  and  especially  in  a  heathen 
country,  the  entire  results  of  the  preaching  of 
the  truth  by  the  number  of  persons  who  profess 
conversion. 

The  railroads  being  built,  the  hospitals  erected, 
the  schools  and  the  church-buildings,  all  these 
tend  to  uplift  and  have,  by  their  very  presence, 
a  helpful  influence  on  the  people. 

Of  the  need  of  Christianity  much  might  be 
said.     Disease  is  lurking  in  every  dark  spot  all 


Sierra  Leone,  West  Africa 


23 


over  the  country.  One  is  amazed  when  he  real- 
izes how  rapidly  the  people  are  dying.  How 
they  have  existed  so  long  as  a  race  is  a  marvel. 
But  they  can  never  rise  nor  continue  to  occupy 
the  land  that  God  has  given  them  unless  they 
have  the  gospel  of  our  Lord. 

Christian  civilization  is  fast  opening  up  the 
protectorate  of  Sierra  Leone.  Railroads  are 
being  built  by  the  English  government  all  over 
the  country.  One  line  extends  eastward  from 
Freetown  within  a  few  miles  of  the  Liberia  line, 
while  another  is  being  built  through  the  Yonnie 
country  to  Yonniebannah,  and  from  there  up 
the  Rokel  River.  Still  another  is  being  pro- 
jected in  the  southeastern  part  of  the  protec- 
torate. 

In  this  work  the  government  has  had  the  serv- 
ice of  Jonathan  Weaver,  who  was  brought  up  in 
our  schools  and  who,  in  his  official  relation,  has 
opened  up  the  railroad  lines,  and  has  obtained, 
as  I  learned,  the  right  of  way  for  the  govern- 
ment. All  this  is  the  result  of  the  gospel  of  Jesus 
Christ  in  Sierra  Leone.  Paganism  would  not 
have  brought  it ;  Mohammedanism  does  not  favor 
it;  but  Christianity  has  in  all  the  centuries  been 
the  foster  mother  of  all  truly  active  commercial 
life. 

The  African  people  do  not  give  a  half-hearted 
assent  to  their  religious  beliefs.  Careful  and  dis- 
criminating, they  come  to  their  conclusions,  and 


Christianity 
Developing   the 
Country 


Jonathan 
Weaver 


24        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


An   Example 
of   Remarkable 
Consecration 


then  with  a  purpose  they  live  the  life  of  a  Chris- 
tian. Our  missionaries  could  tell  many  expe- 
riences illustrating  this  fact.  I  venture  to  give 
here  a  personal  experience  I  had  with  an 
eighteen-year-old  boy.  Three  things  are  shown 
in  this  narration — his  manner  of  expression, 
thoughtfulness,  and  consecration. 

One  evening,  after  the  service  in  the  church 
at  Freetown,  during  the  conference,  this  boy 
came  to  me  when  I  was  out  in  the  street,  and 
said,  "Please,  sir,  may  I  walk  at  your  side  when 
you  are  alone?"  For  beauty  of  expression,  this 
is  hard  to  excel.  I  answered  that  I  could  not 
see  him  alone  then,  as  there  were  many  people 
about  us,  but  that  I  could  see  him  at  the  mission- 
house  the  next  day.  He  glided  away  in  the  dark- 
ness and  was  prompt  in  coming  the  next  day, 
and  when  I  asked  what  he  wanted  to  say  to  me, 
he  answered,  "I  came  to  ask  you  how  I  can  be  a 
perfect  Christian."  What  a  question !  The 
deepest  that  the  human  mind  can  ask.  After  an 
hour  of  talk  with  him,  he  said,  "But  you  have 
changed  me."  I  told  him  I  did  not  understand. 
"Oh,"  said  he,  "you  see  when  Doctor  and  Mrs. 
King  put  me  in  school  I  signed  a  contract  that 
when  I  graduated  I  would  spend  seven  years  in 
missionary  work,  and  now  I  want  to  change  it." 
I  said,  "Do  you  want  to  break  your  contract?" 
"Oh,  ho.  but."  said  the  boy,  "I  want  to  change 
it  to  read,  instead  of  'seven  years,'  'for  life.'  " 


for  the 
Africans 


Sierra  Leone,  West  Africa  25 

Elements  of  Hope. 

The  spiritual  possibilities  of  any  people,  as  is 
shown  by  history,  depend  largely  upon  their 
physical  and  mental  powers.  This  is  no  less  true 
of  the  African  than  of  any  other  part  of  the  race. 
Physical  environment  is  also  a  factor  in  the  spir- 
itual awakening  of  a  nation. 

In  the  study  of  any  people,  as  to  their -accept-  Africa 
ing  or  rejecting  the  truth,  one  must  consider  dis- 
position, condition,  and  accessibility.  The  win- 
ning of  these  people  to  Jesus  Christ  should  be  the 
object  of  all  educational  and  commercial  enter- 
prises. To  exploit  any  lower  scheme  among 
ignorant  and  uncivilized  people  is  the  height  of 
brutality.  It  is  very  important  that  we  come  to 
see  the  hopeful  side  in  the  development  of  the 
native  people  of  Africa,  for,  beyond  a  doubt, 
they  were  intended  for  that  climate.  "Africa  for 
the  African,"  is  not  only  a  just  motto,  but  is  the 
basic  truth  that  will  lift  up  the  hands  of  that  race 
and  cause  them  to  become  producers  as  well  as 
consumers.  This  will  lead  to  the  material  un- 
folding of  the  continent  under  Christian  ideas 
and  will  create  a  new  Africa.  There  is  great 
hope  in  it,  and  certainty  of  success  depends  upon 
the  activity  of  the  church  of  God. 

Industrial  Training. 
In    Sierra   Leone   the    soil    is    so    fertile,   the 
climate  so  genial,  that  but  little  toil  is  needful 


26        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Reasons 
for  It 


Industry 
a  Basic 
Principle 


for  an  existence.  As  a  result,  no  effort  has  been 
made  by  the  people  to  develop  the  land  or  take 
advantage  of  the  climate,  except  as  they  have 
been  taught  by  those  who  have  entered  the  coun- 
try either  as  missionaries  or  traders.  The  latter 
have  had  such  selfishness  in  all  they  have  under- 
taken that  little  has  been  gained  by  their  pres- 
ence in.  Africa,  while  the  missionaries  have  been 
cither  without  money  to  start  the  work,  or  have 
been  misguided  as  to  the  importance  of  industrial 
work  among  the  natives. 

Of  the  value  of  industrial  training  much  can 
be  said.  It  is  needed  in  order  to  give  the  people 
the  right  conception  of  life.  As  they  now  are, 
they  are  satisfied  to  live  in  idleness  and  squalor, 
with  absolutely  none  of  the  comforts  or  con- 
veniences of  life.  Their  rudely-furnished  houses 
are  not  (I  speak  now  of  the  heathen  natives)  so 
good  in  any  way  as  the  pig-sty  of  our  average 
farmer. 

Progress  cannot  be  permanent  in  any  line, 
either  spiritual,  educational,  or  commercial,  un- 
less industry  becomes  a  basic  principle  in  the 
lives  of  the  people.  Work,  substantial  work,  is 
one  of  the  safeguards  of  character  and  a  great 
means  of  developing  strength,  while  idleness  is 
the  same  among  the  heathen  as  in  civilized  coun- 
tries— a  fertile  condition  for  the  growth  of  every 
evil  thought.  To  overcome  this  condition,  indus- 
trial training  is  absolutely  essential. 


Sierra  Leone,  West  Africa 


27 


Industrial  work  is  needed  in  order  to  change 
the  physical  condition  of  the  country.  As  por- 
tions of  our  own  fair  land  needed  clearing  and 
grubbing,  so  to-day  Sierra  Leone  needs  exactly 
the  same  treatment  in  order  to  utilize  her  soil  to 
the  best  advantage.  This  will  reclaim  the  land 
from  the  wild  bush  and  vines,  change  the  appear- 
ance of  the  country  from  a  wild  jungle  to  the 
fertile  field,  and  will  give  food,  raiment,  and 
comforts  to  the  people.  All  this  must  come  in 
order  to  build  them  up  in  the  truth. 

In  this  industrial  effort  the  laws  of  nature, 
little  understood  by  the  African,  must  have 
exemplification.  The  native  must  be  taught  the 
law  of  cause  and  effect  as  it  relates  to  the  pro- 
ductiveness of  the  soil,  and  the  results  of  disobe- 
dience as  seen  in  misfortune  and  distress.  The 
Africans  can  learn  much  by  object-lessons.  Show 
them  how  to  farm  and  they  will  farm ;  show 
them  how  to  plant  cola,  cocoa,  orange,  lemon, 
and  rubber  trees  in  a  systematic  way  and  they 
will  soon  undertake  the  same ;  show  them  how 
to  grub  the  land  and  they  will  be  the  better 
socially,  intellectually,  and  spiritually.  For  un- 
less they  have  these  primary  principles  that  lie 
at  the  foundation  of  all  truth,  they  will  not  hold 
the  more  intricate  elements  of  spirituality  that 
relate  to  their  soul  life.  No  one  can  live  the 
clean  life  laid  down  in  our  gospel  and  have  his 
body  so  slightly   cared   for   as  does  the   native 


To  Reclaim 
the  Land 


Value  of 

Object 

Lessons 


28        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


To  Improve 

Sanitary 

Conditions 


The  Possibilities 
of  Industrial 
Training 


African.  The  filth  of  his  home  under  pagan  con- 
ditions is  not  conducive  to  pure  thinking  or  right 
living.  The  industrial  missionary  enterprise 
must  bring  this  change.  Christianity  must 
change  their  physical  conditions,  or  it  will  be 
impossible  to  build  up  a  self-sustaining  native 
church. 

This  industrial  work  should  be  pressed  in 
order  to  improve  the  health  conditions  of  the 
country.  Malaria  is  the  principal  disease  that 
attacks  the  people  of  the  Sudan  country.  As 
Cuba  was  in  the  grasp  of  yellow  fever,  so  Africa 
is  in  the  hold  of  the  malarial  germ.  The  prin- 
cipal means  of  its  transmission  is  -the  mosquito, 
and  the  mosquito  is  at  home  in  the  swamps  and 
unsanitary  places.  Remove  these  places  where 
malarial  germs  develop  and  the  mosquito  be- 
comes a  harmless  pest. 

It  has  been  asked  what  can  be  done  in  indus- 
trial work.  I  answer  this  important  question  by 
saying  that  we  must  not  expect  too  much  at 
once.  The  people  will  have  to  be  trained  before 
the  land  is  completely  conquered.  The  head, 
hand,  and  heart  of  the  natives  must  have  atten- 
tion before  the  commercial  life  of  the  country  is 
fully  developed.  A  man  who  does  not  believe  in 
a  thing  will  not  do  that  thing  with  much  earnest- 
ness of  purpose.  To  awaken  these  people  to  the 
value  of  labor,  they  must  be  taught  the  use  of 
tools,  which  is  the  first  step  in  industrial  work. 


Sierra  Leone,  West  Africa  29 

Albert  Academy  should  have  a  strong  manual 
training  department,  for  only  with  such  training 
can  the  boys  be  able  to  do  the  kind  of  work  nec- 
essary to  develop  their  country.  It  is  important 
that  missionary  societies  start  at  once  more  in- 
dustrial centers  such  as  we  have  started  at  Mo- 
fus,  on  the  Cockboro  River,  and  give  a  practi- 
cal illustration  of  what  can  be  done.  The  Afri- 
can must  be  brought  to  earn  more  than  enough 
to  provide  his  daily  food.  He  needs  to  be  clothed, 
he  needs  a  home,  and  money  to  support  his  own 
church  and  school  and  to  extend  these  privileges 
to  others  of  his  own  race.  Only  through  indus- 
trial training  can  these  absolutely  necessary  re- 
sults be  secured. 

Educational  Work. 

Fundamental  to  all  effort  to  improve  the  Great  impor- 
heathen  people  of  Africa  and  save  them  from  the 
delusions  of  false  religions,  such  as  Mohamme- 
danism, as  well  as  lift  them  out  of  their  own 
pagan  beliefs  and  customs,  is  education.  If  it 
could  be  justly  said  of  the  people  of  old  who 
had  direct  revelation  and  personal  supervision, 
"My  people  are  destroyed  for  lack  of  knowledge," 
the  same  statement  certainly  can  be  made  with 
greater  emphasis  of  160,000,000  benighted  souls 
who  are  now  groping  their  way  amid  the  most 
pronounced  mental  and  physical  darkness  found 
anywhere  on  the  globe. 


tance  of 
Education 


30        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

Has  a  strong  This  being  true,  a  most  hopeful  condition  lies 

Memory  in  the  fact  that  the  African  mind  is  very  suscep- 

tible to  truth  and  is  an  eager  learner  in  all  de- 
partments of  education.  Blessed  naturally  with 
a  strong  memory,  and  having  no  written  lan- 
guage, and  no  method  of  recording  anything,  he 
has  greatly  developed  the  retentiveness  of  his 
mind,  and  thus  stands  ready  to  receive  and  hold 
the  truth.  Being  undeveloped  in  the  reasoning 
faculties,  he  does  not  discern  readily  between 
truth  and  error,  so  that  if  error  is  the  first  to 
enter  the  mind,  it  is  much  more  difficult  to  reason 
it  away,  for  memory  clings  to  first  impressions. 
This  being  true,  how  important  it  is  that  the 
Africans  receive  the  knowledge  of  the  ethics  of 
a  true  life  before  false  systems  gain  mastery  in 
their  minds.  It  is  not  so  hard  for  them  to  give 
up  the  errors  of  their  inherited  condition  as  it  is 
to  convert  them  from  adopted  beliefs,  even 
though  the  same  is  grossly  false. 
primary  It  is  very  important  that  primary  education  be 

Education  carried   forward  with  all  diligence  and  with  as 

much  haste  as  possible.  The  children  are  very 
ready  for  school,  provided  an  incentive  is  held 
up  before  them.  Every  mission  station  should 
have  a  school  corresponding  to  our  public 
schools.  Not  all  that  we  teach  should  be  taught, 
nor  could  we  hope  to  hold  these  bush  children 
to  as  rigid  a  discipline  as  we  require  by  our  com- 
pulsory educational  law. 


Sierra  Leone,  West  Africa 


31 


In  our  work  we  have  secondary  schools  at 
nearly  all  the  stations  and  at  many  of  our 
preaching-places.  The  government  of  Sierra 
Leone  has  under  consideration  the  taking  over  of 
the  secondary  schools.  There  are  many  things  in 
favor  of  such  a  course ;  but  at  the  present  time 
it  seems  impracticable,  due  chiefly  to  the  fact 
that  the  cost,  as  fixed  by  the  government,  will 
exclude  those  who  are  the  most  needy  in  semi- 
civilized  communities,  and  the  raw  native  dis- 
tricts of  the  interior  will  not  be  reached  at  all  by 
these  governmental  schools. 

When  it  is  remembered  that  the  first  training- 
school  was  at  Alexandria  about  175  A.D.,  and 
that  some  of  the  earliest  church  fathers,  for 
example,  Origen  and  Clement,  taught  in  this 
school,  it  makes  it  an  interesting  contest  for  the 
present-day  church  to  perform  well  her  part  in 
reclaiming  not  only  Egypt  from  Mohammedan- 
ism, but  the  whole  of  the  continent  from  pagan- 
ism. Possibly  the  greatest  work  to  be  accom- 
plished in  Africa  now  is  to  stop  the  forward 
movement  of  the  Moslem  religion. 

That  there  is  every  reason  to  give  these  people 
the  truth  which  comes  from  a  Christian  educa- 
tion is  seen  in  the  fact  that,  as  Rev.  W.  S.  Nay- 
lor  says,  "the  Nubian  church  withstood  the  Mo- 
hammedan fire  and  sword  until  the  fifteenth  cen- 
tury." It  is  also  true,  as  he  states,  "that  churches 
dominated   by   the    Greek,   Roman,   Jewish,   and 


Our 

Secondary 
Schools 


Steadfastness 
of  the 
People 


32        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Illustrated  by 

Anglo-Saxon 

History 


other  colonists  of  North  Africa  were  quickly 
overcome  by  Islam."  This  shows  the  strength 
of  character  and  the  willingness  of  the  African 
to  stand  by  his  convictions.  It  is  the  general 
notion  of  the  native  that  the  white  man's  religion 
is  better  than  his,  and  that  he  (the  black  man) 
would  fare  better  if  he  believed  as  the  white 
man.  Is  not  this  a  long  stride  toward  the  truth? 
Desire  is  the  first  step,  and  these  people  have  it, 
and  if  the  Christian  world  will  speedily  act,  they 
may  reclaim  the  Dark  Continent  from  paganism 
and  all  false  and  debasing  practices. 

Some  one  has  said,  "The  strength  of  Islam 
is  ignorance  and  fanaticism."  These  must  both 
be  met  by  education.  Neither  can  flourish  where 
truth  is  supreme.  Historically,  this  is  true,  when 
we  consider  the  Anglo-Saxon  part  of  the  race. 
In  our  own  family  of  the  race  there  was  very 
slow  development.  Historian  Green,  in  speaking 
of  England  between  450  and  575  A.D.,  says: 
"The  new  England  was  a  heathen  country.  The 
religion  of  Woden  and  Thunder  triumphed  over 
the  religion  of  Christ."  Even  after  they  did  come 
back  to  a  desire  for  the  truth,  under  the  leader- 
ship of  Cuthbert  in  651,  they  did  as  the  same 
historian  writes :  "With  Teutonic  indifference 
they  had  yielded  to  their  thegns  in  normally 
accepting  the  new  Christianity  as  they  had 
yielded  to  the  king.  But  they  retained  their  old 
superstitions  side  by  side  with  the  new  worship; 


I 


-~     Pr 


African  Fetishes. 


Devil  House 


Btxdu  Devils,  Sierra   Leone. 


One  of  Our  First  Converts.  a  Christian   Family. 


West  Africa  United  Brethren  Confe 


Sierra  Leone,  West  Africa  33 

plague  or  mishap  drove  them  back  to  a  reliance 
on  their  heathen  charms  and  amulets,  and,  if 
trouble  befell  the  Christian  preachers  who  came 
settling  among  them,  they  took  it  as  a  proof  of 
the  wrath  of  the  older  gods."  This  is  not  unlike 
present  conditions  in  Africa  at  this  very  moment. 
We  cannot  boast  save  through  the  religion  of  our 
Lord. 


SUGGESTIONS  FOR  LEADERS  OF  CLASSES. 

The  questions  which  follow  each  chapter  are  in- 
tended simply  to  be  suggestive.  Additional  ones 
can  readily  be  prepared  by  each  leader.  Many  of 
those  suggested  are  thought  questions;  that  is, 
they  will  require  some  original  thinking,  although 
most  of  the  facts  needed  in  answering  them  will  be 
found  in  the  text-book.  Questions  which  constitute 
a  mere  memory  test  of  the  facts  presented  in  the 
book  are  valuable  and  should  be  used,  but  they  do 
not  make  as  deep  an  impression  as  thought  ques- 
tions. The  more  the  members  of  the  class  think 
through  the  facts  read,  the  greater  will  be  the  re- 
sults of  their  study. 

In  assigning  lessons  the  attention  of  the  class 
should  be  called  to  the  analytical  index  to  be  found 
in  Appendix  B.  From  it  one  may  get  at  once  a 
survey  of  the  whole  chapter. 

By  writing  to  the  Young  People's  Department, 
Foreign  Missionary  Society,  1003  U.  B.  Bldg., 
Dayton,  Ohio,  special  helps  for  the  leader  and  de- 
nominational missionary  literature  may  be  secured 
free  of  charge. 


34        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


QUESTIONS    FOR   STUDY    AND    DISCUSSION. 
CHAPTER  I. 

1.  Compare  the  social  customs  of  Sierra  Leone 
with  those  in  this  country. 

2.  "Which  do  you  consider  the  greater  obstacle 
to  the  propagation  of  the  gospel  in  Sierra  Leone, 
the  unfavorable  climate  or  the  low  form  of  civil- 
ization? 

3.  If  you  were  a  pagan  African,  in  what  ways 
would  the  gospel  change  your  religious  beliefs  and 
daily  life? 

4.  Why  is  Mohammedanism  a  dangerous  foe  to 
our  work  in  Sierra  Leone?     Mention  four  reasons. 

5.  Which  would  you  rather  be,  a  pagan  African 
or  a  Mohammedan  African?     Why? 

6.  What  great  changes  for  good  is  Christianity 
making  in  Sierra  Leone?  Give  concrete  illustra- 
tions. 

7.  Name,  in  the  order  of  their  importance,  four 
reasons  for  industrial  training  in  Sierra  Leone. 

8.  Why  should  our  Church  carry  on  school 
work  in  Sierra  Leone? 


SIERRA  LEONE,  WEST  AFRICA 

(Continued) 
UNITED   BRETHREN   MISSIONS 


35 


"The  people  that  walked  in  darkness  have  seen  a 
great  light;  they  that  dwell  in  the  land  of  the 
shadow  of  death,  upon  them  hath  the  light  shined." 

— Isaiah  9:2. 


II 


The  United  Brethren  Missions  in  Sierra 
Leone. 

Inspired  by  the  work  of  such  men  as  Judson 
of  Burma,  Robert  Morrison  of  China,  and  Carey 
of  India,  our  Church  began  its  foreign  mission- 
ary enterprise  in  Sierra  Leone,  West  Africa,  by 
sending  out  W.  J.  Shuey,  D.  C.  Kumler,  and 
D.  K.  Flickinger,  in  January,  1855,  as  our  first 
missionaries  to  the  Dark  Continent. 

From  the  beginning,  a  strong  current  of  mis- 
sionary interest  has  always  been  manifest  in  the 
United  Brethren  Church.  Philip  William  Otter- 
bein  was  himself  a  foreign  missionary,  sent  to 
this  country  by  the  Dutch  Reformed  Church  of 
Holland,  and  for  a  time  he  was  largely  supported 
by  that  church. 


Our  First 

Foreign 

Field 


Otterbein 
a  Foreign 
Missionary 


Organization  and  Growth  of  Our  Foreign 
Missionary  Work. 

Our  missionary  activities  were  confined  to  the 
United  States  until  "The  Home,  Frontier,  and 
Foreign  Missionary  Society"  was  organized  in 
1853.  The  impulses  that  led  to  the  organization 
of  this  society  are  of  more  than  ordinary  interest. 

37 


First 
Foreign 
Missionary 
Organization 


38        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Sandusky 

Conference 

Acts 


Missionary 
Society 
Organized 
in  1853 


In  Otterbein  University  a  strong  missionary 
spirit  prevailed  among  the  students  and  profes- 
sors, and  the  Board  of  Trustees  of  said  institu- 
tion, at  its  session,  June  28,  1852,  adopted  the 
following:  "Resolved,  That  the  Board  approve 
of  a  missionary  society  at  Otterbein  University, 
to  be  auxiliary  to  the  Foreign  Missionary  Society 
of  the  United  Brethren  in  Christ."  Such  a  so- 
ciety was  organized,  and  B.  R.  Hanby,  the  author 
of  "Darling  Nelly  Gray,"  was  its  secretary. 

A  few  months  after  the  action  taken  by  the 
Board  of  Trustees  of  Otterbein  University,  the 
Sandusky  Conference  took  similar  action  by 
declaring,  "The  time  has  fully  come  when  the 
United  Brethren  Church  should  unite  her  whole 
strength  in  a  missionary  society,  which  shall  in- 
clude not  only  the  home,  but  the  frontier  and 
foreign  fields."  Sandusky  Conference  was  at 
that  time  organized  into  a  missionary  society, 
and  a  resolution  was  passed,  praying  the  next 
General  Conference  to  organize  such  a  society 
for  the  entire  denomination.  The  General  Con- 
ference convened  at  Miltonville,  Ohio,  in  the 
spring  of  1853,  and  organized  the  missionary 
society  and  adopted  a  constitution  for  the  same, 
the  first  article  of  which  reads : 

"This  society  shall  be  called  'The  Home,  Fron- 
tier, and  Foreign  Missionary  Society  of  the 
United  Brethren  in  Christ,'  and  is  organizing  for 
the  purpose  of  aiding  the  annual  conferences  in 


Missions  in  Sierra  Leone 


39 


extending  their  missionary  labors  throughout  the 
country,  and  into  foreign  and  heathen  lands." 
J.  J.  Glossbrenner  was  elected  its  first  president, 
and  Henry  Kumler,  Lewis  Davis,  and  David 
Edwards,  vice-presidents.  John  C.  Bright  was 
elected  General  Secretary,  and  John  Kemp,  Jr., 
Treasurer.  The  first  Board  of  Managers  con- 
sisted of  William  Longstreet,  Jacob  Emrick,  D. 
Shuck,  T.  N.  Sowers,  John  Dodds,  and  D.  B. 
Crouse. 

Concerning  the  steps  antecedent  to  the  final 
organization  of  our  Missionary  Society,  Dr. 
Henry  Garst,  who  is  a  recognized  authority, 
states :  "It  is  significant  that  Rev.  John  C.  Bright 
was  a  member  of  the  Board  of  Trustees  of  Otter- 
bein  University  in  1852,  and  was  a  member  of 
the  Sandusky  Conference  and  a  delegate  to  the 
General  Conference  of  1853,  which  I  think  goes 
far  to  account  for  the  action  of  all  three  of  these 
bodies  on  the  subject  of  missions.  I  think  it  is 
as  proper  to  call  John  C.  Bright  the  father  of  the 
foreign  missionary  work  of  the  United  Brethren 
Church  as  it  is  to  call  Rev.  Lewis  Davis,  of  the 
Scioto  Conference,  the  father  of  the  work  of 
higher  education  in  the  Church.  As  missionary 
secretary,  Mr.  Bright  at  once  threw  himself  into 
the  work  with  all  the  force  of  his  intense  nature, 
and  stirred  the  Church  on  the  subject  of  missions 
as  it  had  never  been  stirred  before,  and  as  it  sel- 
dom, if  ever,  has  been  stirred  since." 


John  C.  Bright 
the  Vigorous 
Leader 


40        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


The  Primary 
Object 


Importance 
of  Missionary 
Training 
Recognized 


Africa  Selected 
Because  Most 
Needy 


The  resolutions  adopted  at  the  first  Board 
meeting  reveal  clearly  that  the  fathers  had  a 
comprehensive  and  clear  view  of  the  work  they 
were  about  to  undertake.  The  primary  object 
was :  "To  give  the  gospel  of  Jesus  to  all  men  in 
all  countries  in  its  unmixed  and  original  purity." 
Other  resolutions  emphasized  the  importance  of 
Christian  education  and  literature,  and  of  the 
necessity  to  aim  at  self-support  and  self-extension 
in  the  work. 

The  wisdom  of  enlisting  the  children  in  the 
Sunday  schools  of  the  home  churches  in  the  sup- 
port of  foreign  missions,  and  of  observing  a 
monthly  prayer-meeting  for  the  world-wide  work 
of  the  kingdom,  was  forcibly  presented  in  those 
very  first  meetings. 

In  the  selection  of  a  foreign  mission  field, 
Africa  stood  out  as  the  one  most  needy.  The 
committee  reported :  "If  any  nation  under  the 
wide-spreading  heavens  bespeaks  sympathy,  and 
ought  to  call  out  the  benevolences  of  the  Chris- 
tian church,  or  induce  the  missionary  and  teacher 
to  bid  adieu  to  friends  and  leave  a  land  of  privi- 
leges, and  spend  their  days  in  toil  and  suffering, 
it  is  poor,  ignorant,  degraded,  down-trodden 
Africa." 

As  stated,  Messrs.  Flickinger,  Shuey,  and 
Kumler  were  the  first  to  go  out  from  our  Church 
to  pagan  lands.  They  landed  at  Freetown, 
Africa,   March    1,    1855.     Then  began   the  real 


Missions  in  Sierra  Leone 


41 


work  of  evangelizing  our  share  of  the  Dark  Con- 
tinent. Concerning  the  conditions  that  prevailed 
in  the  early  stages  of  the  work,  Dr.  A.  T.  How- 
ard writes :  "There  were  the  hardships  of  travel, 
the  vexing  problems  of  keeping  the  boats  in  sea- 
worthy condition,  a  long  task  of  securing  suitable 
buildings,  and  the  constant  fight  with  the  bug-a- 
bugs,  or  white  ants,  attacking  every  stick  of  build- 
ing material ;  and  all  this  was  matched  only  by 
the  onslaught  of  malaria-bearing  microbes  attack- 
ing the  human  system.  There  was  the  inter- 
minable palaver  with  native  chiefs  connected 
with  questions  of  land  and  other  mission  prop- 
erty ;  the  hostility  of  Poro  and  Bundu,  and 
similar  native  societies ;  there  were  misunder- 
standings, impossible  to  eliminate,  from  an  ever- 
changing  superintendency,  and  a  constant  thrust- 
ing of  responsibility  and  leadership  upon  new 
men  before  they  had  acquired  the  proper  expe- 
rience in,  and  understanding  of  the  work  they 
were  expected  to  direct." 

In  the  midst  of  these  difficulties,  through 
heroic  faith,  much  hardship  and  patience,  the 
first  missionaries  laid  the  foundations  of  the 
work.  For  three  years  they  had  to  labor  with- 
out being  cheered  with  any  visible  fruitage. 
The  first  persons  to  profess  conversion  were  Tom 
Tucker  and  Lucy  Caulker.  The  latter  is  still 
living,  and  is  a  faithful  member  of  the  church  at 
Shenge.    Then  came  the  conversion  of  the  chief 


Early 
Difficulties 


First 
Conversions 


42        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Laying  the 
Foundations 


The  Work  of 
Mr.  and  Mrs. 
Gomer 


at  Shenge,  whose  influence  was  so  powerful  in 
winning  others  to  Christ. 

The  successive  steps  in  the  development  of  our 
mission  work  are  given  by  Dr.  D.  K.  Flickinger, 
who  has  been  more  closely  associated  with  the 
work  from  the  beginning  than  any  other  man  in 
our  Church,  being  one  of  the  first  missionaries 
and  later  missionary  secretary  and  missionary 
bishop.    Doctor  Flickinger  says : 

"The  first  permanent  step  was  taken  when  Dr. 
J.  K.  Billheimer,  Dr.  W.  B.  Witt,  and  myself 
secured  from  Chief  Caulker,  at  Shenge,  one  hun- 
dred acres  of  land  for  our  mission.  Rev.  J.  K. 
Billheimer  did  excellent  work  in  directing  the 
building  and  looking  after  the  material  interests 
of  the  mission ;  but  the  chief  spiritual  quickening 
came  when  Rev.  O.  Hadley  and  wife  arrived  in 
Africa  and  deeply  impressed  the  people  with 
God's  omnipresence  and  holiness,  and  their  sin- 
fulness. The  Hadleys  showed  the  people  God, 
and  brought  them  to  realize  their  need  of  salva- 
tion. 

"The  next  advance  was  when  Mr.  Gomer  and 
wife,  members  of  the  colored  race,  reached 
Shenge.  Fifteen  years  had  passed  since  the  first 
missionaries  had  landed.  The  Gomers  were  all- 
round  missionaries,  and  cared  successfully  for 
both  the  material  and  spiritual  interests  of  the 
mission.  They  were  enabled  to  endure  the  cli- 
mate better  than  the  other  missionaries,  and  they 


Missions  in  Sierra  Leone 


43 


stayed  from  five  to  seven  years  at  a  time  before 
returning  to  the  United  States.  The  three  things 
which  they  taught  effectually  were  cleanliness, 
godliness,  and  industry. 

"The  next  move  forward  was  in  1882,  when 
the  Mendi  Mission,  consisting  of  valuable  lands, 
buildings,  and  boats,  was  transferred  to  us  from 
the  American  Missionary  Association.  Then 
followed  the  erection  of  the  Rufus  Clark  and 
Wife  Training  School  at  Shenge." 

After  the  transfer  of  the  Mendi  Mission  to  us, 
we  received  five  thousand  dollars  annually  for  a 
period  of  six  years  from  the  American  Mis- 
sionary Association  (Congregational).  Because 
of  this  additional  income,  many  new  stations 
were  opened  and  the  work  was  greatly  enlarged. 
But  when  it  ceased,  the  income  from  the  home 
churches  had  not  been  sufficiently  strengthened 
to  continue  the  work  without  serious  retrench- 
ment. The  mission  was  struggling  upward  from 
the  depressions  caused  by  these  conditions,  when 
the  destructive  uprising  of  1898  took  place.  Dr. 
and  Mrs.  J.  R.  King  were  the  first  missionaries 
to  return  to  Africa  to  reconstruct  our  work  after 
this  disaster.  We  are  fortunate  in  having  Doctor 
King's  own  description  of  this  uprising,  and 
what  followed : 

"In  1898  the  interior  tribes  arose  in  rebellion 
against  the  British  government  and  swept  down 
over  the  countrv,  slaughtering:  the  civilized  in- 


Transfer  of 
Mendi  Mission 


New  Stations 
Opened 


Uprising 
of  1898  a 
Time  of 
Crisis 


44        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


The  Church 
Stands  the 
Test 


Consecrated 
Workers 


habitants,  destroying  property,  and  giving  com- 
plete license  to  their  old  habit  of  loot  and 
plunder.  As  in  the  days  of  Job,  Satan  seemed  to 
have  the  power  in  his  own  hands  for  a  season. 
It  was  the  supreme  moment  in  the  history  of  our 
missions.  Would  the  remnant  of  native  Chris- 
tians fall  away?  Would  the  band  of  faithful 
native  teachers  and  evangelists  prove  steadfast? 
Would  the  Church  at  home,  passing  through  the 
baptism  of  fire,  prove  that  there  was  the  real  gold 
of  devotion  to  missions  and  loyalty  to  Christ's 
last  command?  It  was  a  crisis.  The  native 
Christians  stood  steadfast.  The  home  Church, 
with  a  faith  anchored  in  the  eternal  purpose  of 
God  to  bring  all  nations  to  a  knowledge  of  him- 
self, moved  forward  and  ordered  the  reconstruc- 
tion of  the  work.  This  reconstruction  period 
covers  the  past  ten  years,  and  presents  the  fol- 
lowing hopeful  aspects : 

"We  have  now  a  membership  that  has  been 
thoroughly  tried.  The  survivors  of  the  massacre 
have  come  out  with  clearer  experiences.  Many 
have  seen  the  hand  of  God  in  their  deliverance 
and  are  led  to  trust  him  more.  We  now  have  a 
more  consecrated  band  of  native  teachers  and 
evangelists.  They  have  seen  in  this  cruel  insur- 
rection the  awfulness  of  the  heathen  life  when 
unrestrained,  and  are  putting  forth  greater 
efforts  to  deliver  their  fellow  countrymen  from 
the  power  of  the  evil  one. 


Missions  in  Sierra  Leone 


45 


"These  noble  men  are  putting  all  their  strength 
into  the  work.  They  teach  the  school  for  four 
or  five  days  each  week,  and  then  take  two  days  to 
reach  a  part  of  their  appointments,  which  num- 
ber from  ten  to  thirty.  It  means  long  journeys 
on  foot,  wading  streams  and  swamps,  but  their 
devotion  to  the  work  keeps  them  faithful.  There 
has  come  to  the  native  church  a  new  sense  of  re- 
sponsibility for  the  support  of  the  gospel  in  their 
midst — a  larger  giving,  which,  we  trust,  will 
soon  lead  to  self-support  in  the  stronger  churches. 
It  is  an  easy  step  from  self-support  to  self- 
extension." 


Present  Conditions  of  the  Work  of  the 
Foreign  Missionary  Society. 

At  the  present  time  the  Foreign  Missionary 
Society  has  in  operation  fifteen  stations  and  out- 
stations,  in  addition  to  the  joint  work  at  Free- 
town. There  are  two  hundred  and  forty-five 
preaching-places  where  the  gospel  is  regularly 
proclaimed.  It  is  estimated  that  not  less  than 
twenty  thousand  people  are  reached  by  our  mis- 
sionaries and  native  workers  every  week. 

It  was  my  privilege  to  visit  Sierra  Leone,  and 
what  is  here  said  in  reference  to  the  present  con- 
ditions of  our  work  there  is  the  result  of  personal 
observation  and  reliable  information  gathered 
from  the  workers  on  the  field.  To  see  Africa  is 
to  love  it.    The  scenery  is  beautiful ;  the  country 


Extent 
of  Work 


Personal 
Observations 


46        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Shenge 

Beautifully 

Situated 


Chief  Caulker 
Visited 


rolling.  Tropical  trees  and  vines  line  the  shores 
everywhere.  The  peculiar  foliage  of  the  plant 
life  makes  the  scene  one  of  exquisite  beauty.  The 
country  is  not  mountainous,  as  many  suppose, 
neither  is  it  a  swamp ;  although  one  cannot 
obtain  a  perfect  understanding  of  its  surface  be- 
cause of  the  dense  growth  of  bush  which  covers 
the  land  everywhere.  Only  here  and  there  an 
open  spot  has  been  cleared  by  the  natives  for  the 
purpose  of  planting  rice  and  cassada. 

There  is  no  spot  on  the  African  continent  of 
greater  interest  to  the  United  Brethren  in  Christ 
than  Shenge,  the  place  where  our  Church  began 
permanent  missionary  work  in  Africa.  It  is 
beautifully  situated,  sixty  miles  southeast  of 
Freetown,  being  on  a  peninsula  with  the  waters 
so  nearly  surrounding  it  that  it  is  almost  an 
island.  Extending  out  into  the  sea  as  it  does,  it 
is  likely  the  most  healthful  place  in  the  protec- 
torate of  Sierra  Leone.  Adjacent  to  it,  on  a 
little  island,  are  remnants  of  the  old  slave  pen  of 
John  Newton.  Shenge  is  the  home  of  the  Caul- 
ker family,  one  of  the  most  intelligent  families 
in  all  that  country.  Many  of  them  have  occupied 
the  positions  of  both  paramount  and  sub-chiefs. 
Madam  Neal  Caulker,  a  member  of  our  church 
at  Shenge,  is  now  the  paramount  chief  of  the 
Shenge  district. 

In  our  tour  of  inspection,  Dr.  J.  R.  King,  Mr. 
J.  W.  Ruth,  and  the  writer  visited  Shenge,  and 


Missions  in  Sierra  Leone 


47 


upon  invitation  of  Madam  Neal  Caulker,  we 
called  upon  her  and  found  her  upon  a  bed  of 
affliction.  She  took  a  keen  interest  in  our  com- 
ing. A  boundary  dispute  was  under  considera- 
tion, and  she  said,  "The  trouble  is,  my  poor,  igno- 
rant children  [referring  to  her  subjects]  do  not 
understand,  and  you  must  bear  with  them."  And 
she  promised  the  dispute  would  be  properly 
adjusted. 

On  the  next  day  (Sabbath)  we  went  to  her 
house  and  gave  her  the  holy  sacrament.  When 
Doctor  King  bade  her  good-by,  she  stretched  out 
her  hands  to  him,  saying,  "Oh,  Doctor  King,  you 
won't  take  the  missionaries  away  from  my 
people,  will  you  ?  If  you  do,  they  will  all  perish." 
God  only  knows  what  that  meant — to  be  alone 
without  God  in  the  world.  When  Doctor  King 
assured  her  that  the  workers  would  not  be  taken 
away  from  her  chieftancy,  and  the  work  would 
be  continued,  she  said,  "Thank  God,  then,  my 
poor  children  will  not  perish." 

It  is  admitted  by  all  who  have  investigated 
this  country  that  the  Shenge  people  are  very 
much  in  advance  of  the  people  about  them,  due 
to  their  strong  intellects  and  also  to  the  fact  that 
they  have  had  the  advantage  of  missionary  train- 
ing for  fifty  years.  Any  one  studying  the  map 
will  see  that  Shenge  is  a  strategic  point,  being 
the  gateway  to  all  the  country  east,  reaching 
back  to  Mano  and  the  Mendi  country. 


A  Plea  for 
the  Gospel 


Advancement 
Due  to 
Missionary 
Work 


48 


Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Hopeful 
Outlook 


A  Strong 
Church  at 
Bonthe 


Daymah 


At  Shenge  we  have  the  Rufus  Clark  and  Wife 
Training  School.  Its  building  is  substantial  and 
well  fitted  for  school  purposes.  The  church- 
edifice  is  a  splendid  one,  and  when  the  new  mis- 
sionary residence,  now  under  construction,  is 
completed,  Shenge  will  take  on  new  life.  We 
have  an  excellent  school  here,  and  everything 
promises  well  for  development  at  this  mission 
station. 

At  Bonthe,  a  city  of  7,500  people,  situated  on 
the  east  end  of  the  Sherbro  Island,  we  have  one 
of  the  strongest  churches  in  this  mission  field. 
The  large  church-building  at  this  place  stands  as 
a  monument  to  Rev.  R.  Cookson  Taylor,  whose 
energetic  life  brought  about  the  enterprise, 
assisted  very  materially  by  the  superintendent, 
Dr.  John  R.  King.  We  have  a  good  congrega- 
tion at  this  place,  which  in  a  few  years,  it  is 
hoped,  will  become  self-supporting.  About  two 
hundred  people  attend  divine  services  regularly 
at  Bonthe.  There  is  an  excellent  Sunday  school ; 
likewise  Senior  and  Junior  Endeavor  societies, 
with  fifty-eight  senior  members  and  sixty  junior 
members. 

Daymah  is  located  at  the  western  end  of  the 
island  of  Sherbro,  at  which  place  we  have  a  new 
church  recently  dedicated  and  a  comfortable 
mission-house.  The  new  church  is  a  frame  struc- 
ture, twenty-three  by  thirty-six  feet,  with  the 
pastor's  study  at  one  side.     Daymah  is  in  great 


Iiw    School,  Siik 


Manual  Training  Class,   Albert  Academy. 


'A  I 


MHv 


Brick  Yard,  Rotifdnk. 


Missions  in  Sierra  Leone  49 

need  of  the  gospel.  It  is  one  of  the  most  super- 
stitious places  found  on  the  coast.  An  example 
will  be  found  in  the  fact  that  the  people  of  the 
town  are  not  permitted  to  walk  through  the 
place  with  shoes  on.  If  they  were  to  do  so,  they 
would  be  in  constant  fear  of  death.  Our  Church 
has  wrought  a  good  influence,  our  missionaries 
and  even  native  workers  have  not  yielded  to  this 
superstition,  and  while  great  lamentation  was 
made  when  they  first  disregarded  this  custom  of 
the  people,  nothing  serious  befell  the  mission- 
aries, and  the  object-lesson  was  good  in  every 
way.  Daymah  is  a  group  of  villages  scattered 
over  the  northwest  end  of  the  island  of  Sherbro. 
While  the  people  on  this  island  were  originally 
Sherbros,  they  are  fast  passing  away  as  a  tribe, 
and  the  language  spoken  is  almost  entirely 
Mendi.  The  mission-house  and  church  at  this 
point  are  located  on  the  shore  of  the  sea. 

At  Bompetook,  which  is  located  southeast  of  Bompetook 
Shenge  about  twenty  miles,  we  have  the  Otterbein 
charge  and  a  good  organization.  A  new  concrete 
church-building  was  recently  dedicated,  which 
is  the  fourth  structure  built  within  thirteen  years 
at  this  place.  The  three  preceding  this  one  were 
adobe  structures  and  were  destroyed  by  the 
bug-a-bugs.  Mr.  George  Domingo,  who  is  a 
product  of  our  missionary  work  in  the  Shenge 
district,  and  whose  life  was  sought  by  the  rioters 
in  the  insurrection  of  1898,  is  a  prominent  busi- 


50        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Rembee 


Industrial 
Work  at 
Mofus 


ness  man  in  the  Shenge  chieftaincy,  and  is  a  most 
influential  man  in  his  community.  He  is  a  mem- 
ber of  our  Church  at  Bompetook  and  is  an  ex- 
tensive trader,  having  succeeded  splendidly  in  all 
his  commercial  undertakings.  To  him  much 
credit  is  due  for  the  presence  of  the  new  church, 
which  is  twenty-five  by  forty  feet,  with  the  pas- 
tor's study  to  the  side.  The  presence  of  this 
church-building  will  be  a  great  blessing  to  this 
community.  About  a  mile  and  a  half  distant 
from  the  church  is  the  residence  of  the  pastor, 
on  a  considerable  piece  of  ground,  owned  by  the 
Missionary  Society. 

Rembee  is  an  old  mission  station  located  north 
of  the  Bompeh  River  on  the  seashore.  We  have 
a  nice  piece  of  land  at  this  point,  owned  by  the 
Missionary  Society. 

At  Mofus  we  are  starting  an  industrial  plant. 
It  is  located  on  the  Cockboro  River,  about 
twenty  miles  northeast  from  Shenge.  We  have 
here  one  hundred  and  sixty  acres  of  land, 
which  is  well  located,  adjacent  to  the  village,  and 
is  easily  reached  by  boat  from  Shenge.  The 
new  mission-house  has  just  been  completed.  Rev. 
E.  Kingman,  superintendent  of  industrial  work, 
has  about  twelve  acres  of  land  cleared  and  a 
large  number  of  trees  planted.  When  we  were 
there  Mr.  Kingman  had  two  thousand  cocoa  and 
seventeen  hundred  kola  trees  growing.  Part  of 
these  were  at  Mofus  and  part  at  Shenge.     The 


Missions  in  Sierra  Leone 


51 


purpose  is  to  plant  these  trees,  and  rubber-trees 
and  other  various  products,  and  develop  the  in- 
dustrial work  along  this  line.  The  land  is  suit- 
able and  the  enterprise  cannot  but  be  a  success ; 
but  time  will  be  required  to  develop  it. 

In  the  general  plan  for  the  industrial  work, 
two  other  stations  will  be  located  adjacent  to 
Mofus,  one  at  Mocobo,  which  is  about  ten  miles 
up  the  Cockboro  River  from  Mofus.  We  have 
at  this  point  an  excellent  farm,  but  it  is  located 
in  a  community  where  there  has  been  no  mis- 
sionary work  done,  hence  it  is  known  as  new 
territory,  and  the  starting  of  our  industrial  work 
there  will  mean  much  to  the  community.  The 
land  is  good,  and  while  it  lies  high,  it  is  very 
fertile  and  is  especially  adapted  to  the  cultivation 
of  cocoa  and  kola  trees.  At  this  point  we  saw 
heathendom  in  its  lowest  form.  The  other  station 
will  be  at  Mambo,  on  the  Mambo  River,  about  a 
four  hours'  journey  from  Mofus,  where  we 
have  a  good  farm,  suitable  for  industrial  develop- 
ment. The  student  will  at  once  see  that  we  are 
locating  these  industrial  centers  so  as  to  econo- 
mize superintendency,  as  all  three  can  be  handled 
by  one  industrial  superintendent  living  at  Mo- 
fus. 

Mattru  is  located  on  the  Jong  River,  and  is 
distant  from  Bonthe  about  forty  miles.  It  is  near 
the  place  where  Reverends  D.  K.  Flickinger,  W. 
J.  Shuey,  and  D.  C.  Kumler  landed  when  they 


Other  Industrial 
Centers 


Mattru 


52        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Mo  Paley 


Mo  Banta 


Sembehu 


Mano — a 
Strategic 
Point 


Jama 


were  in  Africa  in  1855.  It  is  also  in  the  com- 
munity in  which  the  American  Missionary  Asso- 
ciation carried  forward  its  work  in  the  Imperri 
country. 

Mo  Paley  is  an  out-station,  some  twenty  miles 
northwest  of  Bompetook,  and  is  in  a  prosperous 
condition. 

Mo  Banta  is  located  southwest  from  Mano,  and 
is  in  an  important  district.  It  forms  a  connect- 
ing link  between  the  Shenge  chieftaincy  and  the 
Imperri  country. 

Sembehu  is  almost  directly  east  from  Shenge, 
about  a  hundred  miles,  and  is  one  of  our  impor- 
tant inland  stations.  Close  by,  a  little  to  the  east, 
is  Moccolo,  where  we  have  a  good  work  started. 

Mano  is  located  on  the  railroad,  over  a  hun- 
dred miles  southeast  from  Freetown,  and  is  a 
very  important  station.  We  have  at  this  place  a 
small  tract  of  land,  with  a  church  and  mission- 
house.  The  mission  is  capable  of  very  extensive 
enlargement,  for  the  territory  around  Mano  is 
very  good.  It  is  a  good  shipping  point  for  the 
territory  north  and  south,  and  can  be  developed 
into  a  very  strong  station.  The  chief  at  this 
place  is  in  sympathy  with  our  work. 

Jama  is  located  about  twenty  miles  east  of 
Mano  and  a  little  north.  The  country  surround- 
ing this  place  is  also  very  inviting.  The  people 
are  in  sympathy  with  us,  and,  being  Mendis, 
make  it  a  very  hopeful  point. 


Missions  in  Sierra  Leone 


53 


Damballa  is  located  northeast  from  Jama.  This 
station  is  the  northern  point  of  the  work  of  the 
Foreign  Missionary  Society,  and  just  north  of 
this  district  the  territory  occupied  by  the  Wom- 
an's Missionary  Association  begins. 

Going  eastward  on  the  railroad,  we  have  the 
next  mission  station  of  the  Foreign  Board  located 
at  Hangha.  This  is  a  new  station,  and  is  over 
two  hundred  miles  southeast  of  Freetown. 

The  last  station  to  be  opened  is  Pendembu, 
which  is  the  terminal  of  the  railroad  line,  about 
three  hundred  and  twenty-five  miles  east  from 
Freetown,  only  a  little  distance  from  the  Liberia 
line,  and  in  a  very  rich  country.  We  have  already 
organized  a  school,  and  in  the  near  future  will 
have  a  church.  This  point  should  very  soon 
make  a  strong  station  for  our  interior  work. 
Pendembu  will  be  the  gateway  to  the  country  of 
Panguma.  There  should  be  an  outgoing  from 
this  station,  so  as  to  occupy  the  territory  sur- 
rounding: Waima. 


Damballa 


Hangha 


Pendembu 


Our  Co-operative  Work. 

For  a  number  of  years  our  two  Boards  have 
been  carrying  forward  cooperative  work  in  Free- 
town. Four  special  points  of  interest  are  found 
in  this  city.  The  mission  residence,  which  has 
recently  been  built,  is  located  on  the  main  street 
of  the  city,  leading  up  from  the  wharf,  which  is 
the  entrance  to  Freetown  from  the  bay.     The 


Mission 
Headquarters 


54        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


location  could  not  be  better.  The  building  is  of 
stone,  three  stories  high,  with  a  good  basement, 
making  a  very  imposing  structure.  It  is  forty- 
two  by  forty-four  feet,  and  contains  living-rooms 
and  offices  for  the  superintendent  of  our  missions 
in  Sierra  Leone.  Dr.  and  Mrs.  John  R.  King 
have  made  it  the  center  of  the  social  life  of  the 
white  people  coming  to  the  province.  It  is  inter- 
esting to  note  that  our  American  missionaries, 
as  well  as  the  native  workers,  have  a  very  high 
standing  in  Freetown. 

Our  church-house  is  the  second  point  of  inter- 
est, and  is  well  located.  The  building  itself  is 
creditable,  and  is  so  located  on  the  lot  that  it  can 
be  enlarged  by  the  building  of  an  auditorium. 
Back  of  the  church  is  a  vacant  lot,  suitable  for 
the  residence  of  a  pastor. 

Bethany  cottage,  a  health  resort  for  our  mis- 
sionaries, is  another  point  of  interest.  It  is 
located  back  of  the  city  of  Freetown  on  Mt. 
Leicester,  which  rises  1,600  feet  above  the  sea. 
For  beauty  of  situation  there  could  be  none  more 
lovely.  For  effectiveness  in  the  recuperation  of 
our  mission  workers  it  is  a  complete  success. 
The  building  is  a  permanent  one,  and  is  in  splen- 
did condition.  Other  missionary  societies  have 
their  health  cottages  located  near  by,  and  in  that 
way  Mt.  Leicester  becomes  a  meeting-place  for 
workers.  There  is  a  good  fellowship  feature  in 
t,  which  is  both  helpful  and  delightful. 


Missions  in  Sierra  Leone 


55 


The  factor  of  first  importance  in  our  advanced 
missionary  work  in  West  Africa  is  the  Albert 
Academy.  The  rapid  growth  of  this  splendid 
educational  institution  and  the  erection  of  its 
magnificent  building  speak  volumes  for  the 
future  evangelization  of  Sierra  Leone.  The 
Academy  is  located  on  a  five-acre  tract  of  land 
three  hundred  feet  above  the  sea,  facing  on  Berry 
Street,  Freetown,  and  commanding  a  fine  view 
of  the  city  and  harbor.  In  point  of  natural  beauty 
and  healthfulness,  it  is  an  ideal  place  for  an  edu- 
cational institution. 

In  1901,  when  our  mission  work  was  being  re- 
constructed after  the  uprising,  it  was  thought 
best  to  establish  a  joint  superintendency  and 
start  a  training-school. 

In  September,  1902,  the  Mission  Boards  ap- 
pointed Bishop  J.  S.  Mills,  D.D.,  Rev.  Wm.  M. 
Bell,  D.D.,  Mrs.  D.  L.  Rike,  Mrs.  L.  R.  Harford, 
and  Rev.  W.  R.  Funk,  D.D.,  as  a  commission  to 
recommend  a  basis  for  cooperation  in  the  joint 
work.  The  recommendation  of  this  commission 
was  accepted  by  both  Mission  Boards.  In  1903 
the  council  of  the  United  Brethren  missionaries 
in  Sierra  Leone,  in  conference  with  Mrs.  B.  F. 
Witt,  decided  upon  the  location  for  the  Academy 
building. 

On  October  4,  1904,  the  school  was  started  in 
a  rented  building  on  East  Street,  Freetown,  with 
Rev.  R.  P.  Dougherty,  A.M.,  as  principal,  and 


Albert 

Academy 


Joint 
Superintendency 


56        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Mr.  Leininger's 
Gift 


The  Academy 
Opens 


Corner-Stone 
Laid 


Mr.  J.  D.  C.  Turner  as  elementary  tutor.  Five 
students  enrolled  at  the  opening  of  the  school. 

Mr.  Ralph  Leininger,  of  Brooklyn,  N.  Y.,  at 
this  time  proposed  to  donate  five  thousand  dollars 
toward  the  erection  of  the  Academy,  to  be  named 
"Albert  Academy,"  in  memory  of  his  cousin, 
Rev.  Ira  E.  Albert,  A.B.,  a  United  Brethren 
missionary  who  was  drowned  in  the  Bompeh 
River,  Sierra  Leone,  November  6,  1902.  The 
conditions  of  Mr.  Leininger's  proposition  were 
accepted  by  the  Mission  Boards,  and  he  after- 
wards increased  his  donation  to  over  eight  thou- 
sand dollars. 

On  January  16,  1905,  the  institution  was  pub- 
licly opened  by  his  Excellency,  Leslie  Probyn, 
C.M.G.,  governor  of  Sierra  Leone,  in  the  pres- 
ence of  a  representative  gathering.  From  July, 
1906,  Prof.  E.  M.  Hursh,  B.A.,  was  acting  prin- 
cipal of  the  Academy  for  one  year,  in  the  absence 
of  Professor  Dougherty  on  furlough  in  the 
United  States. 

The  corner-stone  of  the  Academy  was  laid  on 
January  14,  1907,  by  his  Excellency,  G.  B. 
Haddon-Smith,  C.M.G.,  acting  governor  of 
Sierra  Leone.  The  new  Academy  building  was 
dedicated  on  January  11,  1908,  by  the  writer, 
and  the  first  graduating  exercises  of  the  school 
were  held  January  13,  1908,  when  five  young 
men  received  diplomas  from  the  institution,  all 
of  whom  entered  immediately  on  mission  work. 


Missions  in  Sierra  Leone 


57 


The  Academy  has  had  an  inspiring  growth. 
In  1905  the  total  enrollment  was  46;  in  1906  it 
was  89;  in  1907  it  was  138,  and  in  August,  1908, 
161  students  were  enrolled.  The  chief  object  of 
the  Academy  is  to  educate  young  men  for  mis- 
sion work.  Provision  is  made  for  thorough  lit- 
erary and  physical  training,  as  well  as  religious. 
The  school  aims  to  give  such  all-round  training 
to  each  student  as  shall  fit  him  for  teaching, 
preaching,  professional  life,  or  business,  so  as  to 
make  him  a  real  factor  in  the  extension  of 
Christ's  kingdom  in  Africa. 

A  practical  illustration  of  the  training  along 
evangelistic  lines  is  the  itinerating  done  by  the 
students  among  the  Mendis  and  Temnis  of  Free- 
town. Open-air  meetings  are  held  regularly  each 
Sunday  morning  in  twenty-five  different  places, 
the  students  giving  the  message  in  the  native 
language  and  reaching  probably  five  hundred 
people. 

The  Academy  building,  erected  under  the 
superintendence  of  John  R.  King,  D.D.,  is  an 
imposing  cement-block  structure  one  hundred 
feet  long  and  forty  feet  wide.  The  chief  portion 
of  the  building  is  used  for  school  purposes.  The 
American  teachers  occupy  one  end  of  the  build- 
ing for  residence  quarters. 

On  the  first  floor  are  the  main  assembly  and 
classrooms ;  on  the  second  are  three  lecture- 
rooms,  a  study-room,  an  office  and  a  library,  and 


Rapid 
Growth 


Practical 
Training 


Prominent 
and  Convenient 
Building 


58        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


the  science  laboratory.  The  third  floor,  through- 
out the  entire  building,  contains  dormitories  for 
students.  The  manual-training  shop  and  store- 
rooms and  the  students'  dining-room  are  found 
in  various  departments  of  the  basement. 

The  grounds  are  well  wooded,  and  afford 
excellent  opportunity  for  outdoor  industrial 
work.  A  cement-block  fence  partly  encloses  the 
campus,  and  on  a  lofty  spot  a  picturesque  tower 
has  been  erected  for  the  large  school  bell. 

The  cash  value  of  the  building  and  grounds  is 
twenty  thousand  dollars.  Generous  contributions 
by  the  Young  People's  societies  of  the  United 
Brethren  Church  in  the  United  States,  students 
and  faculty  of  Union  Biblical  Seminary,  and 
private  individuals  have  made  possible  a  thor- 
ough equipment  of  the  Academy. 

The  laboratory  is  fitted  with  apparatus  suitable 
for  elementary  work  in  all  the  sciences.  The 
students'  dormitories  contain  single  iron  beds, 
table,  chairs,  and  book-shelves.  All  the  class- 
rooms are  supplied  with  wall  blackboards. 
Numerous  maps  and  charts  have  been  provided,- 
and  many  tools  have  been  placed  in  the  manual- 
training  department.  The  equipment  of  the 
school  will  be  increased  as  the  work  develops. 

A  beginning  has  been  made  to  secure  a  good 
library.  Already  some  reference-books,  com- 
mentaries, encyclopedias,  treatises  on  science  and 
literature  are  available  for  the  students.     Special 


Missions  in  Sierra  Leone 


59 


attention  is  given  to  music.  Drill  in  chorus  and 
quartet  work  is  emphasized.  Opportunity  is 
given  for  practice  on  the  organ,  and  steps  are 
being  taken  for  the  organization  of  an  Academy 
band. 

This  detailed  description  will  give  some  idea 
of  the  scope  and  nature  of  the  work  of  this  edu- 
cational institution.  The  ultimate  object  in  all 
foreign  missionary  work  is  the  development  of  a 
strong  native  church  that  shall  be  able  to  extend 
its  own  work.  To  secure  such  a  native  church 
strong,  efficient  native  pastors  are  absolutely  nec- 
essary. The  Albert  Academy  stands  for  the 
training  of  such  native  pastors  for  our  mission- 
ary work  in  Sierra  Leone.  Its  importance,  there- 
fore, cannot  be  over-emphasized.  It  should  be  a 
source  of  great  encouragement  to  all  the  mem- 
bers of  our  Church  to  know  that  the  Albert 
Academy  is  the  strongest,  most  effective  educa- 
tional institution  operated  anywhere  on  the  west 
coast  of  Africa  between  Gibraltar  on  the  north 
and  Cape  Town  on  the  south. 


The  School 
of  Great 
Importance 


Work  of  the  Woman's  Missionary  Asso- 
ciation. 

To  Miss  Lizzie  Hoffman,  of  Dayton,  Ohio, 
afterwards  Mrs.  Derrickson,  belongs  the  credit 
of  the  organization  of  the  women  of  the  Church 
of  the  United  Brethren  in  Christ.  For  a  long 
time  she  was  burdened  concerning  her  own  call 


Origin 


60        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

to  the  foreign  field ;  after  much  struggle  and  a 
night  of  wrestling  in  prayer,  the  conviction  dom- 
inated her  that  the  women  of  our  Church  should 
organize  for  active  and  special  work  for  mis- 
sions. This  was  laid  upon  other  hearts,  who 
prayed  and  planned  until  a  meeting  was  called, 
and  after  a  day  and  evening  spent  in  consultation 
an  organization  of  the  women  of  Miami  Confer- 
ence was  effected,  May  9,  1872. 

Three  years  later  Mrs.  T.  N.  Sowers  and  Mrs. 
W.  H.  Lanthurn  issued  the  following  call  to  the 
women  of  our  Church : 
First  "For  the  purpose  of  creating  a  greater  interest 

Meeting  and  zeal  in  the  cause  of  missions,  and  laboring 

more  directly  in  the  work  of  the  Divine  Master 
by  bringing  into  more  active  and  efficient  service 
the  sisters  of  the  Church,  a  call  is  made  for  a 
woman's  missionary  convention  to  meet  in  Day- 
ton, Ohio,  First  Church,  October  21,  1875." 

The  call  received  a  response  from  nine  confer- 
ences, six  of  which  sent  delegates  to  the  meeting. 
During  the  two  days  (October  21  and  22),  after 
much  prayer  and  planning,  a  general  organiza- 
tion was  effected,  and  May,  1876,  decided  upon 
as  the  time  for  the  next  meeting. 

"At  this  meeting,  in  May,  1876,  Mrs.  A.  L. 
Billheimer,  having  returned  from  mission  work 
in  Africa,  added  new  life  to  the  meeting.  It  was 
determined  to  venture  out  and  undertake  some 
work.     Mrs.  Billheimer  moved  'that  the  funds 


Missions  in  Sierra  Leone 


61 


now  in  the  treasury  be  used  for  the  founding  and 
support  of  a  mission  school  in  Africa.'  " 

The  first  idea  was  to  support  a  school  under 
the  control  of  the  missionaries  of  the  General 
Board,  near  Shenge.  It  was  agreed  to  support 
Miss  Emily  Beeken,  then  under  appointment. 
But  instead  of  this,  by  the  advice  of  the  officers 
of  the  General  Board  and  missionaries  then  in 
the  field,  it  was  decided  to  establish  schools  up 
the  Bompeh  River,  in  a  thickly-populated  terri- 
tory that  was  calling  for  light,  and  was  without 
any  missionary  work.  The  General  Board, 
thinking  it  not  best  to  distribute  their  force  over 
so  much  territory,  urged  our  women  to  occupy 
this  new  ground.  With  repeated  visits  and  the 
supervision  of  Mr.  Gomer,  the  mission  was 
located  at  Rotifunk,  on  the  Bompeh  River,  about 
fifty  miles  east  of  Freetown.  Miss  Beeken  went 
to  Rotifunk  late  in  the  autumn  of  1877,  at  which 
time  the  Association  undertook  her  full  support. 

The  pioneer  work  was  difficult,  but  it  was 
bravely  accomplished.  One  with  less  courage 
than  that  of  Miss  Beeken  could  not  have  suc- 
ceeded in  starting  a  mission  so  far  from  any 
civilized  help  or  protection.  The  head  man  built 
a  barri  for  worship,  and  the  Association  a  mud 
house  for  the  missionary  on  a  beautiful  elevated 
site  near  the  town.  Miss  Beeken  established  two 
schools,  and  had  public  services  in  surrounding 
towns. 


First 
Thought 


Schools 


Difficulties 


62        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

She  was  succeeded  at  the  end  of  nineteen 
months  by  Mrs.  M.  M.  Mair,  of  Glasgow,  Scot- 
land. Mrs.  Mair  had  had  an  experience  of 
twenty-six  years  on  the  west  coast  of  Africa, 
which  enabled  her  to  endure  the  climate  better 
than  new  missionaries.  She  landed  at  Freetown, 
October  19,  1879,  and  went  to  Rotifunk  the  fol- 
lowing month. 
Need  at  She  corroborated  Doctor  Flickinger's  report, 

Rotifunk  that,  of  all  dark  places  in  Sierra  Leone,  Rotifunk 

was  the  blackest.  Airs.  Mair  was  almost  over- 
whelmed with  the  responsibility  of  the  work, 
with  only  native  helpers,  but  she  said,  "I  always 
made  it  the  rule  of  my  life,  when  I  had  anything 
to  do,  to  try."  She  secured  better  teachers  for 
the  schools  and  established  two  others.  She  had 
the  confidence  and  cooperation  of  the  chiefs  and 
head  men,  and  such  was  her  influence  over  the 
people  in  three  years  and  a  half  that  she  said  she 
had  been  in  but  two  towns  in  this  country  where 
the  Sabbath  was  observed  so  well.  Pa  Sourri,  the 
head  man  of  Rotifunk,  gave  up  the  use  of  strong 
drink  and  tobacco,  and  compelled  the  people  to 
desist  from  labor  on  the  Sabbath  day.  Rotifunk 
was  a  station  for  slave-traders  when  our  mission 
was  located  there,  but  before  Mrs.  Mair  came 
away  this  was  broken  up.  A  deed  was  received 
for  one  hundred  and  fifty  acres  of  ground  at 
Rotifunk  and  Palli,  part  of  which  was  put  under 
cultivation*. 


Missions  in  Sierra  Leone 


63 


In  three  years  "so  many  persons  gathered  at 
the  public  services  that  in  the  rainy  season  no 
house  was  large  enough  to  accommodate  them, 
and  many  had  to  be  turned  away." 

A  chapel  was  built  and  dedicated  February  24, 
1884,  by  Rev.  J.  Gomer,  of  Shenge.  "After  the 
sermon  an  invitation  was  given  for  a  free-will 
offering  to  the  Lord,  and  the  people  responded 
by  subscribing  one  hundred  and  sixty  acres  of 
land  at  Palli,  five  binkeys  of  rice  (from  fifty  to 
one  hundred  bushels),  one  cow,  one  country 
cloth,  and  thirty-seven  dollars  and  fourteen  cents 
in  cash  subscriptions.  The  people  were  glad  for 
this  house,  and  the  missionaries  were  encour- 
aged." 

Following  this  bright  beginning  of  the  work 
came  years  of  war  and  pestilence,  of  disappoint- 
ment and  struggle,  but  with  them  also  oppor- 
tunities with  opening  doors  for  enlarging  the 
work. 

Land  was  secured  at  Rotifunk,  more  system- 
atic school  work  was  begun,  and  special 
teachers  were  sent  to  the  field.  Well-equipped 
buildings  superseded  the  mud  huts,  industrial 
and  medical  work  was  successfully  started,  and 
new  stations  were  opened. 

With  Rev.  R.  N.  West  as  leader,  various  trips 
were  made  interior  eastward,  into  the  vast  un- 
touched Mendi  country,  and  finally  work  was 
opened  there ;   also  northward   into   the  Yonnie 


Growth 


Years  of 
Hardship 


Rev.  R.  N.  West 
as  Leader 


64        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Difficult  to 
Describe 


country  as  far  as  the  Rokel  River.  Later  the 
English  government  projected  a  railway  for  sev- 
eral hundred  miles  interior,  and  post  and  tele- 
graph offices  were  established,  greatly  aiding  the 
work  of  the  missionary. 

Present  Condition  of  the  Work. 

It  is  a  very  difficult  thing  to  present  the  real 
condition  of  work  in  a  foreign  field,  for  every- 
thing is  primitive  and  new,  and  the  pull  is  down- 
ward rather  than  upward  in  relation  to  every- 
thing that  is  good.  The  worker  has  every  dis- 
advantage in  seeking  to  penetrate  the  darkness 
of  superstition  and  ignorance.  Hence,  the  plant- 
ing of  a  station  inland  in  any  heathen  country  is 
an  undertaking  that  surpasses  the  heroism  of  any 
achievement  in  a  civilized  country.  Those  who 
have  made  observations  in  both  civilized  and  for- 
eign lands  will  verify  this  statement. 

The  territory  occupied  by  the  Woman's  Mis- 
sionary Association  in  Sierra  Leone  is  that  which 
lies  almost  directly  east  of  Freetown.  In  this 
territory  they  have  one  hundred  and  fifty  preach- 
ing-places and  reach  at  least  twenty  thousand 
people  every  week  with  the  gospel  message. 
Fortunately  for  the  Board,  the  location  of  its 
work  is  in  the  country  through  which  the  rail- 
road was  built,  so  two  of  the  principal  stations 
of  this  Board.  Rotifunk  and  Moyamba,  are 
located  on  the  main  line  of  the  railroad  system 


ACADEMY    STUDENTS    PREACHING    AMONG    MENDIS,     FREETOWN. 


Christian  Endeavor   Society.   Shenge. 


United   Brethren    Sunday    School,    Freetown. 


I'.iintiii:.  M.um 


Memorial    Cm  itcrr. 

LtOTIFI    NK. 


Church   r>i  i  i . i < i  sg  Com  \i  ittee.    B<  i  m  p 


Missions  in  Sierra  Leone 


65 


now  being  built  throughout  the  protectorate  by 
the  English  government. 

Rotifunk  is  the  main  station  of  the  Board  and 
is  located  about  forty  miles  southeast  of  Free- 
town. Its  location  is  good,  having  communica- 
tion with  Freetown  by  railway  and  Shenge  by 
river,  so  that  it  is  a  strategic  point  for  mission- 
ary operations  throughout  that  part  of  the  pro- 
tectorate. It  is  also  the  supply  station  for  the 
territory  north  and  east  of  the  Rokel  River.  At 
this  station  there  is  an  excellent  mission  property 
of  one  hundred  acres  of  land.  The  buildings  are 
well  located  in  a  compound  composed  of  about 
ten  acres.  The  cemetery  is  located  adjacent  to 
the  buildings.  In  this  sacred  place  the  bodies  of 
our  crowned  heroes  have  been  buried.  Their 
devotion,  consecration,  and  final  sacrifice  are 
beyond  calculation  and  the  fruits  of  their  labors 
are  abundant,  although  their  bodies  are  still  in 
death.  The  church  at  Rotifunk  is  a  beautiful 
stone  structure,  permanently  built,  while  the 
mission-house  and  Boys'  Home  are  good  build- 
ings. The  dispensary,  Boys'  Home,  and  school- 
house  are  built  of  brick,  which  were  made  by  the 
industrial  department  of  the  mission.  With  these 
buildings  and  the  brickyard,  which  is  now  in 
operation  on  the  mission  property,  there  is  at 
Rotifunk  a  plant  which  is  capable  of  doing 
very  effective  work,  spiritually,  intellectually, 
and  commerciallv. 


Rotifunk — a 
Strategic  Point 


Cemetery 


The  Buildings 


66        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

Medlcal  The  medical   dispensary  now   in  operation   is 

not  only  a  financial  success,  but  is  a  great  bless- 
ing to  the  people.  The  advisability  of  the  start- 
ing of  dispensaries  is  established  beyond  a  doubt 
by  what  has  been  accomplished  at  Rotifunk.  It 
is  no  uncommon  thing  for  the  doctor  in  charge 
to  treat  a  hundred  people  in  a  day.  The  people 
come  a  distance  of  one  hundred  miles,  and  the 
indirect  influence  in  favor  of  Christianity  is  so 
powerful  that  one  is  led  to  think  that  this  is  one 
of  the  strongest  means  of  reaching  the  people 
with  the  gospel. 

Moyamba  Moyamba  is  the  second  station  of  importance 

operated  under  the  W.  M.  A.  It  is  located  thirty 
miles  southeast  of  Rotifunk,  on  the  main  line  of 
the  railroad.  It  is  an  ideal  spot,  and  is  an  impor- 
tant station  geographically  and  commercially, 
and  is  the  gateway  of  all  the  country  to  the 
northeast.  It  is  also  the  shipping-point  for  the 
territory  south  and  east,  and  is  the  location  of 
the  government  judicial  headquarters.  The  pris- 
oners are  located  here  and  the  courts  are  held  at 
Moyamba.  During  our  visitation  to  the  town 
eighteen  men  were  under  trial  for  cannibalism. 
We  visited  them  and  held  religious  service.  Of 
the  guilt  of  some  of  them  there  was  little  doubt. 
There  are  about  ten  acres  of  land  owned  by 
the  society  at  this  station.  The  mission-house 
is  new  and  a  model  of  construction  ;  comfortable 
in  every  way.     Connected  with  it  is  the  Girls' 


Missions  in  Sierra  Leone 


67 


Home.  The  church-building  is  a  fine  stone 
structure.  The  school-building  is  an  adobe  house, 
but  is  very  well  built  and  is  permanent,  while  the 
teachers'  residence  is  a  comfortable  adobe  dwell- 
ing. The  mission  plant  is  well  laid  out  and  in  a 
beautiful  location,  occupying  an  elevated  place 
overlooking  the  town.  The  government  barracks 
are  on  one  side  of  the  mission  property  and  the 
town  on  the  other.  The  entire  mission  compound 
has  been  carefully  fenced  and  a  number  of  trees 
have  been  planted.  The  future  of  Moyamba  is 
assured  as  a  central  station. 

Adjacent  to  Moyamba,  a  few  miles  southeast, 
is  the  out-station,  Lungay,  operated  in  connection 
with  Moyamba.  There  is  also  one  at  Makuri, 
with  a  small  school. 

Northeast  from  Moyamba  is  the  town  of 
Kwellu,  where  the  Woman's  Missionary  Asso- 
ciation has  mission  property,  located  to  the  side 
of  the  town,  which  will  be  a  good  location  for  a 
mission-house.  An  effort  is  being  made  to  build 
a  church  in  the  center  of  the  town.     Kwellu  is 

ft 

in  great  need  of  the  gospel,  and  is  a  very  hopeful 
community,  from  the  standpoint  of  missionary 
operation. 

Ronietta  is  one  of  the  most  hopeful  mission 
stations  operated  by  this  association.  It  is 
located  about  twenty  miles  northeast  from  Roti- 
funk.  It  is  the  home  of  the  paramount  chief  of 
the  Yonnie  country,  and,  as  such,  is  a  point  of 


Lungay   and 
Makouri 


Kwellu 


Ronietta 


68        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Makundu 


Rokon 
Yonnie    Banna 


Bompeh 
Palli 


Rotower 
Bradford 


great  interest,  and  is  strategic  from  the  stand- 
point of  reaching  the  people.  The  association 
has  a  mission  property  of  about  fifteen  acres 
splendidly  located,  with  a  church  built  in  the 
center  of  the  town.  The  mission-house  is  an 
adobe  structure  with  galvanized  roof,  making  it 
a  permanent  building.  Everything  is  hopeful  in 
connection  with  this  mission,  and  the  people  are 
in  complete  sympathy  with  the  work. 

East  of  Ronietta  is  the  station  of  Makundu. 
while  north  from  Makundu,  on  the  Rokel  River, 
is  Rokon,  and  east  from  Ronietta  about  twenty 
miles  is  Yonnie  Banna.  All  four  of  these  stations 
are  in  good  condition,  and  are  hopeful  in  every 
particular.  They  are  the  gateway  to  a  very  im- 
portant country  north  and  east.  Schools  are 
being  operated  at  all  of  these  points,  and  our 
people  are  occupying  much  of  the  surrounding 
territory  with  preaching-stations,  for  evangelistic 
work  is  a  very  important  feature  of  all  mission- 
ary work. 

South  of  Rotifunk  the  two  stations,  Bompeh 
and  Palli,  are  in  successful  operation.  There  is 
considerable  mission  property  at  Palli  capable  of 
development  along  industrial  lines. 

North  of  Rotifunk  we  have  a  mission  farm  at 
Rotower.  East  of  Rotifunk,  on  the  railroad,  is 
the  town  of  Bradford,  where  there  is  located  a 
mission  station,  with  a  school,  church,  and  native 
mission-house,  all  in  successful  operation. 


Missions  in  Sierra  Leone 


69 


Northeast  from  Moyamba,  a  distance  of  about 
forty  miles,  is  the  town  of  Taiama,  where  the 
Woman's  Missionary  Association,  to  my  mind, 
has  its  greatest  opportunity.  Taiama  is  a  town 
of  eight  villages,  with  a  chief  over  all  the  vil- 
lages, and  these  subject  to  a  paramount  chief  at 
Moyamba.  Taiama  is  a  town  of  very  intelligent 
people  and  is  located  on  the  Taia  River.  The 
association  has  a  farm  of  about  one  hundred  and 
eighty  acres  of  the  finest  and  most  fertile  land  to 
be  found  anywhere  in  the  protectorate  of  Sierra 
Leone,  located  on  the  river  adjacent  to  the  central 
town.  The  mission-house  is  a  very  good  prop- 
erty. Taiama  is  the  trading-point  for  all  the 
north  and  east  territory,  running  for  many  miles 
toward  the  Rokel  River.  It  is  about  fourteen 
miles  from  Mano,  the  nearest  railroad  station. 
On  my  recent  visit  we  selected  ground  for  a 
church-building,  and  the  people  promised  to  fur- 
nish the  labor  for  the  making  of  the  brick  and  the 
erection  of  the  building.  The  school  in  this  place 
is  in  a  flourishing  condition. 

Kunduma  is  east  of  Taiama,  and,  while  not 
occupied  at  present  as  a  station,  is  territory  be- 
longing to  the  Woman's  Missionary  Association, 
with  native  buildings. 

It  is  hoped  that  the  Woman's  Missionary  Asso- 
ciation will  occupy  new  territory,  such  as  the 
towns  of  Fundu  and  Yele.  This  will  mean  a 
movement  northward  and  eastward  toward  the 


Taiama 


Kunduma 


New 
Territory 


70        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Plot  Against 
Mr.  Wilberforce 


Rokel  River  country,  and,  finally,  a  pressing  of 
our  work  into  the  Panguma  country,  in  the 
northeastern  part  of  the  protectorate. 

Combined  Statistics  of  Our  African  Missions. 

At  the  conference  in  1908  there  were  reported 
twenty-two  organized  churches,  395  regular 
preaching-places,  707  communicant  members, 
2,700  adherents,  twenty-four  Sunday  schools 
with  a  membership  of  1,296,  twenty-three  day 
schools,  four  boarding-schools,  twelve  Junior  and 
six  Young  People's  Christian  Endeavor  societies, 
one  dispensary  in  which  2,624  cases  were  treated 
during  1907.  The  total  value  of  our  property 
was  $80,525. 

Closing  Word. 

From  this  running  sketch  of  the  condition  of 
the  missions  of  the  two  Boards,  the  student  has 
a  conception  of  the  vast  amount  of  work  that  is 
being  done  by  our  missionaries  in  Sierra  Leone. 
It  must  be  remembered  that  much  of  the  work 
being  accomplished  in  that  country  is  carried 
forward  by  native  workers. 

The  American  papers  had  much  to  say  a  few 
years  ago  concerning  the  failure  of  foreign  mis- 
sions in  reference  to  the  charges  preferred 
against  Rev.  D.  F.  Wilberforce,  one  of  our  mis- 
sionaries, who  at  that  time  was  chief  of  the 
Tmperri   country.      Mohammedanism   sought   his 


Missions  in  Sierra  Leone 


71 


life  and  procured  false  witnesses  to  swear 
against  him.  The  English  government,  preju- 
diced for  some  reason  or  other  against  him,  sym- 
pathized with  the  testimony  offered  that  was 
detrimental  to  his  cause ;  but,  in  the  presence  of 
all  these  circumstances,  he  was  cleared  by  a  court 
of  justice  of  the  charge  of  cannibalism  and  is 
now  doing  efficient  work  as  a  minister  of  the 
gospel  of  Christ  in  our  mission  field. 

Other  pastors,  such  as  our  faithful  workers  at 
Ronietta,  Mano,  Bompetook,  Dayman,  Sembehu, 
Bompeh,  Makundu,  Yonnie  Banna,  and  other 
places,  are  native  workers  who  are  to-day  hold- 
ing up  the  gospel  of  Jesus  Christ  with  as  much 
earnestness  of  purpose  as  any  workers  to  be 
found  in  any  field  of  toil  in  the  Master's  vine- 
yard. Self-sacrificing,  intelligent,  persistent, 
faithful,  they  do  the  work  that  is  assigned  them 
by  the  church  of  our  Lord  in  spreading  the  truth 
and  building  up  the  kingdom  in  that  dark  land. 
That  they  meet  difficulties  which  cannot  be  found 
anywhere  in  civilized  countries  is  a  truth  recog- 
nized by  all  who  have  given  careful  study  to  the 
subject  of  foreign  missions.  Dangers  lurk  every- 
where. 

•  Our  missionaries  from  the  home  land  have 
been  and  are  as  delightful  a  company  of  Chris- 
tian workers  as  can  be  found  anywhere  in  the 
world.  To  name  them  individually  and  pay  a 
personal  tribute  to  each  would  be  a  great  pleas- 


Loyalty  of 

Native 

Pastors 


Our   Missionaries 
Worthy  of 
Praise 


72        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

ure  ;  but,  when  it  is  written  that  they  are  all  faith- 
ful and  successful  in  their  work,  a  higher  com- 
pliment is  paid  than  personal  reference.  Our 
missionaries  form  a  complete  colony,  and  each 
sustains  the  other  in  his  work.  Each  is,  there- 
fore, a  part  of  the  other  in  the  toil  and  service 
rendered  in  the  dark  land.  All  are  cheerful  and 
hopeful — examples  for  imitation.  They  are 
joyous  in  their  work,  and  the  happiness  mani- 
fested is  the  result  of  an  inward  delight  in  the 
work  they  are  doing  for  the  Master.  It  should 
be  remembered  that  all  these  people  are  capable 
of  doing  good  work  for  the  Church  at  home,  but 
out  of  devotion  to  the  cause  and  in  obedience  to 
His  command,  they  are  at  work  in  Sierra  Leone. 
The  care  of  the  Almighty  has  certainly  been  over 
the  lives  of  our  missionaries.  Comparatively  few 
of  our  workers  have  fallen  on  the  field  of  service, 
and  the  promise  of  God,  as  revealed  by  David 
when  he  sang  the  song  found  in  the  Ninety-first 
Psalm,  applies  with  special  emphasis  to  these 
faithful  workers': 

"Thou  shaft  not  be  afraid  for  the  terror  by  night. 
Nor  for  the  arrozu  that  Hicth  by  day; 
For  the  pestilence  that  xvalketh  in  darkness. 
Nor  for  the  destruction  that  zvastcth  at  noonday. 
A  thousand  shall  fall  at  thy  side, 
And  ten  thousand  at  thy  right  hand ; 
But  it  shall  not  come  nigh  thee." 


Missions  in  Sierra  Leone  73 


QUESTIONS  FOR   STUDY  AND  DISCUSSION. 
CHAPTER  II. 

1.  What  were  -the  important  steps  which  led 
to  the  organization  of  our  Foreign  Missionary 
Society  and  the  sending  of  our  first  missionaries  to 
West  Africa? 

2.  Name  some  of  our  early  missionaries  and 
state  what  you  consider  the  greatest  difficulty  they 
had  to  overcome. 

3.  How  did  God  overrule  the  uprising  of  189  8 
for  good? 

4.  In  what  ways  do  our  Mission  Boards  cooper- 
ate in  Sierra  Leone?  What  are  the  advantages  of 
this  plan? 

5.  Why  is  Albert  Academy  a  most  vital  part  of 
our  work? 

6.  Tell  something  of  the  work  at  each  of  the 
principal  stations  of  the  Foreign  Missionary  Society. 

7.  What  reasons  led  to  the  organization  of  the 
Woman's  Missionary  Association? 

8.  Give  a  brief  account  of  the  starting  of  the 
work  at  Rotifunk. 

9.  What  is  being  done  at  the  other  principal 
stations  of  the  Woman's  Missionary  Association? 

10.  Whose  work  do  you  consider  more  im- 
portant in  Sierra  Leone,  that  of  the  foreign  mission- 
aries or  that  of  the  native  pastors?     Why? 


CHINA 

By  Bishop  J.  S.  Mills,  D.D. 


"The  claims  of  an  empire  like  this  should  surely 
be  not  only  admitted,  but  realized!  Shall  not  the 
eternal  interests  of  one-fifth  cf  our  race  stir  up  the 
deepest  sympathies  of  our  nature,  the  most  strenuous 
efforts  of  our  blood-bought  powers?  Shall  not  the 
low  wail  of  helpless,  hopeless  misery,  arising  from 
one-half  of  the  heathen  world,  pierce  our  sluggish  ear 
and  rouse  us,  spirit,  soul,  and  body,  to  one  mighty, 
continued,  unconquerable  effort  for  China's  salva- 
tion?" — J.  Hudson  Taylor. 


IMPORTANT  EVENTS  IN  CHINESE  HISTORY. 

Omitting  both  the  mythical  and  legendary  periods 
of  Chinese  history,  the  following  dynasties  are  of 
most  interest: 

B.  C. 

1122-255     The  Chou  Dynasty. 
206— A.  D.  221     The  Hau  Dynasty. 
A.  D. 

618-907     The  T'ang  Dynasty. 
960-1280     The  Sung  Dynasty. 
1280-1368     The  Yuan  Dynasty.      (Mongol.) 
1368-1644     The  Ming  Dynasty. 

1644-to  the  present.    The  Ch'ing  Dynasty.    (Manchu.) 
The    most    important    modern    events    in    Chinese 
history  are  the  following: 

A.  D. 

1275     Marco  Polo  arrived  at  Court  of  Kublai  Khan. 

1516     Portuguese  arrived  at  Canton. 

1575     Spanish  arrived  at  Canton. 

1580     Father    Roger     and     Matthew    Ricci    entered 

Canton. 
1622     Dutch  arrived  in  China. 
1637     English  arrived  at  Canton. 
1660     Tea  first  carried  to  England. 
1670     Beginning    of     trade     with     the     East     India 

Company. 
1719     Beginning  of  commerce  with  Russia. 
1784     First  American  merchant  vessel  left  New  York 

for  China. 
1793     Earl  Macartney  received  by  the  Emperor. 
1816     Lord  Amherst's  unsuccessful  embassy. 
1834     Opium  dispute  begins. 
1839     Beginning  of  war  with  Great  Britain. 
1842     Aug.  29.      Treaty  of  peace  signed  at  Nanking. 
1844.     July  3.     First  treaty  between  the  United  States 

and  China. 
1859     Nov.  24.      Commercial  treaty  with  the  United 

States. 

77 


1860     Oct.  13.     British  and  French  capture  Peking. 

1864     T'ai  P'ing  rebellion  crushed. 

1868     Burlingame  treaty  signed. 

1870     June  21.      Tientsin  massacre. 

1873  June  29.  Foreign  ministers  received  in  au- 
dience by  the  Emperor. 

1875  Death  of  Emperor  T'ung  Chih,  and  accession 
of  present  Emperor. 

1880  Nov.  17.  New  treaty  with  the  United  States 
signed. 

1887  Assumption    of    government    by    the    Emperor 

Ku  Hsu. 

1888  American      Exclusion      Act     against     Chinese 

passed. 
1891     Anti-foreign  riots  in  the  Yang-tzu  valley. 

1894  War  with  Japan. 

1895  Treaty  cf  Peace  with  Japan. 

1897  Seizure  of  Kiao  Chou  by  Germany. 

1898  Russia  leases  Port  Arthur  of  China.      Reform 

edicts  by  the  Emperor.  Counter  edicts  by 
the  Empress  dowager  and  dethronement  of 
the  Emperor. 

1899  Rise  of  the  Boxer  movement. 

1900  June  17.     Capture  of  Taku  Forts  by  the  Allies. 
June    20.       Murder    of    the    German    Minister. 

Siege  cf  the  legations  in  Peking. 

Aug.  14.      Relief  of  the  Peking  legation  by 

the  Allies. 
Aug.  15.     Flight  of  the  Court  to  Si  Ngan  Fu. 
Sept.  9.      Signing  the  peace  protocol. 
1902     Return  of  the  Court  to  Peking. 

1904  Feb.  8.      Beginning  of  the  war  between  Japan 

and  Russia. 

1905  Sept.  5.      Treaty  of  peace  between  Japan  and 

Russia. 
December.       Dispatch   of    two    Imperial    Com- 
missioners to  America  and  Europe  to  study 
constitutional  government. 

1901-6     Modern  education  decreed. 

1907     Prohibition  of  opium,  and  the  war  against  it. 


Ill 

CHINA. 
Old  China. 

That  which  first  attracts  attention  in  China  is  immensity 
the  immensity  of  it.  The  size  of  its  territory, 
the  number  of  its  people,  the  hoary  age  of  the 
nation,  its  potential  mineral  wealth,  its  fertile 
plains,  its  numerous  rivers  and  Grand  Canal,  its 
Great  Wall,  and  its  populous  cities  are  all  on  a 
scale  peculiar  to  China. 

The  land  has  borne  many  names,  but  for  our 
study  it  is  sufficient  to  call  it  China.  This  in- 
cludes China  proper,  or  the  eighteen  provinces 
with  an  area  of  1,532,420  square  miles,  and  its 
dependencies,  Mongolia,  Thibet,  Jungaria,  and 
East  Turkestan,  making  a  total  of  4,277,170 
square  miles,  one  of  the  most  extensive  do- 
minions ever  ruled  over  by  any  sovereign  in  any 
age  in  any  part  of  the  world.  It  lies  nearly  in  the 
same  latitude  as  the  United  States,  extending  a 
little  farther  north  and  a  little  farther  south.  It 
includes  every  variety  of  soil  and  climate ;  is 
watered  by  numerous  and  large  rivers,  which 
serve  to  irrigate  and  drain  it,  and  furnish  every 
means     for     intercommunication.      It     produces 

71) 


80        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

within  itself  everything  necessary  for  the  com- 
fort, support,  and  delight  of  its  inhabitants.  This 
has  always  kept  China  from  depending  on  the 
nations  for  satisfying  any  of  its  wants. 

A  study  of  the  map  will  reveal  the  fact  that 
China  is  the  most  favorably  located  of  any  large 
part  of  Asia.  To  the  north  lies  barren  and  frigid 
Siberia ;  to  the  west  and  southwest  are  the  dry 
regions  of  Central  Asia,  Afghanistan,  Beluchis- 
tan,  Persia,  and  Arabia ;  India  and  southern  Asia 
are  fertile  and  populous,  but  enervated  by  tropi- 
cal heat.  Many  of  these  lands  are  inland,  moun- 
tainous, and  sterile,  while  China  has  upward  of 
2,000  miles  of  water  front  on  the  Pacific  and 
600,000,000  acres  of  arable  land,  cultivated  as  a 
garden  and  producing  like  Eden. 

Of  China  proper  it  is  affirmed  by  Doctor  Mar- 
tin that  the  sun  shines  nowhere  on  an  equal  area 
which  combines  so  many  of  the  conditions  requi- 
site for  the  support  of  an  opulent  and  prosperous 
people.  Lying  between  eighteen  and  forty-nine 
degrees  north  latitude,  her  climate  is  alike  exempt 
from  the  fierce  heat  of  the  torrid  zone  and  the 
killing  cold  of  the  frigid  regions.  There  is  not 
one  of  her  provinces  in  which  wheat,  rice,  and 
cotton,  the  three  staples  of  food  and  clothing, 
may  not  be  cultivated  with  more  or  less  success ; 
in  the  southern  half  wheat  gives  way  to  rice, 
while  in  the  north  cotton  yields  to  silk  and  hemp. 
In  the  south  cotton  is  king,  and  rice  is  queen  of 


China 


81 


the  fields.  If  China  proper  is  divided  into  four 
sections  by  the  meridian  passing  through  Canton, 
and  by  the  parallel  drawn  westward  from  Shang- 
hai, the  level  plains  are  in  the  northeastern  sec- 
tion and  the  hills  in  the  southeastern.  To  the 
west  of  the  Canton  meridian  the  country  is  moun- 
tainous, the  ranges  increasing  in  height  as  they 
pass  westward  till  they  reach  the  lofty  Himalayan 
regions  south  and  east  of  Thibet. 

The  mineral  resources  of  China  are  almost 
beyond  comparison.  While  gold,  silver,  and 
precious  stones  abound,  the  empire's  greatest 
wealth  is  in  its  iron  and  coal  mines.  Baron  Von 
Richtofen,  who  is  the  greatest  authority  on  this 
subject,  says  that  419,000  square  miles  are  be- 
lieved to  be  underlaid  with  coal,  600,000;000,000 
tons  of  which  are  anthracite,  and  that  the  single 
province  of  Shensi  could  supply  the  entire  world 
with  coal  for  a  thousand  years.  The  iron  ore 
seems  to  be  as  abundant  as  the  coal.  The  super- 
stitious fears  of  the  people  have  prevented  the 
development  of  these  mines.  Providence  has  re- 
served these  vast  riches  until  China  can  protect 
them  from  the  predatory  efforts  of  other  nations, 
and  can  make  a  right  use  of  them.  The  soil, 
under  the  wise  system  of  fertilizing  and  irriga- 
tion followed,  seems  inexhaustible.  The  rich 
treasures  of  oil,  gas,  and  salt  are  not  capable  of 
being  measured  at  present.  When  China  has 
learned  the  use  of  steam,  electricity,  and  modern 


Minerals 


A  Fertile 
Soil 


82-      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

machinery,  the  natural  resources  will  make  her 
the  richest  nation  on  the  globe. 

The  population  of  China  in  round  numbers  is 
400,000,000.  Call  its  area  in  round  numbers 
4,000,000  square  miles.  The  greater  part  of  the 
population  is  in  China  proper.  In  the  province 
of  Shan-tung  there  are  nearly  seven  hundred 
persons  to  the  square  mile.  It  is  said  that  within 
ten  miles  of  the  center  of  Canton  there  are 
4,500,000  persons,  500,000  of  whom  live  on  the 
water  in  house-boats.  Rev.  Dr.  Gracey  says : 
"There  are  more  people  in  China  than  on  the 
four  continents — Africa,  North  and  South  Amer- 
ica, and  Oceanica.  Every  fourth  person  who 
toils  under  the  sun  and  sleeps  under  God's  stars 
is  a  Chinese.  Every  fourth  child  born  into  the 
world  looks  into  the  face  of  a  Chinese  mother. 
Every  fourth  pair  given  in  marriage,  plight  their 
troth  in  a  Chinese  cup  of  wine.  Every  fourth 
orphan  weeping  through  the  day,  every  fourth 
widow  wailing  through  the  night,  is  in  China. 
Put  them  in  rank,  joining  hands,  and  they  would 
girdle  the  globe  ten  times  at  the  equator  with 
living,  breathing  human  hearts.  Constitute  them 
pilgrims,  and  let  two  thousand  go  past  every  day 
and  night  under  the  sunlight  and  under  the  sol- 
emn stars,  and  you  must  hear  the  ceaseless 
tramj),  tramp  of  the  weary,  pressing  throng  fin- 
five  hundred  years."  Can  you  comprehend  the 
] lower  of  such  a  population? 


China  83 

Native  Customs. 

We  can  best  understand  this  people  if  we  con- 
sider their  customs  and  characteristics.  Their 
customs  relate  to  home,  education,  industry,  re- 
ligion, and  state. 

1.  Home  or  domestic  customs  of  the  Chinese 
are  among  their  most  cherished  possessions.  The 
maintenance  of  the  family  as  a  unit  is  always  the 
most  desirable  end.  One  husband  and  one  wife 
is  the  ideal ;  but  the  husband  often  has  one  or 
more  concubines.  The  children  marry  while  in  Marriage 
their  teens.  The  parents  arrange  the  marriage 
through  the  service  of  a  professional  match- 
maker, sometimes  while  the  persons  most  con- 
cerned are  in  their  infancy.  The  man  usually 
does  not  see  the  face  of  his  wife  until  after  the 
wedding  ceremony  is  performed.  The  son  re- 
mains in  the  old  home,  still  subject  to  the  author- 
ity of  his  father ;  the  bride  becomes  a  subordinate 
in  the  home,  under  the  complete  control  of  her 
mother-in-law.  There  is  no  courtship,  and  if 
love  exists,  it  does  so  under  very  difficult  condi- 
tions. The  property  is  usually  held  in  common. 
The  father  has  full  power  over  his  family,  and 
may  chastise,  sell,  or  kill  a  son  or  daughter. 
When  a  son  is  born  into  the  family  he  is  highly 
prized,  but  when  the  family  is  very  poor  the 
infant  girl  is  often  sold  or  destroyed.  The  filial 
devotion  of  children  for  parents  while  living  is 


84        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Ancestral 
Worship 


Clans 


Education 


great,  and  has  led  to  a  system  of  ancestral  wor- 
ship or  reverence,  as  the  most  characteristic  fea- 
ture of  Chinese  religion.  The  ancestral  tablet 
worship  in  the  home  and  the  annual  service  at 
the  graves,  when  viewed  as  an  act  of  filial  piety, 
may  be  tolerated  and  encouraged,  if  separated 
from  the  evils  of  idolatry.  The  family  often 
grows  into  the  clan,  and  a  whole  village  some- 
times bears  the  same  family  name,  and  the  whole 
clan  assumes  responsibility  for  each  member. 
While  this  has  a  tendency  to  make  each  one  care- 
ful lest  he  bring  evil  upon  his  clan,  it  also  tends 
to  destroy  individuality  and  hinders  all  progress. 
In  the  light  of  the  Christian  home,  the  greatest 
defects  in  the  Chinese  home  are  the  lack  of  sym- 
pathy between  its  members,  and  of  opportunity 
for  individuality,  initiative,  and  personal  growth. 
2.  The  education  of  their  youth  has  long 
characterized  the  Chinese,  and  it  was  the  chief 
way  open  for  promotion  in  the  empire.  The  boy 
at  the  age  of  six  or  seven  was  taught  in  his  home 
by  a  private  teacher.  This  home  instruction  is 
chiefly  training  the  will  to  prompt  obedience  and 
turning  the  national  code  of  etiquette  into  habits 
of  life;  so  that  the  youth  knows  not  only  how  to 
behave,  but,  the  habit  being  formed,  he  promptly 
and  properly  acts  in  any  situation.  Next  he  is 
sent  to  a  public  teacher,  who  trains  him  in  the 
classics  of  the  nation  and  in  composing  both  in 
prose  and  poetry.     This  literary  work  is  a  chief 


China  85 

part  of  education.  The  Chinese  language  is  one 
of  the  most  difficult  to  master.  The  ancient  sages 
are  studied  as  models  in  style  and  morals.  About 
the  year  600  A.  D.  a  civil  service  was  instituted 
for  preparing  and  selecting  individuals  by  means 
of  study  and  degrees,  for  office  in  the  govern- 
ment.    Examination-halls  were  erected  over  the      Examination 

...  .  Halls 

empire,  to  give  ambitious  men  an  opportunity  to 
compete  for  the  degrees.  From  one  to  ten  thou- 
sand men  meet  for  this  purpose.  At  the  first 
examination  not  over  one  per  cent.  pass.  Two 
other  examinations  follow  in  the  provinces,  then 
the  final  one  is  taken  at  Peking.  Those  who  pass 
the  final  examination  receive  a  degree  something 
like  our  Doctor-of-Philosophy  degree,  and  they 
are  placed  on  a  waiting  list  to  receive  office  as 
soon  as  an  opening  comes.  Poles,  like  our  flag- 
poles, are  erected  in  the  villages,  towns,  and  cities 
as  memorials  of  favorite  sons  who  have  taken 
one  or  more  degrees  in  these  examinations.  The 
people  love  to  honor  such  sons,  and  they  count 
them  the  chief  ornaments  of  their  city.  These 
examinations  chiefly  relate  to  the  ancient  Chinese 
classics  and  to  expertness  in  imitating  their  prose 
and  poetic  skill.  This  makes  the  educated  class 
eminently  conservative ;  they  stand  with  their 
faces  to  the  past  and  their  backs  to  the  future. 
Their  constant  dealing  with  the  old  classics  culti- 
vates a  capacious  and  ready  memory,  and  an 
appreciation  of  the  past  rarely  equaled. 


86        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

Social  classes  3      The  industrial  customs  of  the  nation  have 

much  to  be  admired.  The  gradations  in  society 
are  thus  described  by  a  native  writer :  "First, 
the  scholar;  because  mind  is  superior  to  wealth, 
and  it  is  the  intellect  that  distinguishes  man 
above  the  lower  order  of  beings  and  enables  him 
to  provide  food  and  raiment  and  shelter  for  him- 
self and  for  other  creatures.  Second,  the  farmer ; 
because  the  mind  cannot  act  without  body,  and 
the  body  cannot  exist  without  food ;  so  that  farm- 
ing is  essential  to  man,  especially  in  civilized  so- 
ciety. Third,  the  mechanic ;  because,  next  to 
food,  shelter  is  a  necessity,  and  the  man  who 
builds  a  house  comes  next  in  honor  to  the  man 
who  provides  food.  Fourth,  the  tradesman ;  be- 
cause, as  society  increases  and  its  wants  are  mul- 
tiplied, men  to  carry  on  exchange  and  barter  are 
a  necessity,  and  so  the  merchant  comes  into 
existence.  His  occupation — shaving  both  sides, 
the  producer  and  the  consumer — tempts  him  to 
act  dishonestly ;  hence  his  low  grade.  Fifth,  the 
soldier  stands  last  and  lowest  in  the  list,  because 
his  business  is  to  destroy  and  not  build  up  so- 
ciety. He  consumes  what  others  produce,  but 
produces  nothing  himself  that  can  benefit  man- 
kind. He  is  perhaps  a  necessary  evil.  Wherever 
is  found  a  place  in  which  the  Chinese  are  at  lib- 
erty to  toil,  there  they  are  found  making  and 
saving  money.  They  easily  surpass  all  rivals  as 
an  industrial  factor.    Most  of  them  are  employed 


China  87 

in  agriculture,  and  nowhere,  perhaps,  is  more 
care  shown  in  the  cultivation  and  irrigation  of 
the  ground,  the  selection  of  seeds,  and  of  the  best 
varieties  of  cultivated  plants,  and  the  utilizing  of 
manure,  above  all,  domestic  manure.  Small  hold- 
ings and  spade  industry  are  the  general  rule, 
and  large  numbers  of  plants  are  first  sown  in 
seedling  beds,  the  seedlings  carefully  selected  and 
transplanted.  The  soil  and  climate  combine  with 
this  industry  to  bring  forth  great  abundance  in 
many  parts  of  the  country." 

In  other  callings  the  Chinese  show  remarkable  competition 
endurance  and  great  powers  of  imitation,  while 
as  tradesmen  -and  bankers  they  are  not  surpassed 
by  any  nationality  in  the  world.  Baron  Rich- 
tofen,  who  has  explored  China  more  carefully 
than  any  one  else,  says  that  in  the  struggle  for 
existence  the  Chinese  have  the  advantage  over 
the  uncivilized  races,  generally,  of  restless  in- 
dustry ;  over  the  people  of  Europe,  that  of 
extreme  thrift ;  and  apparently  over  the  other  in- 
habitants of  the  earth,  that  of  being  suited  to  any 
climate.  Naturally,  therefore,  he  looks  upon  the 
possibility  of  their  adopting  the  usable  elements 
of  our  civilization  as  a  clanger  to  be  dreaded  by 
the  rest  of  the  world  as  a  real  peril. 

4.  The  religious  customs  of  the  Chinese  are 
so  contradictory  and  mixed  that  they  are  difficult 
to  describe.  The  land  is  full  of  pagodas,  temples, 
and  altars,  but  in  these,  three  religions  are  com- 


88        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

mingled.  Confucianism,  Taoism,  and  Buddhism 
are  the  religions  of  the  Chinese,  but  a  person  may 
profess  all  of  them  without  realizing  any  contra- 
diction. 

Confucianism  Confucianism    is    the   only    one   held    in    high 

esteem  by  their  literary  men,  and  is  more  nearly 
universal  than  any  of  the  others.  In  this  system 
the  Emperor  is  directed  to  address  and  worship 
heaven,  the  highest  god ;  the  common  people  are 
instructed  to  worship  the  spirits  of  the  departed, 
but  they  also  worship  heaven.  It  is  chiefly  a 
system  of  ethics.  "One  of  the  characteristics  of 
the  teachings  of  Confucianism  is  its  instructions 
upon  social  relations.  The  five  social  relations 
are  those  of  prince  and  minister,  husband  and 
wife,  father  and  son,  older  and  younger  brothers, 
and  friend  and  friend.  The  duties  of  these  rela- 
tions are  described.  Dignity,  seniority,  authority 
are  correlated  with  subordination,  dependence, 
servility;  and  the  spirit  of  freedom,  self-initiative, 
and  spontaneity  finds  little  scope  for  existence." 
Yet  Confucius,  in  the  influence  he  has  exerted 
and  still  exerts,  is  one  of  the  greatest  of  the  sons 
of  men — the  throneless  king  of  twenty-four  cen- 
turies and  of  one-fourth  the  human  race. 

Taoism  The  sacred  book  of  Taoism  is  less  than  half 

the  length  of  Mark's  Gospel,  and  is  the  shortest 
of  sacred  books.  Lao-tsze,  its  author,  was  a  great 
and  good  man,  one  of  the  prophets  outside  of 
Israel.    His  svstem  has  degenerated  in  the  hands 


Ch 


ina 


89 


of  his  followers  until  it  is  little  less  than  a  list  of 
virtues  to  be  cultivated  and  vices  to  be  avoided. 
"It  is  thus  a  system  of  moral  bookkeeping  be- 
tween man  and  the  spirits,  the  spirit  of  the  earth 
enshrined  in  the  kitchen  god  being  a  sort  of  de- 
tective to  check  up  the  facts."  It  has  further 
degenerated  into  nature-worship,  spiritualism, 
and  the  superstitions  of  feng-shui. 

Buddhism  was  imported  some  time  before  the 
Christian  era,  though  it  did  not  gain  a  sure  foot- 
hold until  some  time  later.  It,  no  doubt,  is  better 
than  no  religion,  though  its  celibate  priesthood 
and  lack  of  influence  over  the  morals  of  the  peo- 
ple render  it  of  small  value.  At  some  period  in 
the  past  it  took  on  some  of  the  customs  of  Roman 
Christianity,  which  are  still  recognized  in  its 
ceremonies  and  temples.  Incense-sticks  are  burnt 
at  the  family  shrine,  at  street-corner  shrines,  and 
in  the  temples.  Prayers  are  offered  and  charms 
are  worn  to  avoid  the  evil  that  is  feared,  or  to 
secure  the  good  desired.  In  some  cases  its  wor- 
shipers are  very  sincere ;  I  have  seen  the  tears 
flowing  down  their  cheeks  in  the  temples.  But 
in  other  cases,  and  perhaps  in  most  cases,  the 
priest  and  the  nuns  are  a  heartless  sham,  seeking 
to  play  on  the  fears  of  the  ignorant  people  and 
thus  secure  their  daily  bread. 

Large  sums  are  spent  by  the  Chinese  in  their 
idolatry.  Rich  families  give  much  for  the  serv- 
ices of  priests,  at  the  interment  of  their  friends. 


Buddhism 


Heathen 
Offerings 


90        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

and  in  offerings  in  the  temples  and  at  the  tombs. 
The  aggregate  outlay  is  very  large,  made  up  of 
repairs  of  temples,  purchase  of  idols,  and  petty 
daily  expenses,  such  as  incense-sticks,  candles, 
paper,  etc.,  and  larger  sacrifices  prepared  from 
time  to  time.  Dr.  S.  Wells  Williams  estimates 
the  annual  outlay  at  more  than  $400,000,000. 

Minor  Sects  Minor  sects  are  numerous,  many  of  whom  con- 

duct their  services  in  secret ;  all  seem  to  be  feel- 
ing after  God  or  striving  to -make  better  their  life 
in  this  world.  There  are  also  several  million 
Mohammedans  in  the  empire.  They  seem  to  have 
come  to  China  in  the  sixth  year  of  Hegira — A.D. 
628.  They  do  not  seek  to  proselyte,  and  grow 
only  with  the  increase  of  the  population.  A  col- 
ony of  Jews  has  also  been  discovered  in  a  most 
pitiable  and  destitute  condition. 

Emperor  5.     The   political   customs   of    China   are   em- 

bodied in  its  theory  of  parental  and  filial  piety. 
As  the  people  are  the  children  of  the  Emperor, 
so  he  is  the  son  of  heaven ;  this  gives  to  him  alone 
the  right  to  mediate  between  his  father,  heaven, 
and  his  children,  his  subjects.  His  sacrifices  and 
prayers  to  heaven  are  conducted  with  great 
parade  and  ceremony ;  the  chief  of  these  observ- 
ances is  conducted  at  the  winter  solstice,  before 
sunrise  on  the  morning  of  December  21,  at  the 
altar  in  Peking.  The  power  of  the  Emperor  is 
limited  by  ceremonial  laws  and  precedents.  In 
all  the  affairs  of  state  the  Emperor  is  assisted  in 


China  91 

his  deliberations  by  the  privy  council,  which, 
according  to  the  regulations  of  the  present 
dynasty,  consists  of  nine  Manchus  and  seven 
Chinese.  The  administrative  departments  are 
managed  by  six  boards ;  namely,  the  Board  of 
War,  the  Board  of  Punishments,  the  Board  of 
Office,  the  Board  of  Ceremonies,  the  Board  of 
Revenue,  and  the  Board  of  Works.  Besides  these 
there  are  the  Board  of  Music,  and  of  Censors ; 
this  last,  though  an  inferior,  exercises  consider- 
able influence,  since  its  officers,  both  in  the  capi- 
tal and  in  the  provinces,  are  encouraged  to  criti- 
cise freely  the  acts  of  the  Emperor  himself.  The 
provinces  are  ruled  over  by  officers  appointed  by 
the  Emperor,  and  who  are  responsible  to  him. 
Each  province  (in  a  few  cases  two  conjointly)  is 
presided  over  by  a  viceroy,  who,  in  an  emergency,  viceroys 
has  the  power  of  life  and  death  in  his  hands. 
Theoretically,  the  system  of  governing  in  the 
provinces  is  excellent,  but  practically  it  is  thor- 
oughly corrupt.  From  the  viceroy  down,  each 
officer  pays  a  high  price  for  his  office,  and  if 
order  and  peace  are  preserved,  each  is  allowed  all 
the  graft  he  can  collect ;  and  he  expects  to  enrich 
himself  by  the  spoils  of  his  public  office.  The 
villages,  towns,  and  cities  have  a  large  degree  of 
self-government,  and  the  spirit  of  a  form  of 
democracy  is  prevalent  over  the  empire.  When 
the  burdens  imposed  by  any  official  are  too 
grievous  to  be  longer  borne,  the  people  obey  the 


92        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

doctrine  of  Confucius  and  rebel ;  then  follows  a 
change  of  officers.  This  accounts  for  the  petty 
rebellions  constantly  occurring  in  China ;  but  the 
government  as  a  whole  is  flexible  and  stable.  A 
few  incorruptible  men  have  held  office  in  China. 
The  good  and  wise  Emperors  are  held  in  high 
esteem  as  Holy  Men,  and  the  few  noble  viceroys 
reveal  the  possibilities  of  the  Chinese,  and  give 
hope  for  the  future. 

Chinese  Characteristics. 

The  Chinese  are  the  most  numerous,  most 
homogeneous,  most  peaceful,  most  enduring  race 
of  all  time.  They  are  older  than  Greece  and 
Rome  or  the  Hebrews.  Large  libraries  existed 
in  China  long  before  modern  printing  was  in- 
vented. They  invented  gunpowder,  the  mariner's 
compass,  and  the  manufacture  of  porcelain  and 
silk.  More  than  two  thousand  years  ago  they 
built  the  Great  Wall,  1,500  miles  long,  40  feet 
wide,  and  25  feet  high,  and,  at  an  early  date,  the 
Great  Canal,  650  miles  long,  both  of  which  are 
striking  feats  of  engineering.  Yet,  after  so  many 
centuries,  this  nation  is  in  the  prime  of  its 
strength,  with  possibilities  unmeasured.  Its  peo- 
ple seem  to  have  a  youth  as  perpetual  as  the 
Anglo-Saxon.  Their  greatest  defects  are  gam- 
bling, deception,  the  opium  habit,  and  their  un- 
wise treatment  of  women.  But  the  character- 
istics which  have  brought  them  through  so  many 


China 


93 


centuries  of  difficulties,  with  strength  unabated, 
are  worth  noting: 

1.  Industry,  patience,  and  economy  are  Chi- 
nese qualities  revealed  everywhere. 

2.  Their  physical  vigor  is  seen  in  the  repro- 
ductive power  of  the  race.  The  land  swarms 
with  children  and  youth,  limited,  apparently,  only 
by  the  capacity  of  the  country  to  sustain  them. 
Their  lack  of  nerve  exhaustion  is  evident  from 
the  fact  that  the  toil,  the  noise,  the  sickening 
smells  seem  to  have  no  effect  whatever.  They 
frequently  live  and  thrive  under  conditions  which 
would  quickly  bring  Americans  to  an  end. 

3.  The  conservatism  of  the  Chinese  is  a  result 
of  their  love  for  the  things  of  the  past.  The 
reverence  of  all  classes  for  their  holy  men  and 
sages  and  for  all  their  ancestors  intensifies  it. 
The  golden  age  of  China  is  in  the  past.  The 
ancient  ruler,  the  ancient  sage,  ancient  customs, 
ancient  literature  are  held  in  the  highest  esteem. 

4.  Courtesy  is  a  habit  of  both  the  old  and  the 
young.  They  not  only  know  the  rules  of  polite- 
ness, having  been  taught  them  from  infancy,  but 
these  rules  have  become  habits,  which  they  obey 
without  effort,  almost  as  automatically  as  the 
rhythmic  beating  of  the  heart.  The  rules  of 
politeness  and  the  ethical  laws  of  life  are  all  of 
one  obligation  with  the  Chinese,  and  to  have 
"face"  is  to  believe  that  he  has  met  the  demands 
of  public  opinion  in  both  cases. 


Physical 
Endurance 


Conservative 


Courteous 


94        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

5.  Contentment  with  his  lot,  however  hard,  is 
also  a  characteristic  trait.  No  time  or  strength 
is  wasted  in  pessimistic  wailing  over  hard  condi- 
tions. "Without  being  aware  of  the  fact,  the 
Chinese  are  a  race  of  fatalists.  There  is  much 
in  the  classics  about  the  'decrees  of  heaven.' 
There  is  a  good  deal  in  popular  speech  about 
'heaven's  will.'  Expressions  of  this  sort  often 
bear  close  analogy  to  the  manner  in  which  we 
speak  of  providence,  but  there  is  this  radical  dif- 
ference in  the  underlying  thought:  to  us,  provi- 
dence signifies  the  care  and  forethought  of  a 
Being  who  is  in  distinct  relation  to  all  creatures 
that  on  the  earth  do  dwell,  all  of  whom  are  in- 
cluded in  his  thought  and  forethought ;  to  the 
Chinese,  whose  practical  conception  of  'heaven' 
is  an  altogether  impersonal  one  and  utterly 
vague,  whatever  the  mode  of  expression,  the 
practical  aspect  of  the  matter  is  simply  that  of 
fate."  With  this  thorough  belief  in  fate,  there 
is  associated  a  cheerful  contentment  in  trudging 
on  to  the  end  of  the  journey.  These  are  but  a 
few  of  the  many  admirable  qualities  of  the 
Chinese.  Sir  Robert  Hart,  an  Englishman  who 
spent  half  a  century  as  an  honored  official  of  the 
Chinese  government,  has  said:  "It  must  be 
freely  allowed  that  the  Chinese  possess  quite  as 
large  a  share  of  admirable  qualities  as  others, 
and  that  these  are  not  merely  to  be  found  in  iso- 
lated  cases  here  and  there,  but  are  characteristic 


China  95 

of  the  race  as  a  whole  and  the  civilization  it  has 
developed. 

"They,  as  a  people,  are  well  behaved,  intelligent, 
economical,  and  industrious ;  they  can  learn  any- 
thing and  do  anything;  they  are  punctiliously 
polite;  they  worship  talent,  and  they  believe  in 
right  so  firmly  that  they  scorn  to  think  that  it 
requires  to  be  supported  or  enforced  by  might ; 
they  delight  in  literature,  and  everywhere  they 
have  their  literary  clubs  and  coteries  for  hearing 
and  discussing  each  other's  essays  and  verses ; 
they  possess  and  practise  an  admirable  system  of 
ethics,  and  they  are  generous,  charitable,  and 
fond  of  good  works ;  they  never  forget  a  favor, 
and  they  make  rich  returns  for  any  kindness  ;  and 
though  they  know  money  will  buy  service,  a  man 
must  be  more  than  wealthy  to  win  public  esteem 
and  request;  they  are  practical,  teachable,  and 
wonderfully  gifted  with  common  sense ;  they  are 
excellent  artisans,  reliable  workmen,  and  of  a 
good  faith  that  every  one  acknowledges  and 
admires  in  their  commercial  dealings. 

"In  no  country  that  is  or  was  has  the  command- 
ment, 'Honor  thy  father  and  thy  mother,'  been  so 
religiously  obeyed  as  among  the  Chinese,  or  so 
fully  and  without  exception  given  effect  to,  and 
it  is,  in  fact,  the  keynote  of  their  family,  social, 
official,  and  national  life ;  and  because  it  is  so, 
their  days  are  long  in  the  land  which  God  has 
Given  them." 


96        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


An  Isolated 
Nation 


Aroused  by 

Foreign 

Aggressiveness 


New  China. 

The  isolation  of  China  and  the  slight  influence 
of  civilized  nations  upon  her  for  so  long  a  time, 
were  due  to  several  causes,  chief  among  which 
were  the  physical  wall  of  separation  around  the 
nation ;  bounded  on  the  north  and  east  by  the 
ocean,  and  on  the  north  and  west  by  mountain 
chains ;  the  great  difficulty  of  learning  the  Chi- 
nese language ;  the  ill  treatment  received  from 
foreign  nations,  who  appeared  to  the  Chinese  as 
pirates  and  plunderers;  the  self-sufficiency  of 
China  to  supply  her  own  wants ;  the  utter  con- 
servatism of  the  nation.  But  during  the  last 
century  many  influences  have  combined  to 
awaken  this  slumbering  giant : 

1.  Conflicts  with  other  nations,  in  some  cases 
leading  to  wars.  Without  justifying  all  these. 
Providence  has  overruled  them  for  the  final  good 
of  China.  In  1839-42  there  was  war  with  Eng- 
land, which  resulted  in  the  opening  of  five  ports 
to  foreign  trade.  In  1857-60  there  was  another 
war  with  England,  which  brought  further  for- 
eign influences  to  China.  In  1885  there  was  war 
with  France,  which  led  to  closer  contact  with 
that  nation.  In  1894  war  broke  out  between 
China  and  Japan,  resulting  in  speedy  victory  for 
the  latter.  The  result  of  China's  defeat,  by  her 
small  and  formerly-despised  neighbor,  opened 
her  eyes  to  the  value  of  Western  knowledge  and 


Empekok's    Temple,    I'kkim 


Bound   Feet   Compared   With    Numbek    Five    Sikh;. 


View  of  Canton. 


Boat  Life,  Canton. 


China 


97 


methods.  Her  wisest  statesmen  began  to  imitate 
the  changes  already  made  in  Japan.  In  the  sum- 
mer of  1900  the  Boxer  war  broke  out  in  different 
parts  of  the  old  empire.  Aroused  by  the  aggres- 
siveness of  foreigners,  China  made  an  effort  to 
destroy  or  drive  out  all  foreigners  and  their 
friends.  The  siege  of  the  ambassadors  at  Peking 
and  their  rescue  by  the  civilized  armies  followed. 
While  this  struggle  tested  the  native  converts,  as 
by  fire,  the  outcome  was  the  further  opening  of 
China  to  Western  influences.  The  Russo-Japan- 
ese war  in  1904-05  revealed  to  China  the  immense 
advantage  of  modern  knowledge  and  ways,  and 
thus  hastened  the  new  era  for  old  China. 

2.  The  movement  in  China  for  modern  edu- 
cation. After  the  defeat  by  Japan,  the  young 
Emperor  in  1898  resolved  on  a  thorough  reform 
in  a  system  of  national  education.  This  was  be- 
gun, but  the  Boxer  war  destroyed  it.  Recently 
the  Emperor,  under  the  advice  of  leading  vice- 
roys, and  with  the  cooperation  of  the  Empress 
Dowager,  has  issued  an  edict  for  universal 
modern  education.  The  work  is  begun  in  ear- 
nest. The  old  examination-halls  are  removed. 
Schoolhouses  have  been  built ;  in  some  cases  old 
temples  have  been  turned  into  schoolhouses.  So 
far  as  there  are  means,  money,  and  teachers,  the 
new  system  is  being  established  over  the  empire. 
Tests  of  scholarship  and  qualifications  for  office 
have  undergone  a  radical  change.    To  the  knowl- 


Modern 

Education 

Introduced 


98        Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

edge  of  the  ancient  classics  there  is  now  added  a 
requirement  for  modern  knowledge  as  a  necessity 
for  civil  service.  The  result  has  been  that  a 
large  body  of  students  have  gone  abroad  for  edu- 
cation. In  1906-07  there  were  over  15,000 
Chinese  students  in  Japan,  and  many  others  were 
in  Europe  and  America.  This  is  a  leaven  of 
great  significance. 
War  Against  3.     China's  heroic  effort  to  destroy  her  opium 

°pium  traffic  and  habit.     The  opium  evil  in   China   is 

modern.  Prior  to  1842  she  had  laws  against  the 
traffic,  but  at  that  time  England  required  her  to 
open  her  doors  to  the  opium  trade  from  India. 
To  compete  with  this  foreign  article  and  reap 
profits  from  the  business,  China  began  to  culti- 
vate poppies  and  to  make  opium,  which  soon 
became  so  cheap  and  plentiful  that  anybody 
could  get  it,  and  China  began  a  drunken  debauch 
that  now  curses  more  than  100,000,000  of  her 
people.  Her  statesmen  became  aroused,  and  the 
throne  issued  an  edict  against  the  traffic.  About 
one  year  ago  England  agreed  with  China  to  re- 
duce her  imports  of  opium  as  rapidly  as  China 
would  reduce  the  domestic  supply.  It  is  now 
agreed  that  this  reduction  shall  be  one-tenth 
yearly  till  the  evil  business  is  destroyed.  State 
and  Christian  refuges  have  been  opened  over  the 
empire  to  treat  and  cure  the  opium  habit.  So- 
cieties, like  our  temperance  societies,  have  been 
organized  to  encourage  this  great  reform.    H.  B. 


China  99 

Morgan  writes  that  the  great  autumn  festival, 
which  was  kept  all  over  China  in  the  week 
ending  September  8,  1907,  was  celebrated  in 
Hang  Chow  by  a  civic  function — the  burning  on  Opium  Pipes 
the  City  Hall,  in  view  of  the  whole  city,  of  all  the 
opium  pipes  and  wooden  trays  from  the  recently- 
closed  opium  dens.  Gorgeous  banners  floated  in 
the  breeze.  Each  side  of  the  pyramid  of  pipes 
was  about  six  feet  at  the  base  and  about  seven 
feet  in  height.  They  were  wrapped  in  bundles 
of  thirty  or  forty,  and  the  total  number  must 
have  been  between  five  and  six  thousand.  Mr. 
Morgan  says :  "When  I  arrived  at  nine  o'clock, 
a  considerable  number  of  people  had  gathered, 
some  on  the  balconies  of  tea-houses,  and  other 
points  of  vantage.  As  time  passed,  various 
squads  of  uniformed  students,  with  the  banners 
of  their  schools,  drew  up  at  different  spots  to 
witness  the  proceedings.  At  9 :  30,  dry  straw 
was  piled  around  the  stacks  and  the  whole  del- 
uged with  oil.  Then  mandarin  chairs  began  to 
arrive,  and  large  numbers  of  people  poured  up 
the  various  pathways  leading  to  the  hill.  At  the 
hour  appointed  the  torch  was  applied,  and  the 
two  piles  of  doomed  instruments  disappeared 
forever."  Years  ago  Japan,  warned  by  the  dire 
effects  of  opium  in  China,  forbade  the  importation 
or  manufacture  of  opium,  except  under  stringent 
conditions  for  medicine  only.  The  Japanese  fears 
opium  as  we  fear  cholera.     "China's  curse  has 


100      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


A   High 

Commission 

Studies 

Foreign 

Institutions 


A    Constitutional 

Government 

Promised 


been  Japan's  warning',  and  a  warning  heeded." 
The  removal  of  the  traffic  and  the  habit  will 
be  China's  longest  leap  into  the  light  of  her 
new  day.  So  important  is  this  matter  that  an 
international  congress  of  Christian  nations  to 
encourage  the  movement  is  being  planned  to 
meet  in  Shanghai  at  an  early  date. 

4.  In  1905  a  high  commission  was  sent  from 
China  to  study  the  institutions  of  civilized  coun- 
tries over  the  world  and  to  report  on  such  as  they 
deem  advisable.  This  was  a  select  and  influential 
body  of  men.  On  their  return,  after  a  visit  to  the 
chief  nations,  they  reported  that  the  wealthiest 
and  strongest  nations  in  the  world  to-day  are 
governed  by  constitutional  governments,  and 
they  earnestly  requested  the  throne  to  issue  a 
decree  fixing  on  five  years  as  the  limit  within 
which  "China  will  adopt  a  constitutional  form  of 
government."  In  1906  an  edict  on  the  subject 
was  issued.  The  throne  issued  another  in  1907, 
in  which  it  was  said :  "We  issued  an  edict  sanc- 
tioning the  principles  of  constitutional  govern- 
ment for  the  country ;  the  date  for  actually 
putting  into  force  the  decree  is  to  depend  upon 
the  speed  or  tardiness  of  our  subjects,  who  shall 
be  able  to. show  a  proper  appreciation  and  knowl- 
edge of  the  benefits  of  self-government  to  be 
granted  them.  As  a.proof  of  the  earnest  wish  of 
the  throne  to  give  a  constitution  to  the  country, 
we  have  alrcadv  commanded  the  establishment. 


China  101 

as  a  first  step  to  the  desired  end  of  parliamentary 
representation,  of  an  imperial  assembly  to  discuss 
affairs  of  state.  It  is  evident,  therefore,  that  the 
people  must  first  be  educated  and  taught  that 
they  must  cultivate  loyalty  to  the  sovereign  and 
love  for  country  as  the  groundwork  of  knowl- 
edge, for  without  education  how  can  the  people 
obtain  knowledge?  And  without  being  given  the 
opportunity  of  local  self-government,  how  can 
they  obtain  the  requisite  experience  to  govern 
the  whole  country?"  It  is  thus  seen  that,  in 
theory  at  least,  great  changes  are  contemplated 
in  the  Chinese  government. 

5.  The  introduction  of  railways  is  another  Railways 
transforming  agency.  Railways  were  violently  Introduced 
opposed  when  first  introduced  into  China,  but 
now  a  railroad  extends  from  Peking  southward 
to  Hankow,  on  the  great  river,  and  it  is  surveyed, 
and  in  part  built,  on  south  to  Canton.  When 
this  road  is  finished  one  may  go  from  Hongkong, 
on  the  south  coast,  through  the  heart  of  China, 
to  Peking  in  the  north,  nearly  1,500  miles,  in 
three  days,  whereas  formerly  the  same  journey 
occupied  more  than  two  months.  There  are  ten 
other  roads  contemplated  or  in  process  of  build- 
ing. There  are  now  3,746  miles  completed,  and 
1,622  miles  under  construction.  These  lines  will 
carry  foreign  persons  and  goods  into  many  parts 
of  the  empire,  and  will  thus  bring  the  Chinese 
into  contact  with  Western  persons  and  things. 


102      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Post-Office, 
Telegraph,  and 
Telephone 
Systems 


A  Brighter 
Future  for 
Women 


The  road  will  also  increase  traffic  between  differ- 
ent provinces,  as  well  as  increase  foreign  com- 
merce, and  will  help  to  take  away  the  suspicion 
and  prejudice  common  to  an  isolated  people. 

6.  The  post-office,  the  telegraph,  and  the  tele- 
phone now  spread  like  a  net  over  this  great 
realm.  Over  these,  knowledge  runs  to  and' fro. 
Papers,  magazines,  books,  letters,  and  dispatches 
from  all  parts  of  the  world  now  reach  every  part 
of  China.  In  connection  with  these  means  for 
distributing  knowledge,  the  newspaper  and  book 
business  in  China  has  grown  at  a  rapid  rate ;  and 
thus  the  events  of  the  world  as  well  as  those  at 
home  are  discussed,  public  sentiment  created, 
and  the  evolution  of  the  nation  hastened. 

7.  The  modern  treatment  of  women.  "In 
China,  woman,  as  such,  has  been  unhonored 
rather  than  dishonored,  having  no  personal  name, 
but  only  two  surnames,  that  of  her  own  and  that 
of  her  husband's  family.  The  'three  subjections' 
bounded  her  career — in  childhood  to  her  parents, 
in  marriage  to  her  husband,  in  widowhood  to  her 
sons.  With  the  new  ideas  now  pouring  into 
China  this  state  of  things  cannot  permanently 
continue.  To  an  average  Chinese  woman  the 
American  educated  woman  belongs  to  a  different 
range  of  existence — and  so  she  does.  But  is  it 
not  remarkable  that  before  American  colleges 
for  Chinese  women  in  China  have  had  time  to 
become  acclimated,  they  have  suddenly  become 


China 


103 


the  ideal  of  the  Chinese  themselves — a  change  as 
reactionary  as  that  of  pounding  rice  with  a  stone 
pestle  in  a  mortar,  to  hulling  it  in  a  mill  worked 
by  electricity  generated  by  water  power.  Amer- 
ican ideals  and  ideas  have  already  been  intro- 
duced into  China,  where  they  are  now  working 
silently  and  unseen.  Our  greatest  influence  must 
come  through  the  lives  of  the  great  men  and 
women.  Women  are  to-day  being  educated,  and 
bondage  is  no  longer  universal.  A  woman  may 
now  be  a  physician,  or  editor.  The  Woman's 
Daily  Journal,  of  Peking,  perhaps  the  only  one  of 
its  kind  in  the  world,  is  itself  a  sign  of  the  new 
times.  Its  capable  woman  editor  has  also  inter- 
ested herself  in  all  modern  knowledge." 

8.  A  new  army  and  navy  are  being  created  on 
Western  models,  and  in  1905  a  great  military 
review  was  held  on  the  plains  of  Chihli  in  the 
presence  of  foreign  military  attaches  and  corre- 
spondents, who  were  impressed  with  the  revolu- 
tionary change  in  China's  military  effectiveness. 
During  the  succeeding  year  similar  exercises 
were  held  in  northern  Honan.  It  is  now  planned 
to  unify  the  hitherto  distinct  provincial  forces 
into  one  great  national  army  of  at  least  half  a 
million  soldiers.  General  Gordon,  who  led  "the 
ever-victorious"  Chinese  army  against  the  Taip- 
ing  rebels,  is  quoted  as  saying  that  the  Chinese 
make  the  best  soldiers  in  the  world,  when  prop- 
erly armed,  drilled,  and  officered. 


A  Daily 
Paper  for 
Women 


A  New  Army 
and  Navy 
Created 


104      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


"Yellow  Peril" 
May  be 
Averted 


Foot-Binding 
to  Disappear 


Sir  Robert  Hart,  an  Englishman,  who  served 
the  best  interests  of  China  for  a  long  lifetime, 
just  resigning  last  winter,  before  leaving  gave 
the  Chinese  a  plan  for  a  new  navy,  which  they 
are  reported  to  be  carrying  into  effect.  To  be 
able  to  defend  themselves  against  foreign  foes, 
they  now  regard  as  their  most  pressing  duty. 

What  may  take  place  when  new  China  has  a 
great  army  and  navy  and  has  developed  her 
latent  wealth  to  the  measure  of  her  necessities, 
we  can  only  infer.  The  "Yellow  Peril"  may  be- 
come a  reality,  but,  rather,  let  the  means  be  used 
to  Christianize  her  and  the  peril  be  averted.  Her 
spirit  is  naturally  peaceful ;  she  does  not  love 
war.  If  the  Christian  nations  treat  her  properly 
and  give  her  aid  in  this,  the  day  of  her  trial  and 
transition,  she  will  come  into  the  sisterhood  of 
nations  in  peace  and  good  will.  This  is  to  be 
desired  for  our  own  sakes  as  well  as  for  hers. 

9.  Other  reforms  are  abroad  over  the  land. 
Foot-binding,  which  has  been  the  sorrow  and 
degradation  of  the  upper-class  women  for  a  long 
time,  is  antagonized  by  a  national  organization 
of  women,  and  is  destined  to  disappear. 

The  former  lack  of  patriotism  is  giving  way  to 
growing  love  for  China  and  the  nation.  The 
sentiment  of  "China  for  the  Chinese"  is  an  out- 
growth of  patriotism.  The  Emperor's  birthday 
is  now  observed  by  the  high  schools,  with  mili- 
tary drills,  and  other  physical  exercises. 


China 


105 


The  laws  of  the  nation  and  the  treatment  of 
witnesses  and  prisoners  are  becoming  more 
humane.  Industrial  institutes  for  training  the 
most  unpromising  persons  to  make  a  better  living 
are  being  held  in  many  cities.  "Similar  enter- 
prises for  the  helpless  poor,  men  and  women, 
boys  and  girls,  have  been  opened  in  temples  and 
other  places  under  a  kind  of  Bureau  of  Charities, 
the  machinery  and  teachers  being  frequently  im- 
ported from  Japan.  The  abundant  patronage  of 
these  places  shows  that  they  are  meeting  a  great 
need." 


More   Humane 
Laws,  etc. 


Christian  China. 

As  early  as  505  A.D.  Nestorian  Christians  first 
entered  the  empire.  Driven  out  of  the  Roman 
empire,  they  penetrated  western  China,  and 
thence  spread  eastward  to  the  ocean.  For  sev- 
eral centuries  the  Nestorian  faith  spread,  and 
probably  produced  a  translation  of  the  Bible  into 
the  Chinese  language.  Marco  Polo  speaks  of 
these  Christians  as  numerous  and  respected  in 
the  thirteenth  century.  But  they  and  their  trans- 
lation of  the  Word  of  God  have  long  since  per- 
ished. In  1625,  at  the  ancient  capital  of  Shen-hsi, 
Hsi-an  Fu,  was  found  a  monumental  slab  erected 
to  these  Christians  in  781  A.D.  Ever  since  it  was 
unearthed  it  had  been  standing  in  the  grounds  of 
a  temple  outside  the  west  gate  at  Hsi-an.  In 
•October,  1907,  it  was  removed  into  the  city,  into 


Early 

Missionary 

Efforts 


106      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


an  honorable  place  in  the  College  of  Ancient 
Monuments. 

Romanism  entered  China  in  1291.  It  translated 
the  Holy  Scriptures  into  the  Chinese ;  it  had 
noble  martyrs,  and  made  many  converts.  It 
finally,  however,  meddled  with  civil  affairs  and 
lost  its  influence  and  many  of  its  followers.  An 
imperial  edict  was  issued  against  it  in  1724.  The 
chief  conflicts  between  the  Chinese  and  Chris- 
tians have  been  due  to  the  policy  of  Rome  to 
interfere  with  matters  of  civil  government.  After 
the  opening  of  Chinese  ports  in  1842,  Romanism 
revived,  and  now  there  are  reported  in  China 
725,000  converts. 

The  Greek  church  gained  entrance  into  Peking 
in  1685.    Its  chief  work  is  in  Mongolia. 

Robert  Morrison  was  the  human  founder  of 
the  church  of  Christ  in  China.  Morrison  was 
planning  to  go  to  Africa,  but  praying  that  Cod 
would  "station  him  in  that  part  of  the  mission- 
ary field  where  the  difficulties  were  the  greatest 
and.  to  all  human  appearance,  the  most  insur- 
mountable." God  sent  him  to  plant  Protestant 
Christianity  in  China.  He  reached  Canton,  Sep- 
tember 7,  1807.  His  twenty-seven  years  of 
Chinese  service  are  thus  summarized  in  the  in- 
scription on  his  tomb  in  the  cemetery  for  the 
Protestant  dead  at  Macao:  "Sacred  to  the 
memory  of  Robert  Morrison,  D.D.,  the  first 
Protestant  missionarv  to  China,   where,  after  a 


China  107 

service  of  twenty-seven  years,  cheerfully  spent 
in  extending  the  kingdom  of  the  blessed  Re- 
deemer, during  which  period  he  compiled  and 
published  a  dictionary  of  the  Chinese  language, 
founded  the  Anglo-Chinese  college  at  Malacca, 
and  for  several  years  labored  alone  on  a  Chinese 
version  of  the  Holy  Scriptures,  which  he  was 
spared  to  see  completed  and  widely  circulated 
among  those  for  whom  it  was  destined,  he 
sweetly  slept  in  Jesus.  He  was  born  in  Morpeth, 
in  Northumberland,  January  5,  1782;  was  sent  to 
China  by  the  London  Missionary  Society  in  1807, 
was  for  twenty-five  years  translator  in  the  em- 
ploy of  the  East  India  Company,  and  died  at 
Canton,  August  1,  1834." 

Morrison,  with  great  faith  but  amid  great  diffi-  First 
culties,  secured  his  first  convert  in  1814.  For- 
bidden to  preach  in  public,  he  won  only  a  few  in 
his  entire  career.  William  Milne  reenforced 
Morrison  in  1813,  but  after  nine  years  of  faithful 
service  he  passed  to  his  reward.  In  1820 
Milne  wrote,  "With  a  proportionate  increase  of 
laborers,  Christianity  shall  in  every  succeeding 
twenty  years  double  its  accession  of  members ; 
then  at  the  close  of  the  first  century  from  the 
commencement  of  the  missions,  the  country  will 
have  one  thousand  Christians."  .  So  great  and 
numerous  were  the  difficulties  in  the  way  of 
Christianizing  China  that  even  this  forecast  re- 
quired great  faith. 


Convert 


108      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Morrison 

Centenary 

Conference 


Marvelous 
Growth  of 
a  Century 


In  1907,  from  April  25  to  May  8,  the  China 
Centenary  Missionary  Conference  was  held  in 
Shanghai,  to  celebrate  the  coming  of  Morrison 
to  China,  and  to  take  a  survey  of  what  God  had 
wrought  in  the  meantime.  To  that  great  meet- 
ing there  came  from  all  parts  of  China  and  from 
Christian  lands  1,170  delegates  and  visitors.  Rev. 
John  C.  Gibson,  D.D.,  the  chairman  of  the  com- 
mittee on  the  Chinese  church,  said :  "Now,  at 
the  end  of  the  century,  we  count  a  church  of 
200,000  communicants,  which  implies  a  Christian 
community  of  750,000  souls  who  have  chosen  the 
service  of  Christ,  besides  some  130,000  children 
and  young  people  who  are  growing  up  in  the 
same  holy  fellowship.  This  body  of  Christian 
souls,  with  its  equipment  of  gathered  spiritual 
experience,  of  Bible,  hymnology  and  Christian 
literature,  its  places  of  worship,  its  churches, 
schools,  colleges,  hospitals,  and  printing-presses, 
its  ordinances  of  worship,  its  discipline  of  prayer, 
and  its  habits  of  family  and  personal  religion, 
with  its  martyrology,  and  its  gathered  memories 
of  gracious  living  and  holy  dying — this  is  the 
wonderful  fruit  which  one  hundred  years  have 
left  in  our  hands.  But  the  Chinese  church  is 
precious  to  us  not  so  much  because  of  the  harvest 
of  the  past,  as  because  it  is  the  seed-corn  of  the 
future.  In  this  Centenary  Conference  let  us 
concern  ourselves  more  with  the  second  century 
than  the  first.     If  we  try  to  forecast  what  the 


China 


109 


second  century  will  bring,  it  is  certain  that  we 
will  underestimate  it  as  much  as  Milne  under- 
estimated the  expected  results  of  the  first." 

There  are  to-day  about  four  thousand  mission- 
aries in  China,  and  near  ten  thousand  Chinese 
helpers,  occupying  about  seven  hundred  centers 
and  thirty-eight  hundred  out-stations. 

The  different  agencies  at  work  for  the  Chris- 
tianization  of  China  are  the  following: 

1.  The  distribution  of  the  Bible.  There  is  a 
greater  demand  for  the  Bible  than  for  any  other 
book.  During  the  year  1907  the  total  circulation 
of  the  Scriptures  in  China  was  as  follows : 

The  British  and  Foreign  Bible  Society.  1,084,311 
The  National  Bible  Society  of  Scotland  948,007 
The  American  Bible  Society 497,659 


This  gives  a  total  of 2,529,977 

For  the  last  four  years  the  circulation  has 
annually  exceeded  two  millions,  and  for  the  last 
two  years  it  has  exceeded  two  and  a  half  mil- 
lions. These  were  nearly  all  sold,  a  few  thou- 
sands only  having  been  given  away.  Cheering 
as  are  these  figures,  yet  if  all  the  Scriptures 
issued  in  China  were  still  in  use,  only  one  person 
in  every  twelve  would  have  received  even  a 
single  Gospel  or  other  portion  of  the  Scriptures ; 
only  one  person  in  one  hundred  and  seventy 
would  possess  a  New  Testament,  while  less  than 


Agencies 
at  Work 

Bible 
Circulation 


110      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


one  in  a  thousand  would  be  the  glad  possessor  of 
a  whole  Bible.  The  Bible  is  now  translated  into 
each  large  dialect  of  China ;  Bible  societies  are 
well  equipped  for  printing ;  if  the  churches  will 
furnish  the  necessary  money,  a  Bible  will  soon  be 
in  the  home  of  every  Chinese  family. 

2.  The  Christian  press  is  another  valuable 
agency  in  the  conversion  of  China.  Literature 
is  highly  esteemed  by  the  nation.  Fragments  of 
paper  are  gathered  up  on  the  streets  and  carried 
away  to  be  carefully  burned,  lest  they  be  trampled 
upon  by  thoughtless  persons.  There  are  eight 
tract  society  presses  and  five  large  mission 
presses  in  China.  From  these  presses  nearly 
200,000,000  pages  of  Christian  and  scientific 
literature  are  sent  forth  each  year,  and  the  de- 
mand and  supply  are  yearly  increasing. 

3.  The  Young  Men's  Christian  Association  is 
organized  in  Hongkong,  Shanghai,  Tientsin,  and 
some  other  cities.  In  Shanghai  a  fine  building 
was  completed  early  this  year.  At  this  place 
there  was  a  membership  last  year  of  355.  There 
were  enrolled  in  the  educational  classes  260  men, 
and  four  evangelistic  services  were  held  each 
week.  The  new  building  will  furnish  a  home  for 
a  thousand  young  men  in  the  center  of  Shanghai. 
The  association  aims  to  reach  the  students  in 
both  the  Christian  and  the  non-Christian  colleges 
in  China,  and  is  a  large  and  important  factor  in 
her  uplift. 


China 


111 


4.  The  Sunday  school  is  just  beginning  its 
work  in  China.  More  than  one-half  the  churches 
have  no  Sunday  schools ;  only  a  little  over  one- 
half  of  the  colleges  and  boarding-schools  have 
Sunday  schools.  There  is  no  question  in  the 
minds  of  the  missionaries  as  to  its  usefulness ; 
but  many  difficulties  will  have  to  be  removed, 
as  there  are  few  good  teachers,  no  suitable 
courses,  lack  of  time,  rush  of  other  work,  etc. 
It  is  evident,  however,  that  the  Sunday-school 
work  will  soon  become  as  important  a  factor  in 
the  church  in  China  as  it  now  is  in  the  home 
lands. 

5.  Medical  work  has  opened  the  way  for  the 
preaching  of  the  gospel.  As  an  evangelistic 
agency,  medical  missions  have  been  so  fruitful 
that  this  alone  would  be  sufficient  reason  for 
their  establishment  and  for  their  continuance. 
Opportunity  to  preach  to  crowds  is  found  at 
every  dispensary  waiting-room,  and  personal 
Christian  work  is  done  in  every  hospital,  and  at 
a  time  when  many  are  moved  by  the  uncertainty 
of  life,  when  their  hearts  are  touched  by  the 
kindness  shown  them,  and  when  they  have  leisure 
and  rest  to  think,  inquire,  believe,  and  obey.  Jesus 
went  about  doing  good  and  healing  the  sick,  and 
medical  missions  are  object-lessons  in  Christian 
love  of  a  like  character.  The  church  is  best 
proving  her  high  calling  when  she  relieves  both 
bodily  and  spiritual  suffering. 


Sunday 
Schools 


Medical  Work 


112      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Christian 
Schools 


Evangelistic 

Work 

Paramount 


6.  Christian  education  is  an  essential  part  of 
the  missionary  program.  The  work  extends 
from  the  kindergarten  up  to  the  great  university. 
Educational  work  similar  to  that  done  in  our  own 
country,  though  usually  of  a  humbler  character, 
is  needed  over  China.  Then,  the  Christian  col- 
leges and  normal  schools  have  a  great  mission  to 
provide  teachers  for  the  state  and  common 
schools  now  being  opened  over  China.  This  is 
one  of  the  best  channels  of  influence  through 
which  the  church  may  aid  China  in  her  transition 
period. 

7.  Evangelism,  the  spreading  of  the  good 
news,  and  the  persuading  of  men  to  accept  it,  is 
the  greatest  work  of  the  missionary.  The  great 
Shanghai  Centenary  Conference  declared  that 
every  missionary,  whether  engaged  in  pastoral, 
medical,  educational,  or  charitable  work,  was 
first  and  foremost  an  evangelist,  and  that  in  all 
branches  of  missionary  work  the  evangelistic 
purpose  should  always  be  emphasized.  .A  for- 
ward movement  was  planned,  and  the  Chinese 
churches  encouraged  to  take  their  share  in  it  by 
the  support  of  their  own  evangelists  and  by  doing 
personal  work.  The  Evangelistic  Work  Com- 
mittee, appointed  at  the  Shanghai  Conference, 
took  immediate  steps  for  large  reinforcements  to 
push  this  forward  movement.  In  order  to  make 
the  idea  as  to  what  is  meant  by  the  evangelization 
of  a  people  as  uniform  as  possible,  it  has  been 


r.   P..   Dispensary  and  Physi- 
cian's   Residence,    Canton. 


Street  Chapel.   Sir   Lam. 


:Jf          x^  »if  Jrfli         4       hi         ■ 

,"HB 

■♦'♦ 

1 

China  United  Brethren  Mission  Conference 


TWO     RESC1  i:i'     I'iiI'MH.I  M 


(iIRI.S      BOAHDINO    Si   HOOL,    CA.NTOX. 


Union 


China  113 

suggested  that  fifty  days'  preaching  to  one  thou- 
sand of  a  population  should  give  such  knowledge 
of  the  gospel  as  would  suffice  for  the  acceptance 
of  Jesus  as  a  personal  Savior,  and  that  the  time 
in  which  this  may  be  done  be  twenty  years.  This, 
then,  is  the  evangelistic  movement  planned  by 
that  conference  for  China.  To  give  the  gospel 
to  every  creature  in  China  in  this  way  in  twenty 
years  is  a  great  work ;  but  faith  in  the  living  God 
says  that  it  can  be  done. 

This  same  conference,  representing  all  Protes-  church 
tant  missions  working  in  China,  passed  resolu- 
tions looking  toward  a  union  of  the  different 
churches  in  the  empire.  They  declared  their 
desire  that  in  "planting  the  church  of  Christ  in 
Chinese  soil,"  it  be  but  "one  church  under  the 
sole  control  of  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ,  governed 
by  the  Word  of  the  living  God,  and  led  by  his 
guiding  Spirit.  They  recommended  to  the  home 
churches  that  they  "sanction  the  recognition  by 
their  missionaries  of  the  right  of  the  churches  in 
China  planted  by  them  to  organize  themselves  in 
accordance  with  their  own  views  of  truth  and 
duty,  suitable  arrangements  being  made  for  the 
due  representation  of  the  missionaries  or  their 
governing  bodies  until  these  churches  shall  be  in 
a  position  to  assume  the  full  responsibilities  of 
self-support  and  self-government."  They  further 
recommend  that  for  the  present  "the  most  urgent 
and    practical    step    is    to    endeavor    to    unite 


114      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Old  Religions 
Decaying 


China  Open 
to   Missionaries 


Devotion 
of    Native 
Converts 


churches  planted  in  China  by  different  missions 
of  the  same  order."  Steps  in  this  direction  have 
already  been  taken  by  several  bodies. 

Two  other  facts  of  utmost  significance  must 
be  added : 

(1)  The  general  decay  of  faith  in  the  old  re- 
ligions. A  widespread  sentiment  exists,  espe- 
cially among  the  educated,  against  the  worship 
of  idols.  The  temples  are  often  grossly  neg- 
lected, and  the  cultivated  classes,  both  men  and 
women,  speak  publicly  against  such  worship. 
The  Chinese  press,  almost  without  exception, 
speaks  in  derision  of  idol  worship.  The  recent 
attempt  to  elevate  the  worship  of  Confucius  and 
give  him  divine  honor  is  regarded  as  of  doubtful 
influence  and  success. 

(2)  The  toleration  given  to  the  missionaries 
to-day.  This  is  granted  on  all  points  except  one : 
pupils  and  teachers  in  government  schools  are 
required  to  do  homage  to  the  Confucian  tablets. 
But  there  have  been  cases  where  Christian  teach- 
ers have  been  exempted  from  obeying  this  rule. 
Missionaries  have  the  largest  liberty  for  the  pur- 
chase of  property,  for  travel,  and  for  the  opening 
and  the  prosecution  of  Christian  work  in  every 
part  of  the  empire. 

The  Boxer  war  tested  the  Chinese  Christians. 
There  were  many  martyrs  who  died  for  the  name 
of  Jesus,  and  it  still  costs  something  to  be  a 
Christian  in  China.     All  hope  of  official  prefer- 


China  115 

nient  must  be  abandoned,  for  the  duties  of  every 
magistrate  includes  temple  ceremonies  that  no 
Christian  could  conduct.  In  these  humble  Chinese 
the  world  has  again  seen  a  vital  faith,  again  seen 
that  thq  age  of  heroism  has  not  passed,  again 
seen  that  men  and  women  are  willing  to  die  for 
Christ.    Nobly  they  have  stood  the  test. 

United  Brethren  in  China. 

Our  mission  work  in  China  is  operated  by  the      Beginnings 
Woman's  Missionary  Association  of  our  Church. 
Work  was  carried  oh  for  some  years  among  the 
Chinese  on  the  Pacific  Coast,  with  the  expecta- 
tion of  extending  the  same  to  China. 

Our  Chinese  teacher,  Moy  Ling,  having  leave 
of  absence  in  1889,  to  visit  his  native  city  of 
Canton,  in  south  China,  was  accompanied  by 
Rev.  George  Sickafoose  to  assist  in  locating  the 
mission,  and  by  two  young  ladies  to  act  as  mis- 
sionaries. 

Canton  was  decided  upon  as  our  base  of  oper-  Location 
ations.  It  is  situated  on  the  Pearl  River,  ninety 
miles  from  the  coast.  This  is  our  headquarters, 
and  our  work  now  extends  fifty  miles  south  and 
sixty  miles  east  of  the  city.  Canton  is  one  of  the 
greatest  cities  of  China,  having,  with  its  environ- 
ment of  fifty  miles,  a  population  of  11,000,000. 
Our  Church  was  providentially  led,  and  planned 
wisely  in  entering  this  stronghold  of  idolatry, 
ignorance,  and  superstition. 


116      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


After  spending  some  time  on  the  field,  three 
of  those  going  out  returned  to  America,  Miss 
Austia  Patterson  remaining  as  pioneer  of  the 
work.  She  at  once  began  acquiring  the  language, 
assisting  in  day-school  and  Sunday-school  work, 
and  visiting  in  the  homes  as  she  had  access.  With 
strong  conviction  of  God's  call,  she  steadfastly 
went  forward.  As  time  went  on  others  were 
added  to  the  force,  and  as  one  and  another  were 
unable  for  further  work  still  others  came  for- 
ward and  took  up  the  work.  Native  workers 
were  employed,  and  in  spite  of  pestilence  and 
the  threats  of  men,  there  has  been  steady  growth. 

A  site  was  finally  decided  upon  at  the  west 
end  of  Honam,  an  island  twelve  miles  long  and 
one  mile  wide,  situated  on  the  south  side  of  the 
river  from  the  walled  city,  but  a  part  of  Canton, 
with  a  population  of  one-half  million.  Here 
ground  was  secured  about  two  hundred  feet  long 
by  one  hundred  and  forty  feet  wide.-  It  was  en- 
closed by  a  wall  eight  feet  high,  with  two  gates, 
one  to  the  street  and  one  to  our  own  boat  landing. 
Beth-Eden  (House  of  Pleasantness)  was  the 
name  given  to  the  compound.  The  home  was 
completed  and  occupied  in  January,  1899.  Later 
other  buildings  were  erected  upon  the  compound 
— a  women's  and  girls'  boarding-school  in  1901, 
and  a  physician's  residence  in  1906. 

San  Tong,  with  a  population  of  12,000,  thirty 
miles  east  of  Canton,  was  opened  in  1897. 


China  117 

South  of  Canton  is  a  large  territory,  densely  Out-stations 
populated,  with  cities  containing  from  5,000  to 
50,000,  all  of  which  can  be  reached  by  river  or 
canal,  and  little  or  no  mission  work  being  done 
in  them.  In  1901  and  1902  work  was  opened  in 
several  of  these  cities,  and  at  Siu  Lam,  about 
fifty  miles  south,  a  home  for  American  mission- 
aries, "Olivet,"  was  completed. 

Four  departments  of  work,  which  are  in  opera- 
tion, may  be  briefly  mentioned : 

Medical  Work. 

Medical  work  was  begun  in  1891,  with  the  Dispensary 
going  of  Dr.  S.  L.  Halverson  to  the  field,  fol- 
lowed the  next  year  by  Dr.  R.  Bigler.  From  the 
first  this  has  been  a  strong  means  of  reaching  the 
hearts  and  homes  of  the  people.  The  chapel,  on 
a  quiet  street,  is  used  for  the  free  dispensary. 
Two  dispensing  days  are  held  regularly  each 
week.  In  the  forenoon  the  women  are  treated, 
and  here  they  gather  from  early  morning;  and 
as  they  wait  their  turn  for  treatment  or  for  medi- 
cine the  Bible  women  talk  to  them  of  Jesus 
Christ.  In  the  afternoon  the  men  are  treated, 
and  the  native  pastor  gives  them  the  gospel  mes- 
sage. Here  Doctor  Oldt  renders  valuable  assist- 
ance. More  than  twenty  thousand  cases  have 
been  treated  in  one  year.  There  is  also  a  dis- 
pensary in  connection  with  the  physician's  resi- 
dence at  Beth-Eden,  where  pay  practice  is  con- 


rUB»'0    '^ 


\*3 


o*v 


*i 


.4 


China 


119 


ducted,  and  so  great  is  the  reputation  of  Doctor 
Bigler  that  requests  for  professional  calls  come 
from  all  over  Canton.  It  is  but  a  step  from  faith 
in  the  doctor,  who  heals  the  body,  to  faith  in  the 
doctor's  God,  who  heals  the  soul. 

Educational  Work. 

From  the  beginning  there  has  been  felt  the 
need  of  teaching  for  the  neglected  girls.  Three 
day  schools  for  these  are  conducted  in  Canton, 
and  one  at  Siu  Lam ;  there  is  also  a  boys'  school 
in  Canton.  These  are  under  the  direct  care  of 
native  Christian  teachers,  with  constant  super- 
vision and  examinations  by  the  missionaries. 

Feeling  the  need  for  further  and  special  train- 
ing for  girls  and  women,  a  boarding-school  was 
opened  in  the  compound  in  1901.  The  girls  have 
an  extensive  course,  covering  eight  years,  and 
are  in  training  for  mission  work  and  teachers. 

The  woman's  school  gathers  in  some  of  the 
women  who  are  anxious  to  be  taught  to  read  and 
to  learn  more  of  gospel  truths,  that  they  may  be 
able  to  go  out  and  give  the  message  to  others. 
They  have  no  text-book  but  the  Bible. 

A  movement  is  on  foot  to  open  a  college  for 
the  training  of  native  workers,  under  the  com- 
bined auspices  of  the  American  Board,  the  Lon- 
don Missionary  Society,  and  our  own.  There  is 
great  need  of  more  thoroughly-equipped  men  and 
women  who  can  best  reach  their  own  people,  and 


Day   Schools 


Boarding 
Schools 


Union 

Training 

College 


120      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

this   want  can  be   met  economically  by   such   a 
united  effort. 

Philanthropic  Work. 

The  cry  of  the  women  and  girls,  the  degraded, 
down-trodden,  bound-in-foot,  and  even  more 
hampered  in  heart  and  mind,  has  always  ap- 
pealed. How  much  more  so  the  helpless  waifs, 
found  by  every  roadside,  thrown  out  to  perish, 
how  could  one  but  listen  to  their  pitiful  cry  and 
come  to  their  rescue  ?  So,  in  1907,  the  Foundling 
Home  was  opened  in  a  rented  house,  and  a  hand- 
ful of  these  babies  were  rescued  and  will  be  cared 
for,  that  they  may  grow  to  Christian  womanhood 
and  be  used  to  lift  up  the  womanhood  of  China. 
It  is  hoped  that  this  will  grow  into  larger  work, 
and  buildings  be  erected  where  they  may  have 
the  best  conditions  for  this  development. 

Evangelistic  Work. 

The  medical,  the  educational,  the  philanthropic 
work,  while  dealing  directly  with  certain  prob- 
lems, are,  after  all,  but  stepping-stones  to  that 
which  is  above  all  price,  the  saving  of  a  soul, 
and  so  all  of  our  band  of  missionaries,  whether 
dealing  medicine,  conducting  school  examina- 
tions, or  caring  for  neglected  babyhood,  are 
directly  interested  in  evangelistic  work,  and  in 
all  of  our  borders  this  has  preeminence. 


China 


121 


We  have  regular  chapels  for  Sunday  service, 
Sunday  school,  and  mid-week  meetings ;  then  we 
have  street  chapels,  which  are  open  every  day  in 
the  week  excepting  Sunday.  Here  the  passerby 
comes  in  out  of  curiosity,  perhaps  stays  a  few 
minutes,  then  goes  his  way,  or  perhaps  stays  and 
becomes  interested ;  comes  again  and  again,  until 
the  word  sinks  into  soil  that  bears  fruit  in  a 
changed  countenance  and  a  new  life. 

The  opportunities  for  such  work  are  on  every 
hand.  Not  only  in  the  medical  department,  but 
as  the  missionary  finds  herself  at  the  day  school, 
at  the  close  of  the  session  the  mothers  and  neigh- 
bors fill  the  room,  and  she  holds  a  gospel  service ; 
on  the  way  home  from  the  school  she  is  stopped 
again  and  again,  and  a  group  of  women,  hastily 
gathered  together  by  one  interested  heart,  listen 
to  the  old,  old  story,  ever  new.  In  a  journey  by 
boat  to  another  station,  all  along  the  way  there 
is  the  opportunity  to  give  the  message  to  some 
who  have  never  heard. 

Once  a  month  all  the  native  preachers  and 
Bible  women  gather  at  Beth-Eden  for  several 
days  of  special  service  and  training. 

Although  converts  were  early  gathered  into  the 
mission,  they  had  to  be  led  step  by  step  in  the 
Christian  faith ;  church  government  and  fellow- 
ship was  like  a  new  language  to  them.  The 
time  having  come  when  more  definite  steps 
should    be    taken,    in    the    latter    part    of    1907 


Chapels 


Training 

Native 

Workers 


Organized 
Church 


122      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


First 
Conference 


Great 
Opportunities 


churches  were  organized  in  Canton,  San  Tong, 
Siu  Lam,  Kwai  Chau,  and  Hang  Tan,  with  about 
four  hundred  members.  We  have  also  five  other 
preaching-places,  twenty  native  helpers,  two 
Sunday  schools,  one  Junior  and  one  Christian 
Endeavor  Society,  five  day  schools,  and  two 
boarding-schools ;  one  dispensary,  which  treated 
18,980  patients  in  1907;  propertv  valued  at 
$55,300. 

On  January  5,  1908,  was  held  the  first  United 
Brethren  conference  in  China.  Conference  rela- 
tions were  fully  explained,  and  plans  were  made 
for  the  translation  into  Chinese  of  such  parts  of 
the  Discipline  as  are  applicable  to  the  Chinese 
Church.  Also,  a  course  of  study  was  arranged 
for  the  native  ministers  leading  to  ordination. 
Thus  another  step  was  taken  in  the  better  train- 
ing of  the  native  evangelists  for  the  bringing  of 
their  people  to  the  knowledge  of  the  Christ. 

Who  can  measure  the  needs  and  the  oppor- 
tunities in  China?  This  whole  vast  nation  is  now 
a  golden  harvest-field,  waiting  for  the  reapers  to 
gather  the  harvest  unto  eternal  life.  With  a 
united  and  faithful  native  church,  giving  freely 
her  noblest  sons  and  daughters,  and  giving  liber- 
ally her  money  according  to  the  blessing  of  God, 
and  these  consecrated  in  living  faith  and  constant 
prayer,  this  century  will  witness  China  trans- 
formed into  a  Christian  nation. 


China  123 


QUESTIONS  FOR  STUDY  AND  DISCUSSION. 
CHAPTER  III. 

1.  Compare  the  population  of  China  with  the 
population  of  the  United  States,  and  with  that  of 
the  world. 

2.  In  what  respects  do  the  religions  of  China 
fail  to  meet  the  spiritual  needs  of  the  people? 

3.  What  characteristics  of  the  Chinese  show 
that  the  race  has  a  great  future  before  it? 

4.  Name  five  important  advance  steps  which 
China  has  recently  made. 

5.  What  was  the  most  important  thing  ac- 
complished during  the  first  century  of  Protestant 
missions  in  China?     Why  do  you  think  so? 

6.  Locate  our  work  in  China.  Why  was  that 
place  selected? 

7.  Which  do  you  consider  the  most  fruitful 
department  of  our  work  in  China?  Give  three 
reasons. 


JAPAN 

By  Bishop  J.  S.  Mills,  D.D. 


125 


"General  Stoessel,  when  asked  the  secret  of  the 
surrender  of  Port  Arthur,  said,  'When  the  Japanese 
forces  captured  the  Two  Hundred  and  Three  Meter 
Hill,  and  the  eleven-inch  shells  directed  from  that 
eminence  fell  into  the  city,  nothing  could  withstand 
them,  and  we  knew  that  our  days  were  numbered. 
Japan  is  the  Two  Hundred  and  Three  Meter  Hill  of 
Christian  missions  in  the  Orient;  and  when  we  plant 
firmly  upon  that  eminence  the  batteries  of  our  Master 
Jesus  Christ,  the  Orient  will  know  that  the  days  are 
numbered,  and  that  his  name  will  be  known,  and  his 
banner  unfurled  in  all  the  Far  East." 

—V.  W.  Helm. 

"The  time  cometh  that  I  will  gather  all  nations 
and  tongues;  and  they  shall  come  and  shall  see  my 
glory.     And  I  will  set  a  sign  among  them,  and  I  will 

send to  the   isles   afar   off,   that  have   not   heard 

my  fame,  neither  have  seen  my  glory." 

—Isaiah  66:  18,  19. 


IMPORTANT  EVENTS  IN  JAPANESE  HISTORY. 

667  B.  C— 400  A.  D.     Era  of  mythology  and  legend. 

The  first  seventeen  legendary  emperors. 
552     Entrance     of     Buddhism.      Opposition     of     the 

Shintoists. 
602     Chinese  calendars  introduced. 
645     Measurement  of  time  by  year  periods. 
700     Custom  of  cremation  begun. 
709     Court  ceases  to  be  nomadic.      Nara  the  capital. 

Great  Buddhist  activity  at  the  court. 
712     "Kojiki"  (Record  of  Ancient  Matters).   Written. 
794     Kyoto  made  the  capital  (for  nearly  1,100  years). 
1091-1192     Period   of   the  civil  wars  of  the  military 

clans.        Revolts    of    the     Buddhist    monks. 

Decadence  of  the  Mikado's  power.      Seat  of 

government   fixed   at   Kamakura.       Duarchy. 

Feudal  system  developed. 
1219-1333     The  Hojo  rulers  at  Kamakura.      Repulse 

of  the  Mongol-Tartar  armada,  1281. 
1335-1573     Era  of  art  and  luxury,  followed  by  civil 

war.      The  Ashikaga  rulers  at  Kamakura. 
1542     First  Europeans    (Portuguese)    in  Japan.     To- 
bacco and  fire-arms. 
1573-1600     Era  of  the  "Three  Great  Men,"  Nobunaga. 

Hideyoshi,  and  Iyeyasu.     Invasion  of  Korea. 

Roman  Catholic  Christians. 
1640-1870     Scholastic  revival  of  Pure  Shinto. 
1715     Publication     of     Prince     Mito's     "History     of 

Japan." 
1763     Ninth  and  last  of  the  female  mikados. 
1784     Great   famine.       Over    one   million    deaths   by 

starvation. 
1715-1868     Intellectual     movements     leading    to    the 

Restoration  of  1868. 
1837     American  ship  "Morrison"  in  Yedo  Bay. 
1848     Ronald  MacDonald  teaches  English  in  Japan. 
1853     Commodore  Perry  at  Uraga. 
1859     Foreign  trade  and  residence  in  the  ports. 

127 


1868  Change  of  government.  "Charter  Oath."  Era 
of  Meiji  begins. 

1871  Abolition  of  the  feudal  system. 

1872  First  Protestant  church',  missionary  conference, 

railway,  national  army,  and  school  system. 

1873-1888  Political  commotions,  sweeping  reforms. 
Modern  industrialism. 

1883     Missionary  conference  in  Osaka. 

1889  The  Constitution  proclaimed.  Liberty  of  con- 
science declared. 

1894  Chino- Japanese  war,  resulting  in  the  cession  of 
Formosa. 

1899  Japan  recognized  on  equal  terms  by  the  nations 

of  Christendom. 

1900  Japan  allied  with  Christian  nations  in  China. 

General  missionary  conference  in  Tokyo. 
1904     Russo-Japanese  war. 


128 


IV. 

JAPAN. 

The  Land  and  the  People. 

Japan  occupies  a  relation  to  Asia  similar  to  Size 
the  British  Isles  in  their  relation  to  Europe.  It 
extends  from  the  peninsula  of  Kamchatka  in  the 
north,  to  and  including  Formosa  in  the  south. 
It  contains  161,000  square  miles,  divided  into 
five  large  islands,  and  more  than  two  thousand 
small  ones.  The  larger  ones  are  Hondo,  Kyushu, 
Shikoku,  Hokkaido, -and  Formosa.  They  lie  in 
the  same  latitude  as  the  United  States,  but  the 
area  of  the  whole  empire  is  little  larger  than 
California,  and  only  two-thirds  the  size  of  Texas. 

The  country  is  very  mountainous.  Only  four-  Mountains 
teen  per  cent,  of  the  island  is 'cultivated.  The 
land  gradually  ascends  on  both  sides  as  it  recedes 
from  the  ocean,  at  first  forming  hills  and  table- 
lands, and  then  huge  mountains.  Thus  a  back- 
bone of  mountains  of  volcanic  origin  extends 
through  the  empire.  There  are  many  active  vol- 
canoes continually  sending  up  their  great  clouds 
of  smoke,  or  emitting  streams  of  fire  and  molten 
lava.  There  are  many  extinct  volcanoes,  the 
greatest  of  which  is  the  peerless  Mount  Fuji,  the 

129 


130      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

pride  of  every  Japanese.  It  rises  12,365  feet 
above  the  sea,  and  snow  is  always  found  on  its 
summit. 

Hot  Springs  Hot  springs  are  numerous  in  Japan,  and  fur- 

and  nish  delightful  watering-places  of  healing  baths 

for  the  invalid  and  recreation  for  the  visitor. 
The  earthquake  is  an  almost  daily  event  in  one 
part  or  another  of  the  islands.  This  uncon- 
trollable condition  determines  the  style  of  the 
houses ;  there  are  no  "sky-scrapers,"  but  most  of 
the  houses,  especially  the  dwelling-houses,  are 
one  or  two  stories  high,  and  built  of  wood,  to 
withstand  earthquakes.  Owing  to  the  moun- 
tainous nature  and  narrowness  of  the  islands, 
there  are  few  large  rivers,  and  these  are  short 
and  of  little  value  for  navigation. 

Climate  Since  the  chief  islands  lie  in  the  same  latitude 

as  the  Mississippi  Valley,  we  would  naturally 
expect  a  similar  climate.  But  an  environment 
of  water  and  a  warm  ocean  current  from  the 
tropics  give  Japan  a  much  damper  climate  than 
ours.  This  condition  causes  everything  to  be 
covered  with  a  white  mold.  Add  to  this  the  lack 
of  ozone  in  the  air,  and  the  result  is  a  depressing 
and  enervating  effect  upon  Americans,  demand- 
ing in  a  few  years  a  return  to  the  invigorating 
climate  of  the  home  land  for  recuperation. 

Animals  Animals  arc  abundant.     Morses  and  oxen  are 

used  to  an  extent  as  beasts  of  burden  and  for 
fanning.     The  horses  arc  smaller  than  ours,  but 


Japan  131 

are  made  to  draw  enormous  loads.  Men  and 
women  are  more  frequently  the  burden-bearers. 
Few  sheep  or  hogs  are  seen,  but  dogs,  cats, 
ducks,  geese,  chickens,  doves,  and  larks  abound. 
Fish  of  an  excellent  quality  are  taken  in  large 
quantities  from  both  the  ocean  and  the  fresh- 
water streams,  and  prepared  for  food  both 
cooked  and  raw,  the  raw  fish  tasting  much  better 
than  the  Occidental  would  imagine. 

Japan  has  a  fertile  soil  and  a  rich  variety  of  a  Fertile 
products.  By  careful  fertilization  and  irrigation  So11 
the  land  has  been  brought  to  a  high  state  of  pro- 
ductiveness. The  sides  of  the  hills  and  moun- 
tains are  terraced  and  cultivated,  making  a 
mountain-side  look  like  a  huge  stairway,  and 
lending  beauty  to  the  landscape. 

The  crops  most  common  are  rice,  barley,  crops 
wheat,  millet,  and  beans.  Both  cotton  and  hemp 
flourish.  There  is  a  large,  abundance  of  vege- 
tables, such  as  pumpkins,  squashes,  radishes,  tur- 
nips, beets,  carrots,  onions,  and  sweet  potatoes. 
Western  farm  products,  such  as  corn,  oats,  Irish 
potatoes,  and  celery,  are  being  rapidly  introduced 
throughout  the  country.  Many  fruits  are  pro- 
duced, as  oranges,  persimmons,  figs,  apricots, 
pears,  peaches,  plums,  apples,  loquats,  grapes, 
and  strawberries.  In  beautiful  flowers  Japan 
excels.  In  valuable  timbers  the  islands  are  rich, 
as  well  as  in  the  tea-plant  and  the  extremely  use- 
ful bamboo. 


132      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

Land  of  One    thing    above    others    that    impresses    the 

Beauty  traveler   is   that   Japan   is   a    land   of   wondrous 

beauty.  Her  mountains,  snow-capped  in  the  win- 
ter, her  plains  covered  with  a  delicate  green  in 
the  early  summer,  her  water-falls  and  her  islands, 
and  her  great  variety  of  lovely  flowers,  captivate 
both  her  visitors  and  her  own  people.  The  whole 
population  turns  out  several  times  in  the  year  for 
no  other  purpose  than  to  visit  places  which  are 
noted  for  lovely  cherry  blossoms  or  beautiful 
maple  trees. 

Flowers  The  principal  flowers  cultivated  in  Tokyo  are 

the  plum  blossom,  blooming  through  February 
and  March ;  the  cherry,  the  azalea,  and  the 
camellia  through  April ;  the  tree  peony  and  the 
wistaria  in  May ;  the  iris,  early  in  June ;  the  con- 
volvulus, the  end  of  July  and  early  in  August ; 
the  lotus  in  August ;  the  chrysanthemums,  first 
three  weeks  in  November ;  the  maple  colors  its 
leaves  beautiful  as  flowers  through  all  Novem- 
ber. 

People  But  most  interesting  are  the  people   of  this 

wonderful  country.  The  Ainu  once  occupied  all 
Japan,  and  were  there  long  before  the  present 
race  of  Japanese,  but  are  now  reduced  to  about 
seventeen  thousand  people,  located  in  the  Kurile 
and  Hokkaido  Islands.  They  are  thought  by 
Griffis  and  others  to  be  of  Aryan  origin.  When 
first  sighted  they  were  barbarians  of  a  heroic 
type.  "Many  and  mighty  have  been  the  invasions 


Japan 


133 


and  immigrations  of  blood  and  of  ideas  into 
Japan,  which  is,  in  a  certain  sense,  the  residuum 
of  all  Asia.  These  immigrants,  through  conflicts 
and  alliances,  absorbed  many  of  the  Ainu  and 
drove  the  rest  north,  until  a  composite,  homo- 
geneous people  occupied  the  best  and  greater  part 
of  the  islands.  At  the  beginning  of  the  seventh 
century  of  our  era  we  find  the  Mikado  or  Em- 
peror on  his  throne,  and  the  greater  part  of 
Hondo,  Shikoku,  and  Kyushu  under  his  con- 
trol." 

The  people  were  of  their  present  size,  and  were 
distinguished'  then,  as  now,  by  a  yellowish  skin, 
straight  black  hair,  scanty  beard,  prominent 
cheek-bones,  and  more  or  less  obliquely-set  eyes ; 
on  an  average  they  were  smaller  by  twenty 
pounds  than  Americans.  Their  chief  food  was 
fish,  shell-fish,  rice,  millet,  and  more  flesh  than  is 
used  since  the  introduction  of  Buddhism,  which 
discourages  the  eating  of  flesh. 

As  the  time  went  on  a  number  of  daimios,  or 
war-lords,  who  held  large  landed  estates,  obtained 
by  conquest,  or  as  the  gift  of  the  Mikado,  grew 
up  over  the  empire.  Their  military  titles  and 
the  right  to  military  service  descended  to  their 
sons.  Thus  a  military  class  was  created,  who 
were  known  as  samurai,  quite  distinct  from 
farmers,  artisans,  and  merchants.  As  feudalism 
developed,  there  came  orders  of  nobility,  pre- 
scribed costumes,  and  a  rigid  code  of  court  eti- 


Physical 
Characteristics 


A    Military 
Class 


134      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


quette,  which  survives  in  many  of  its  features  to 
this  day. 

"The  title  'Shogun,'  which  meant,  literally, 
'generalissimo,'  and  which  was  destined  to  play 
such  a  momentous  part  in  Japanese  history, 
seems  to  have  been  first  used  in  A.D.  813,  when 
one  Watamaro  was  appointed  commander-in- 
chief  to  wage  war  against  the  Ainu.  But  Yari- 
tomo,  at  the  end  of  the  twelfth  century,  was  the 
first  of  these  generalissimos  to  make  himself 
ruler  of  the  land."  After  him  the  Mikado  was 
relegated  to  the  obscurity  of  his  palace,  taking  no 
part  in  public  life  or  affairs,  while  the  Shogun 
ruled  the  empire,  with  assumed  consent  of  the 
Emperor. 

As  centuries  passed  the  people  were  less  and 
less  satisfied  with  the  rule  of  the  Shogun.  and 
were  anxious  for  the  Mikado  to  govern  in  per- 
son. This  was  a  burning  question  in  Japan  at 
the  time  of  Commodore  Perry's  visit,  and  the 
chief  cause  of  the  revolution  which  followed  it. 
In  1868  the  present  Mikado,  Mutsuhito,  became 
ruler  in  fact  as  in  name,  and  the  Shogunate  for- 
ever passed. 

While  Japan  was  for  a  long  time  a  sealed 
nation,  yet  we  now  know  that  much  light  shone 
in  from  Korea  and  China,  and  from  the  Dutch 
traders ;  and,  further,  that  a  native  civilization 
was  evolving  and  preparing  the  people  for  the 
new  era. 


Oatu 


Japan  135 

The  New  Era  in  Japan. 
If  we  should  fix  a  natal  day  for  new  Japan,  it      New  japan's 
would  be  July  8,  1853,  when  Commodore  Perry      Natal  Day 
landed   on   the   shore   of  Yedo   Bay,   and   when 
Japanese  officials,  contrary  to  their  own  laws,  re- 
ceived an  official  communication  from  the  Presi- 
dent of  the  United  States.  Perry  secured  a  treaty 
of  peace  the  following  year.    Other  nations  soon 
did  likewise.     This  became  the  occasion   for   a 
severe   struggle   between  the   supporters   of  the 
Shogunate  and  the  followers  of  the  Mikado  or 
Emperor.     This  was  culminated  in  the  restora- 
tion of  the  present  Emperor,  Mutsuhito,  to  real      Charter 
power   in    1868,    when   he   voluntarily   took   the 
"Charter    Oath,"    of    which   the    following   is   a 
summary : 

1.  A  deliberative  assembly  should  be  formed, 
and  all  measures  be  decided  by  public  opinion. 

2.  The  principles  of  social  and  political  eco- 
nomics should  be  diligently  studied  by  both  the 
superior  and  the  inferior  classes  of  the  people  in 
Japan. 

3.  Every  one  in  the  community  shall  be 
assisted  to  persevere  in  carrying  out  his  will  for 
all  good  purposes. 

4.  All  the  old  absurd  usages  of  former  times 
should  be  disregarded  and  the  impartiality  and 
justice  displayed  in  the  workings  of  nature  be 
adopted  as  a  basis  of  action. 

5.  Wisdom  and  ability  should  be  sought  after 


136      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

in  all  quarters  of  the  world  for  the  purpose  of 
firmly  establishing  the  foundations  of  the  empire. 

Changes  were  made  with  amazing  rapidity 
until,  in  1889,  a  constitution  was  promulgated, 
and  local  self-government  was  established  over 
the  empire.  This  was  the  period  when  every- 
thing foreign  was  at  a  premium.  Christianity, 
among  the  foreign  things,  was  hailed  with  favor, 
and  many  converts  were  enrolled. 
Foreign  Aid  Following  the  Charter  Oath,  native  students 

were  sent  abroad  to  seek  knowledge,  and  it  is 
asserted  that  not  fewer  than  five  thousand  sal- 
aried foreigners,  men  and  women,  including 
about  twelve  hundred  American  teachers,  experts 
in  their  several  callings,  were  brought  to  Japan 
before  the  beginning  of  the  twentieth  century. 
It  is  the  verdict  of  Doctor  Chamberlain  that 
these  helpers  from  America,  Europe,  and  Asia 
created  new  Japan.  "They  inaugurated  the  rail- 
roads, telegraphs,  lighthouses,  the  building  of 
steamships  and  laboratories,  organization  of 
bureaus,  and  in  a  thousand  ways  showed  the 
Japanese  how  to  utilize  the  forces  of  nature,  de- 
velop the  national  resources,  and  improve  the 
condition  of  men.  They  brought  the  seed  and 
the  natives  have  raised  the  flower.  They  scat- 
tered the  grain,  and  the  Japanese  have  reaped 
the  harvest." 

Under  this  native  awakening  and  these  foreign 
influences  great  changes  were  taking  place  in  the 


Japan 


137 


relations  between  the  people  and  the  Emperor. 
The  Shogunate  was  abolished  when  the  Emperor 
was  brought  forward  as  the  actual  ruler  of  the 
nation.  As  an  aid  to  breaking  with  the  past 
methods  of  government  having  its  seat  in  Kyoto, 
the  Emperor  moved  his  capital  to  Tokyo.  It 
soon  became  evident  to  the  wisest  statesmen  that 
feudalism  had  fulfilled  its  mission  and  could  not 
be  continued  under  the  new  order  of  things. 
After  winning  over  to  this  view  the  strongest 
clans,  "the  daimios  were  ordered  to  give  up  their 
castles,  lands,  and  registers  and  come  and  live  as 
private  gentlemen  in  Tokyo.  The  samurai  also 
were  to  relinquish  their  hereditary  pensions,  re- 
ceive in  return  enough  to  support  them  for  a  few 
years,  until  they  could  find  employment  and  a 
livelihood.  Society  was  reorganized  on  the  basis 
of  three  classes — nobles,  gentry,  and  commons." 
The  "eta"  and  other  human  beings  not  hitherto 
counted  as  human,  the  victims  of  Buddhist 
fanaticism,  were  elevated  to  citizenship.  Disabil- 
ities were  removed  from  all  classes  of  people, 
and  the  way  of  promotion  opened  to  all.  The 
samurai,  laying  aside  their  swords,  joined  the  pro- 
ductive classes.  The  soil  was  turned  over  to  the 
farmer,  who  had  so  long  tilled  it.  Now  began  a 
new  era  in  industrial  life.  Formerly  farming  and 
fishing  were  the  only  industries ;  to  these  were 
now  added  manufacturing,  trading,  banking,  and 
world-wide  commerce. 


The   Emperor 
Becomes 
Actual 
Ruler 


Feudalism 
Abolished 


A  New  Era 
Begins 


138      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Many   Manners 
the  Opposite 
of  Ours 


Characteristic 
Traits 


Manners,  Traits,  and  Customs. 

Many  of  the  manners  of  the  Japanese  are  the 
opposite  of  ours.  A  Japanese  book  begins  at  the 
right-hand  side  and  reads  from  top  to  bottom. 
They  address  their  letters  the  opposite  of  ours, 
as,  "Ohio,  Columbus,  High  Street  100,  Smith, 
James  Mr."  The  mourning  dress  is  black  in 
America ;  it  is  white  in  Japan.  In  America  the 
woman  is  given  precedence ;  in  Japan  the  man 
takes  precedence,  and  the  woman  must  serve 
him.  In  Japan  the  saw  is  pulled  toward  the 
workman,  instead  of  being  pushed  away  from 
him.  The  planes  are  used  in  the  same  way.  The 
babe  is  carried  on  the  back  of  the  nurse,  and  not 
in  her  arms. 

The  Japanese  are  everywhere  famous  for  their 
politeness  and  courtesy,  and  are  properly  styled 
the  "French  of  the  Orient."  Another  prominent 
and  prevailing  element  of  their  civilization  is  sim- 
plicity. The  people  have  the  simplicity  of  nature. 
They  admire,  almost  worship  nature,  and  imitate 
it.  They  are  merry,  light-hearted,  and  vivacious. 
They  believe  in  the  doctrine  of  fate,  and  it  makes 
them  stoical  to  pain  and  suffering,  and  even  to 
death  itself.  They  are  great  lovers  of  the  beauti- 
ful. ^Esthetic  taste  reigns  everywhere.  Patriot- 
ism and  filial  piety  are  their  present  most  noted 
traits. 

Japanese  society  is  built  upon  Confucian 
ethics.    Its  three  strongest  principles  are  the  loy- 


Japan 


139 


alty  of  the  subject  to  the  throne,  the  faithfulness 
•and  obedience  of  the  wife  to  her  husband,  and 
the  reverence  and  obedience  of  the  children  to 
their  parents.  The  Emperor,  as  the  head  of  the 
nation,  is  considered  a  superior  being,  for  whom 
it  would  be  a  privilege  to  give  one's  life,  if  occa- 
sion should  require.  The  husband,  likewise, 
being  the  head  of  the  family,  is  an  exalted  person 
in  his  sphere ;  and  the  wife,  an  inferior  person- 
age, must  be  faithful  to  serve,  chaste  in  her  per- 
son, ever  on  the  alert  to  conform  to  her  master's 
■demands. 

The  weakness  of  the  social  system  is  in  the 
undue  exaltation  of  men  in  the  state,  in  society, 
and  in  the  family,  and  a  consequent  depreciation 
of  women  in  every  sphere  of  life.  Public  senti- 
ment does  not  set  a  girl  free  from  parental  re- 
straint when  she  becomes  of  age,  as  it  does  a 
boy,  but  so  long  as  she  remains  at  home  she  is 
subject  to  her  father,  or,  in  case  of  the  father's 
death,  to  the  brother,  who  becomes  head  of  the 
family.  When  she  marries,  she  passes  over  to 
her  husband,  who  then  becomes  her  legal  head. 
Therefore,  woman  in  Japan  never  has  the  same 
freedom  as  a  man. 

Marriage,  with  the  Japanese,  is  more  a  family 
affair  than  it  is  with  us.  It  is  arranged  by  the 
two  families,  is  less  solemn  than  in  our  country, 
and  is  not  irrevocable.  It  is  a  legal  contract 
while  it  lasts,  but  it  mav  be  terminated,  like  other 


Society  and 

Confucian 

Ethics 


Weakness 

of  the 

Social  System 


Marriage 


Causes  for 


140      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

contracts,  with  the  joint  consent  of  the  contract- 
ing parties. 

In  the  marriage  relation  the  wife  is  at  a  dis- 

Divorce  advantage.     The  husband,  being  the  legal  head 

of  the  family,  and  the  one  responsible  for  keep- 
ing up  his  family  line,  is  apt  to  regard  his  wife 
as  one  to  be  retained  if  she  pleases  him,  but  if 
she  does  not,  to  be  gotten  rid  of.  One  common 
cause  of  a  wife  being  divorced  is  inability  to 
bear  strong,  healthy  children.  Another  is  the 
interference  of  the  mother-in-law.  The  eldest 
son  invariably  takes  his  bride  into  the  family 
home,  where  she  becomes  subject  to  his  mother. 
If  she  does  not  please  her  mother-in-law,  the 
latter  is  quick  to  influence  her  son  to  send  his 

Many  Bright  wife  back  to  her  paternal  home. 

sP°ts  There  are  many  beautiful  homes  with  happy 

mothers  and  bright  children,  because  the  head  of 
the  house  chooses  to  be  a  good  husband  and 
loving  father.  Through  the  introduction  of 
Western  civilization  and  Christianity  this  num- 
ber is  increasing.  A  signal  demonstration  of  this 
is  in  the  official  announcement  that  the  present 
Crown  Prince  of  Japan  will  have  no  consorts  but 
the  Crown  Princess,  thus  abolishing  a  custom 
hitherto  firmly  established  in  the  imperial  family. 

Schools  for  The  intellectual  condition  of  woman  is  rapidly 

Girls  changing  for  the  better  through  the  numerous 

high  schools  for  girls  recently  established  by  the 
government  and  by  missionary  societies. 


Japan 


141 


One  of  the  best  features  of  the  social  system 
is  the  inculcation  of  filial  piety.  It  is  beautiful 
to  see  the  respect  that  Japanese  children  show 
to  their  parents.  They  are  models  of  politeness 
to  parents,  and  this  careful  training  manifests 
itself  in  courtesy  to  all  persons.  Sometimes  filial 
piety,  however,  is  so  ardent  that  a  girl  will  sell 
herself  to  a  life  of  shame  to  provide  for  the 
necessity  of  her  parents ;  and  public  opinion 
allows  the  parents  to  encourage  such  an  act.  The 
extreme  view  of  filial  piety  leads  also  to  the 
deification  of  dead  ancestors  and  ancestor  wor- 
ship. 

With  fifty  millions  of  people  and  much  moun- 
tainous territory,  intensive  farming  and  two 
crops  a  year  are  a  necessity.  This  economic 
pressure  has  recently  brought  in  many  new  occu- 
pations, especially  in  the  domain  of  manufactures 
and  commerce.  Japan  is  now  sending  abroad 
tea,  silk,  rice,  and  many  objects  of  art.  Her 
exports  in  1907  were  over  sixty  million  dollars 
more  than  her  imports.  Her  ships  are  now  upon 
every  ocean,  and  her  ambition  is  to  be  a  great 
commercial  nation  like  England.  The  difficulty 
in  finding  employment  at  home  has  sent  tens  of 
thousands  of  her  sons  into  other  lands  to  earn 
their  daily  bread  or  to  colonize  the  country,  as 
in  Korea  and  Manchuria. 

The  educational  system  extends  from  the 
primary  grade  up  to  a  national  university.    Hun- 


Filial  Piety 


Economic 
Conditions 


142      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

ger  and  thirst  for  knowledge  is  a  national  trait 
of  the  Japanese.  Their  ability  to  receive  modern 
education  and  to  appropriate  and  make  use  of  its 
fruits  is  forcibly  shown  by  the  growth  the  nation 
has  recently  made  under  the  influence  of  modern 
culture. 

Versatility  The  wide  variety  of  the  hereditary  elements  of 

the  Japanese,  that  is,  their  composite  character,, 
gives  them  a  plasticity  and  versatility  rarely 
excelled.  This  enabled  them  to  appropriate  the 
ideals,  ideas,  and  machinery  brought  to  them 
from  the  most  civilized  nations  at  the  beginning 
•  of  the  new  era.  The  same  national  quality  causes 
them  to  rank  high  in  their  studies  in  foreign 
schools  as  well  as  at  home,  and  foretells  the 
speedy  coming  of  a  body  of  great  literary,  scien- 
tific, and  philosophic  writers  and  teachers  in  the 
nation. 

Religions  "Human  nature  is  incurably  religious."     Apart 

from  Christianity  the  religions  of  the  Japanese 
are  Shintoism,  Buddhism,  and  Confucianism. 

shintoism  Shintoism   is   indigenous.      "It   has    no   moral 

indigenous  code,  no  dogmas,  no  sacred  books.     Originally  it 

consisted  chiefly  of  ancestor  worship,  along  with 
nature  worship,  and  of  certain  mythological 
ideas.  A  chief  feature  of  it  still  is  the  worship 
of  ancestors,  who  are  exalted  to  a  high  pedestal 
in  thought  and  worshiped  as  gods.  The  divine 
origin  of  the  imperial  family  and  the  obligation 
to  worship  and  obey  it  was  a  prominent  teaching 


Japan  143 

of  Shinto.  The  ancestors  of  the  imperial  family 
were  to  be  held  in  supreme  reverence  and  were 
objects  of  special  worship.  Pure  Shinto  taught 
that  a  man's  whole  duty  lay  in  absolute  obedience 
to  the  Mikado  and  in  following  the  natural 
promptings  of  his  own  heart." 

Shinto  was  very  much  affected  by  the  intro-  Modified  by 
duction  of  Buddhism  about  the  middle  of  the  Buddhism 
sixth  century  of  our  era.  Buddhism  adopted  it 
and  largely  absorbed  it.  Shinto  gods  were  given 
a  place  in  the  Buddhist  pantheon,  and  many  of 
the  Shinto  ceremonies  were  adopted.  But  Shinto 
was  completely  overshadowed  by  Buddhism,  and 
lay  in  a  dormant  state  from  the  year  550  to 
1700,  a  night  of  more  than  a  thousand  years. 

At  the   beginning   of   the    eighteenth   century      Revival  of 
Shintoism    revived,    and    many    of    the    temples,      shintcism 
stripped    of    their    Buddhist    ornaments,    were 
turned  over  to  the  Shinto  priests.     But  since  the 
beginning  of  the  new  era  it  has  been  largely  de- 
prived of  its  religious  significance  and  declared 
to  be  a  system  of  patriotism  and  of  state  cere- 
monies.   Yet  the  majority  of  the  upper  classes  in      Educated 
Japan  who  to-day  have  any  religion  are  Shinto-      Classes 
ists,  partly  because  it  is  native  to  the  soil  and  its 
rivals  are  not,  and  partly  because  patriotism  is 
the  chief  Japanese  virtue. 

Buddhism  is  the  religion  of  the  masses  of 
Japan.  In  external  things  it  much  resembles  the 
Roman  Catholic  Church.    Like  it,  Buddhism  has 


Shintoists 


144      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Buddhism 

Like  Romanism, 

but  Different 


Its  Good 
Influence 


Created  Art 


Forerunner 
of   Christ 


great  temples,  flowers  on  the  altar,  candles,  in- 
cense, rosaries,  images,  processions,  and  shaves 
the  heads  of  its  priests.  But  in  doctrines  it  differs 
completely  from.  Rome.  "Knowledge,  enlighten- 
ment, is  the  condition  of  Buddhistic  grace — not 
faith.  Self-perfection  is  the  means  of  salvation, 
not  the  vicarious  sufferings  of  a  redeemer.  Not 
eternal  life  is  the  end,  but  practical  annihilation. 
For  Buddhism  teaches  that  life  itself  is  an  evil, 
springing  from  the  double  roots  of  ignorance  and 
passion.  It  ignores  the  existence  of  a  supreme 
God  and  Creator  of  the  world ;  its  gods  are 
chiefly  Buddhas  or  holy  men." 

Yet  Buddhism  brought  no  small  benefits  to 
Japan.  "All  education  was  for  centuries  in  its 
hands,  as  was  the  care  of  the  poor  and  the  sick. 
It  introduced  art  and  medicine,  molded  the  folk- 
lore of  the  country,  created  its  dramatic  poetry, 
and  deeply  influenced  politics  and  every  sphere 
of  social  activity.  In  a  word,  Buddhism  was  the 
teacher  under  whose  instructions  Japan  grew 
up."  The  many  beautiful  temples,  bronze  art 
objects,  especially  the  two  great  Buddhas  at  Nara 
and  Kamakura,  rising  over  fifty  feet  above  the 
platforms  on  which  they  sit,  the  largest  and  most 
impressive  bronze  images  in  the  world — these  re- 
veal the  former  art  influence  of  Buddhism. 

It  has  had  a  mission  as  a  forerunner  of  Him 
of  whom  all  the  holy  prophets  have  spoken  since 
the  world  began ;  but  now,  surrounded  by  the 


Beautiful   Mount   Fuji. 


f     1        VB^  •    * 

J  I    t?»^ ■*. #  •      fl 

^9       ~*^* 

Preparing  a  Rice  Field,  Japan. 


^M*mm 6  r.         warn 


A    Shinto    Shrine.  The  Gkeat  Buddha   Kamakura. 


[JUDDHIST    TK.MI'I.K.     KyhP 


Japan 


145 


light  of  Western  knowledge  and  in  the  presence 
of  Him  who  is  the  fullness  of  grace  and  truth,  it 
will  give  place  to  the  One  who  is  greater  than 
Buddha,  and  who  fully  reveals  the  Father  to  all 
his  children. 

The  third  Japanese  system  of  religion  is  Con- 
fucianism, which  came  in  from  China  early  in 
the  Christian  era.  Confucius  refrained  from  all 
metaphysical  and  doctrinal  discussions.  He  con- 
fined himself  to  practical  details  of  morals  and 
government,  and  took  submission  to  parents  and 
political  rulers  as  the  corner-stone  of  his  system. 
The  result  is  a  set  of  moral  truths  of  a  very  nar- 
row scope,  and  of  dry  ceremonial  observances, 
political  rather  than  personal.  He  was  the  first 
democrat  of  the  ancient  East — a  democrat  so 
outspoken  as  to  have  at  one  time  suffered  exclu- 
sion from  the  libraries  of  absolutistic  Japan. 

The  Confucian  philosophy  lay  dormant  during 
the  Middle  Ages,  the  period  of  the  supremacy  of 
Buddhism.  It  awoke  in  the  early  part  of  the 
seventeenth  century,  when  Ieyasu,  the  great 
warrior,  ruler,  and  patron  of  learning,  caused 
the  Confucian  classics  to  be  printed  in  Japan  for 
the  first  time.  During  the  two  hundred  and  fifty 
years  that  followed,  the  whole  intellect  of  the 
country  was  molded  by  Confucian  ideas.  In 
spite  of  his  democracy,  his  doctrine  of  unques- 
tioning submission  to  parents  and  rulers  lingers 
in  the  new  era  as  one  of  the  corner-stones  of 


Confucianism 


Practical 
Ethics 


Revival  of 
Confucianism 


146      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

Japanese  society.  But  Christianity  will  absorb 
what  is  permanent  in  this  as  well  as  in  all  other 
national  religions,  as  it  comes  not  to  destroy,  but 
to  fulfill.  (This  section  on  the  religions  of  Japan 
has  been  abridged  from  Chamberlain's  "Things 
Japanese.") 

The  political  institutions  of  modern  Japan  are 
a  Constitutional  modeled  on  the  English  and  German  constitu- 
tional monarchies,  retaining  much  of  old  Japan- 
ese elements  and  including  some  American.  The 
Emperor  is  a  progressive,  wise,  liberal-minded 
man,  whose  powers  are  limited  by  a  constitution, 
and  who  is  advised  by  a  cabinet  consisting  of  one 
president,  one  vice-president,  twenty-five  coun- 
cilors, and  one  secretary,  with  five  assistants ; 
these  are  appointed  by  the  Emperor,  and  consti- 
tute the  Privy  Council.  The  Imperial  Diet,  cor- 
responding to  our  Congress,  consists  of  the 
House  of  Peers  and  the  House  of  Commons. 
The  members  of  the  latter,  now  numbering  three 
hundred  and  seventy-six,  are  elected  by  ballot. 

"The  Japanese  Constitution  makes  each  male 
subject  eligible  to  civil  and  military  offices  ;  amen- 
able to  service  in  the  army  and  the  navy,  and  the 
duty  of  paying  taxes,  according  to  law ;  gives  the 
liberty  of  abode,  inviolate  right  of  property,  right 
of  trial  by  law,  and  freedom  of  speech,  writing, 
publication,  public  meeting,  association,  and  re- 
ligious belief,  'within  the  limits  of  law.'  And 
relisrious  freedom  is  guaranteed  to  all." 


Japan 


147 


Christian  Japan. 

Of  course,  Christian  Japan  is  an  ideal,  but  it 
is  an  ideal  embraced  in  the  Savior's  great  com- 
mand to  "make  disciples  of  all  nations,"  and  in 
the  vision  of  Patmos,  that  finally  "the  kingdom 
of  this  world  is  become  the  kingdom  of  our 
Lord." 

The  difficulties  to  be  overcome  are  many,  but 
no  greater  than  the  Roman  empire  presented  to 
Christians  of  the  first  century. 

The  national  spirit,  since  the  Chinese-Japanese 
and  the  Russian-Japanese  wars,  has  grown  rap- 
idly. Everything  Japanese  is  highly  esteemed, 
and  everything  foreign  is  correspondingly  dis- 
credited. Christianity  as  the  religion  of  the  for- 
eigner, has  had  to  share  in  this  reaction,  and  its 
progress  has  been  thereby  hindered.  On  the 
other  hand,  this  reaction  has  favored  the  native 
religions. 

Buddhism  is  especially  progressive,  and  has 
copied  from  Christianity  its  Sunday  schools, 
young  men's  associations,  and  evangelistic  meth- 
ods. Great  processions  visit  Nara,  Tse,  and 
Nikko,  the  centers  of  native  religions,  and  large 
sums  are  being  expended  in  repairing  the  old 
temples  and  shrines.  All  that  can  be  done  is 
now  being  done  to  revive  the  dying  national  re- 
ligions. 

"Chastity  is  a  virtue  that  public  opinion  in 
Japan  does  not  demand  in  men  or  in  unmarried 


The  Christian 
Ideal 


Difficulties 


Reaction 
Against 
Things 
Foreign 


Revival  of 
Old  Religions 


148      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


women  with  any  such  insistence  as  prevails  in 
Western  lands."  Concubinage,  with  family  feuds 
and  ruined  homes,  is  a  result.  The  licensed 
prostitution  which  prevails  all  over  the  empire 
gives  a  show  of  respectability  to  moral  laxity 
between  the  sexes  and  encourages  immorality 
just  as  the  licensed  saloon  promotes  drunkenness 
in  this  country.  This  condition  is  a  serious 
obstacle  to  missionary  effort. 

Pantheism,  worship  of  objects  of  nature,  and 
ancestral  worship  are  very  strongly  rooted  in 
the  minds  of  the  Japanese.  These  natural 
growths  all  have  to  be  removed  before  Christian 
truth  can  take  root  properly.  This  is  why  con- 
verts in  Japan  are  few  and  progress  slow  as 
compared  with  Roman  Catholic  countries  like 
the  Philippines,  where  the  soil  has  already  been 
prepared  by  the  spread  of  a  knowledge  of  God 
and  of  a  vicarious  sacrifice  through  Jesus  Christ. 

Superstition  has  a  strong  hold,  especially  upon 
the  illiterate.  They  believe  that  if  certain  foolish 
traditions  are  not  complied  with,  the  evil  spirits, 
which  fill  the  air,  will  have  revenge.  An  instance 
is  that  of  locating  a  house.  A  sorcerer  is  often 
called  to  go  through  certain  forms  of  augury 
to  determine  the  exact  location  and  the  points  of 
the  compass  which  the  several  parts  of  the  build- 
ing must  face  lest  disaster  come  to  the  occupant. 

There  is  now  little  active  persecution  of  per- 
sons who  become  Christians  in  Japan,  but  there 


Japan 


149 


is  often  strong  opposition  on  the  part  of  the 
other  members  of  the  family.  Want  of  sympathy 
from  friends  sometimes  induces  weak  Christians 
to  conceal  their  Christian  faith. 

The  influence  which  Christianity  is  now  exert- 
ing over  Japan  cannot  be  measured  by  statistics. 
It  has  made  more  humane  the  laws ;  it  has  made 
more  righteous  their  enforcement;  it  has  made 
more  just  the  officials  of  the  nation,  and  it  has 
rightly  exalted  womanhood  as  compared  with 
former  ideas. 

I  was  told  at  Sendai  that  ten  years  ago  not  a 
teacher  in  one  of  the  large  city  schools  was  a 
Christian,  and  the  pupils  were  forbidden  to 
attend  Sunday  school.  Now  five  of  those  teach- 
ers are  Christians  and  the  pupils  are  encouraged 
to  attend  Sunday  school. 

Two  years  ago  the  Methodist  Publishing 
House  in  Tokyo  issued  a  Union  Hymnal.  It  was 
thought  fifty  thousand  would  supply  all  demands, 
but  they  have  now  sold  one  hundred  and  fifty 
thousand  copies,  and  recently  issued  another 
large  edition  to  meet  the  constant  demand.  The 
gospel  is  being  sung  by  many  who  are  not 
avowed  Christians.  In  general  it  may  be  said 
that  there  is  now  complete  religious  freedom 
throughout  the  empire,  and  a  tendency  of  the  en- 
lightened people  to  Christianity. 

There  are  now  accredited  to  Japan  886  Protes- 
tant missionaries  (including  their  wives),  or,  on 


The  Growing 
Influence  of 
Christianity 


One 

Illustration 


Wide 

Circulation  of 
Union 
Hymnal 


150      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


an  average,  one  missionary  to  every  53,000  peo- 
ple. There  are  404  Japanese  ordained  ministers, 
698  unordained  ministers  and  helpers  (men), 
and  395  Japanese  Bible  women.  In  1907  there 
were  reported  64,621  Protestant  Christians, 
59,437  Roman  Catholics,  and  29,573  Greek  Cath- 
olics, a  total  of  153,631. 

The  Young  Men's  Christian  Association  is 
doing  splendid  work.  Under  its  direction,  imme- 
diately after  the  close  of  the  World's  Student 
Christian  Federation  Convention,  held  in  Tokyo, 
April  3-7,  1907,  a  great  evangelistic  campaign 
was  carried  on  in  leading  educational  centers. 
In  one  province  the  governor  summoned  four 
hundred  educators  to  listen  to  Christian  ad- 
dresses. In  a  certain  strong  Buddhist  community 
two  thousand  people  crowded  the  largest  hall  to 
hear  the  foreigners  preach.  In  several  cities  the 
provincial  assembly-halls  and  conservative  public 
schools  were  opened  for  the  first  time  to  a  dis- 
tinctly Christian  meeting.  The  conversion  of 
some  eighteen  hundred  persons  was  reported 
during  this  campaign. 

The  Christian  Endeavor  movement  reports  one 
hundred  and  five  senior  and  fifty-one  junior  so- 
cieties in  eleven  denominations,  with  a  total 
membership  of  3,823,  a  gain  during  l(X)7-08  of 
477. 

There  arc  now  in  Japan  832  Sunday  schools, 
with  45,000  teachers  and   scholars.     A   national 


Japan 


151 


association  was  recently  organized,  and  this  very 
efficient  form  of  Christian  work  has  an  open  field 
in  Japan.  Dr.  A.  T.  Howard  has  the  honor  of 
being  a  member  of  the  executive  committee  of 
the  national  organization. 

The  Bible  has  for  twenty  years  been  circu- 
lated in  the  Japanese  tongue.  In  1907  the  Amer- 
ican Bible  Society  issued  119,960  Bibles,  or  por- 
tions, and  the  British  Bible  societies  circulated 
209,836  copies.  It  is  estimated  that  over  one 
million  persons  are  reading  the  Holy  Scriptures 
in  Japanese. 

Ten  years  ago  the  National  Temperance 
League  of  Japan  was  organized.  With  it  are 
affiliated  ninety  temperance  societies  having  a 
membership  of  about  eight  thousand  members. 
From  its  beginning  Rev.  Joseph  Cosand  has  been 
closely  associated  with  the  work  of  the  league. 
He  was  for  some  years  the  editor  of  the  English 
department  of  the  Kuni  no  Hikari,  its  official 
organ. 

The  Christian  schools  and  colleges  are  doing 
a  great  work.  The  Doshisha  at  Kyoto  (Congre- 
gational), Aoyama  College  at  Tokyo  (Metho- 
dist), the  Northern  Japan  College  at  Sendai 
(Reformed),  and  others  of  like  character,  along 
with  girls'  schools,  professional  schools,  and 
kindergartens,  bring  under  their  fostering  care 
and  Christian  influence  over  twenty  thousand 
youth  each  year. 


Wide 

Circulation 
of  the 
Bible 


Temperance 
Work 


Christian 
Schools 


152      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

The  Protestant  churches  of  Japan  are  increas- 
ing their  effectiveness  by  removing  competition 
and  by  entering  into  brotherly  cooperation.  As 
early  as  1877  three  Presbyterian  and  Reformed 
missions  united  their  work.  At  that  time  there 
were  623  Christians  and  twenty-five  students  for 
the  ministry.  The  other  three  Presbyterian  and 
Reformed  missionary  societies,  arriving  later, 
soon  caught  the  spirit  of  union,  and  by  1886  six 
different  denominations  were  working  as  a  unit. 
It  is  a  notable  fact  that  the  church  organized  by 
the  Presbyterian  and  Reformed  missionaries  was 
never  called  by  either  one  of  those  two  names, 
but  from  the  beginning  was  known  as  the  Church 
of  Christ  in  Japan. 

The  following  year  (1887)  the  American  Epis- 
copal Church  and  the  two  missions  representing 
the  Anglican  Communion  combined  their  forces 
to  form  one  church. 

The  movement  for  a  Methodist  union  started 
about  twenty  years  ago.  It  was  consummated 
in  May,  1907,  by  the  organization  of  the  Metho- 
dist Church  of  Japan,  in  which  the  Methodist 
Episcopal,  the  Canadian  Methodist,  and  the 
Southern  Methodist  Episcopal  churches  united. 

There  is  a  strong  tendency  in  Japan  to-day 
towards  a  union  of  all  kindred  Christian  bodies 
that  the  best  possible  use  of  men  and  means  may 
be  made  for  the  speedy  evangelization  of  the 
country. 


Japan 


153 


Our  Church  in  Japan. 
The  United  Brethren  work  in  Japan,  carried 
on  by  the  Foreign  Missionary  Society,  was 
opened  in  1895.  The  war  between  China  and 
Japan  had  called  the  attention  of  our  people  anew 
to  the  Island  Empire,  and  the  new  treaties  made 
with  foreign  powers  had  opened  more  fully  its 
doors  to  the  entrance  of  the  gospel.  After  our 
long  experience  in  Sierra  Leone,  there  was  a 
strong  desire  in  the  denomination  for  work  in  a 
mission  land  where  the  problems  presented  would 
be  different  from  those  constantly  encountered 
in  the  tropics. 

Accordingly,  in  the  fall  of  1895,  Rev.  George 
K.  Irie,  a  Japanese  Christian  young  man,  who 
professed  conversion  in  Japan  and  who  had  but 
recently  graduated  from  Lebanon  Valley  College, 
was  sent  out  to  start  the  work.  A  few  preaching- 
places  were  soon  opened  in  Tokyo  and  in  other 
centers.  These  were  supplied  with  preachers 
secured  from  other  denominations.  It  was  soon 
seen  that  if  the  work  of  the  Japan  mission  was  to 
prosper,  it  must  be  put  in  charge  of  a  superin- 
tendent from  America  and  men  be  employed  who 
had  been  carefully  selected  and  trained  under  the 
direction  of  United  Brethren  missionaries. 

About  this  time  Rev.  and  Mrs.  Alfred  T. 
Howard  arrived  home  on  furlough  from  Sierra 
Leone,  West  Africa.  In  Mr.  Howard  the  Board 
saw  a  man  well  qualified  by  training  and  expe- 


Reasons  fcr 
Starting  the 
Work 


Begun 
in  1895 


Doctor  Howard 

Appointed 

Superintendent 


154      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Need  for 
Strong   Native 
Workers 


New 

Missionaries 
Sent   Out 


rience  for  the  superintendency  of  the  Japan 
mission.  He  accepted  the  appointment,  and  after 
only  two  months'  rest  in  America,  set  sail  for 
Japan  in  August,  1898,  Mrs.  Howard  joining 
him  in  Tokyo  early  the  next  year. 

Upon  Mr.  Howard's  arrival  in  Japan,  many 
difficult  problems  confronted  him,  but  he  took 
hold  of  his  task  with  characteristic  wisdom,  tact, 
and  courage.  The  greatest  need  was  for  well- 
trained,  thoroughly-consecrated  Japanese  work- 
ers. The  very  excellent  school  system  in  Japan 
and  the  consequent  high  degree  of  intelligence 
existing  among  her  people,  renders  it  difficult  for 
an  evangelist  to  command  respect  and  win  men 
to  Christ  if  he  does  not  have  a  good  secular  edu- 
cation, as  well  as  theological  training.  Without 
any  school  property,  without  money  for  school 
purposes,  and  without  teachers,  what  was  the 
superintendent  to  do?  Previous  experience  had 
demonstrated  that  the  safest  course  would  be  in 
organizing  the  work  with  the  few  men  available 
and  in  planning  to  raise  up  a  strong  native  min- 
istry at  the  earliest  practical  moment. 

In  the  beginning  of  1900  an  agreement  was 
entered  into  with  the  authorities  of  the  Doshisha, 
a  Congregational  college  in  Kyoto,  to  send  our 
young  men  to  their  seminary,  while  our  mission 
was  to  furnish  a  teacher  for  the  school.  Rev.  J. 
Edgar  Knipp,  upon  his  graduation  from  Union 
Biblical  Seminary  in  1(X)0,  was  sent  out  to  fill  the 


Japan  155 

position.  For  three  years  he  and  his  wife  did 
fruitful  work  in  Kyoto,  but  on  account  •  of  the 
ill  health  of  Mr.  Knipp  they  were  compelled  to 
return  home  in  the  winter  of  1903. 

Early  in  1901  our  missionary  force  in  Japan  Additional 
was  increased  by  the  addition  of  Rev.  and  Airs.  Reinforcements 
Joseph  Cosand,  who  had  previously  spent  fifteen 
years  in  Tokyo  as  representatives  of  the  Friends' 
Missionary  Association  of  Philadelphia.  Mr. 
Cosand's  rich  experience  and  thorough  knowl- 
edge of  the  Japanese  language  enabled  him  to  do 
full  work  at  once.  He  was  accordingly  put  in 
charge  of  the  churches  southwest  of  Tokyo, 
known  as  the  Tokaido  District.  Rev.  Monroe 
Crecelius  arrived  in  Tokyo  in  the  fall  of  1906. 
After  a  year  spent  in  diligent  study  of  the  Jap- 
anese language  and  in  teaching  several  English 
Bible  classes,  he  moved  to  Otsu,  the  capital  of 
the  Omi  province,  which  was  to  be  the  center  of 
his  future  work.  On  December  13  he  was  taken 
violently  ill,  and  died  of  scarlet  fever  after  a 
week's  sickness.  In  November,  1907,  the  Japan 
mission  was  reinforced  by  the  arrival  of  Rev. 
and  Mrs.  B.  F.  Shively.  They  at  once  began  an 
energetic  study  of  the  Japanese  language  in  Mr. 
Matsudo's  Language  School  in  Tokyo. 

Organization  and  Division  of  the  Field. 

Under  Doctor  Howard's   direction   our   work 
prospered  so  well  that  in  the  spring  of  1902  the 


Japan 


157 


Japan  Mission  Conference  was  organized  with 
three  ordained  missionaries  and  eight  Japanese 
evangelists  and  pastors.  A  short  time  later  the 
most  important  parts  of  our  Book  of  Discipline 
were  translated  into  Japanese  and  put  into  the 
hands  of  all  our  native  workers. 

Our  missionary  territory,  extending  a  distance 
of  three  hundred  miles  from  the  neighborhood 
of  Tokyo,  the  capital,  to  Kyoto,  was  divided  into 
two  presiding-elder  districts.  Superintendent 
Howard  took  charge  of  the  Northeast  District, 
while  Mr.  Cosand  was  given  the  care  of  the 
churches  in  the  Tokaido  District.  As  this  latter 
district  covers  a  very  large  territory,  it  is  the 
intention  to  divide  it,  making  a  third  district, 
which  will  include  Kyoto  and  the  Shiga  Pre- 
fecture. Mr.  Shively  will  be  put  in  charge,  with 
Otsu,  the  capital  of  the  prefecture,  as  his  head- 
quarters. 

The  Northeast  District. 

In  order  to  get  a  general  view  of  our  field  in 
Japan,  let  us  take  a  flying  trip  to  each  of  the 
principal  points.  We  shall  visit  first  our  newest 
mission  at  Shimo  Shibuya,  in  the  southwestern 
part  of  Tokyo.  This  is  where  our  missionaries 
now  live.  The  work  was  begun  in  1907  in  Mr. 
Cosand's  home.  It  grew  so  rapidly  that  in  the 
following  spring  a  lot  was  purchased.  The  great 
need  now  is  for  a  church-building:. 


Territory 
Divided 


A  Flying 
Trip 


158      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Honjo 


The  Noda 
Church 


Matsudo 


In  the  northeastern  section  of  Tokyo  is  located 
our  Honjo  church,  in  the  center  of  a  population 
of  150,000  people.  Our  own,  with  the  two  other 
Christian  churches  in  that  ward,  can  accommodate 
about  eight  hundred  persons.  The  majority  of  the 
people  work  in  factories  from  early  morn  until 
late  at  night.  They  have  only  two  rest  days  a 
month,  the  first  and  fifteenth,  and  as  Buddhism 
has  a  strong  hold  upon  them,  they  are  very  diffi- 
cult to  reach.  The  Sunday  school,  however,  is 
prosperous.  Cooking  classes  are  held  by  Mrs. 
Howard  for  the  women. 

Next  to  Honjo,  the  Noda  church,  situated 
twenty-five  miles  north  of  Tokyo,  is  the  oldest  in 
this  district.  We  reach  it  by  electric  car,  steam 
car,  jinriksha,  and  boat.  Noda  is  the  most  im- 
portant shoyu  (somewhat  similar  to  Worcester- 
shire sauce)  manufacturing  town  in  the  empire. 
The  neighboring  county  is  densely  populated. 
There  are  so  many  villages  of  a  few  hundred 
people  each  that  the  traveler,  as  he  journeys 
along  the  roads,  hardly  gets  out  of  one  before 
reaching  another.  This  church  stands  first  in  the 
Japan  Mission  Conference  in  self-support.  It 
has  a  successful  preaching-place  at  Nagareyama, 
seven  miles  distant. 

Entering  a  boat  at  Noda,  we  travel  down  the 
river  twelve  miles  to  Matsudo,  a  town  of  twelve 
thousand  people.  Matsudo  is  noted  as  a  com- 
munity of  gamblers.    It  was  a  very  difficult  field 


Japan  159 

and  baptisms  did  not  at  first  occur  very  fre- 
quently, but  since  the  conversion  of  the  ex-head 
man  of  the  town  and  his  daughter,  work  has- 
become  easier.  Now  several  school-teachers  and 
young  men  are  diligently  studying  the  Bible. 
Although  there  is  no  other  Christian  church  in 
this  part  of  the  country,  we  have  not  yet  been 
able  to  do  much  for  the  dozens  of  villages  scat- 
tered through  the  valley. 

Taking  an  eastward-bound  train,  we  reach  Funabashi 
Funabashi  in  twenty  minutes.  The  town  is  situ- 
ated at  the  head  of  Tokyo  Bay,  some  fifteen  miles 
from  the  capital.  The  population  numbers  some- 
thing more  than  thirteen  thousand,  of  whom 
nearly  five  thousand  are  fishermen.  Five  miles 
away  is  a  military  post  where  over  twenty-five 
hundred  artillerymen  are  stationed,  the  officers 
living  in  Funabashi  and  going  back  and  forth 
daily  on  the  trains.  Besides  these  officers,  there 
are  always  great  numbers  of  soldiers  in  the  town. 
The  location  of  Funabashi  is  central  and  strate- 
gic. It  forms  an  important  link  in  the  chain  of 
our  churches  running  northeast  from  Tokyo,  and 
lies  in  a  district  left  entirely  to  our  Church. 

Returning  to  Tokyo,  we  come  to  Aoyama,  the  Aoyama 
last  of  the  churches  of  the  Northeastern  District. 
The  pastor  is  Rev.  T.  Makino.  The  church  is 
situated  in  a  residence  section  in  the  southwestern 
part  of  the  city.  We  are  here  responsible  for 
the  evangelization  of  not  less  than  fifteen  thou- 


160      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


The  Samuel 
Thompson 
Memorial 
Church 


sand  people.  Rev.  B.  F.  Shively  teaches  a  young 
men's  English  Bible  class  in  connection  with  the 
flourishing  Sunday  school.  An  excellent  church 
site  has  been  purchased  by  the  mission  and  a 
commodious  building  for  meetings  and  Sunday 
school  is  soon  to  be  erected.  The  lot  is  not  more 
than  two  blocks  away  from  the  west  gate  of  the 
International  Exposition  to  be  held  in  1912.  At 
that  time  a  great  union  evangelistic  campaign 
will  be  conducted  for  the  Exposition  visitors,  and 
our  own  Church  will  be  one  in  which  daily  serv- 
ices will  be  held. 

The  Tokaido  District. 

Beginning  our  missionary  tour  of  the  Tokaido 
District  at  Nihombashi,  Tokyo,  we  see  here  the 
first  church-building  erected  in  Japan  with 
United  Brethren  funds.  It  was  dedicated  Decem- 
ber 21,  1901,  having  been  erected  in  memory  of 
Samuel  Thompson,  of  Jefferson,  Indiana,  with 
money  given  by  his  heirs.  It  has  been  a  great 
blessing  to  the  work,  but  is  too  small  for  present 
needs.  The  church  is  situated  in  the  oldest, 
richest,  and  most  congested  section  of  Tokyo. 
It  has  a  splendid  field.  Opportunity  is  spelled  in 
large  letters  all  around  it.  Working  in  a  district 
of  sixty  thousand  people,  in  which  there  are  only 
three  Christian  churches,  the  pastor  leads  our 
forces  as  they  endeavor  to  evangelize  one-third 
of  that  number.    An  able  Bible-woman  visits  in 


Japan  United  Brethren  Mission   Conference 


United  Brethren  Sunday  School,  Honjo,  Toykc 


Y.   P.  ( '.   r.  Church,  SnrzroicA.  Kyoto   U.    B.   Ciicrch.    1905 


A  Groi  r  of  Christians,  Shizi'oka. 


Japan  161 

the  homes  of  the  neighborhood,  carrying  the  gos- 
pel to  many  who  never  could  be  reached  directly 
through  the  church  services.  She  does  a  great 
deal  of  work  for  the  children,  also.  A  foreign 
cooking-class  for  the  women  of  this  church  and 
neighborhood  has  been  for  several  years  con- 
ducted by  Mrs.  Cosand.  Through  it  many  non- 
Christian  women  have  been  brought  in  touch 
with  the  gospel,  as  a  Bible  lesson  always  forms 
part  of  the  meeting. 

Taking  the  train,  we  go  fifty  miles  in  a  south-  odawara 
westerly  direction  to  Odawara.  This  famous 
resort  by  the  sea  is  a  busy  place  of  six  thousand 
people.  It  is  not  unlike  old-time  Corinth,  as  there 
are  a  few  good  people  living  among  the  general 
population  of  money-worshipers,  seeking  wealth 
by  every  catch-as-catch-can  device  known  to 
man.  Most  of  our  membership  at  this  town  has 
been  composed  of  persons  who  resided  tem- 
porarily in  the  place  for  their  health  or  business 
reasons.  A  few  years  ago  a  prominent  ex-judge 
of  Tokyo  and  his  family  of  six  persons,  who  re- 
sided for  some  time  in  Odawara,  were  all  con- 
verted. This  result  was  brought  about  through 
the  children  having  first  been  induced  to  attend 
the  Sunday  school ;  then  the  grandmother  and 
finally  the  mother  and  the  father  were  led  to 
Christ. 

Returning  to   the   station,   we   proceed    forty      Numazu 
miles  farther  on  to  the  southwest  to  Numazu,  the 


162      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

second  city  in  size  in  the  Shizuoka  prefecture. 
The  people,  twelve  thousand  in  number,  are  given 
over  to  money-making.  The  present  outlook  for 
our  church  is  very  hopeful.  A  mission  is  carried 
on  by  this  church  at  a  village  some  three  miles 
distant  from  Numazu.  The  young  men  of  the 
Numazu  church  are  active  helpers  in  the  mission 
Sunday  school,  almost  every  child  in  the  village 
attending. 
Shizuoka  Traveling  on  thirty  miles  beyond  Numazu,  our 

train  arrives  at  Shizuoka.  This  is  the  capital  of 
Shizuoka  province,  and  has  a  population  of  fifty 
thousand  people.  It  is  a  progressive  city,  with 
good  government  schools  and  an  open-minded 
class  of  people.  Several  other  denominations  are 
working  here,  but  we  have  one  side  of  the  city 
to  ourselves.  Our  part  is  mostly  a  residence 
quarter,  and  one  of  the  best  sections  for  Chris- 
tian work.  The  Shizuoka  church  now  has  two 
missions  in  other  parts  of  the  city  which  are 
doing  useful  work  as  feeders  of  the  central 
organization.  The  money  contributed  for  a 
chapel  in  Japan  by  our  young  people  on  their 
Anniversary  Day,  1905,  was  used  for  the  erection 
of  a  church-building  in  Shizuoka.  Doctor  How- 
ard writes:  "There  is  no  better  town  in  Japan 
than  Shizuoka  that  I  have  seen — clean,  intelli- 
gent, progressive.  A  splendid  opportunity  to  do 
effective  work  is  ours."  We  may  expect  a  rich 
harvest  from  our  labors  there. 


Japan 


163 


The  next  point  to  be  visited  is  Kusatsu,  a  town 
of  six  thousand  people,  situated  on  Lake  Biwa, 
about  twenty  miles  from  Kyoto.  This  town  has 
changed  but  little  in  the  past  one  thousand  years. 
Kusatsu  was  long  considered  by  us  as  our  Water- 
loo, as  it  seemed  impossible  to  make  any  serious 
impression  on  the  idolatrous  inhabitants ;  but 
through  the  influence  of  theater  meetings,  tract 
distribution,  personal  work,  and  much  prayer,  an 
entrance  for  the  gospel  has  been  secured.  There 
is  a  large  territory  around  Kusatsu  which  is  not 
being  touched  by  any  church.  In  the  villages  in 
closest  proximity  to  Kusatsu  our  Church  has  a 
considerable  membership.  This  fact  adds  greatly 
to  our  responsibility  in  that  section. 

It  is  but  a  few  minutes'  ride  by  train  from 
Kusatsu  to  Otsu,  the  capital  of  Shiga  prefecture. 
Its  population  is  forty  thousand.  It  has  a  girls' 
high  school,  a  boys'  high  school,  a  normal  school, 
and  a  commercial  school,  while  a  new  agricul- 
tural school  is  only  ten  minutes  away  by  train. 
The  Shiga  prefecture,  with  a  population  of  seven 
hundred  thousand  scattered  in  more  than  twelve 
hundred  towns  and  villages,  has  not  a  single  for- 
eign missionary  in  it,  and  only  seven  or  eight 
Japanese  workers.  Otsu  is  the  natural  center  of 
this  great  district,  rich  and  strongly  Buddhist, 
and  known  as  the  bank  of  the  Buddhists,  as  they 
collect  great  sums  of  money  here.  Our  work  is 
in  the  first  stages,  having  been  but  recently  be- 


Kusatsu 


Otsu — 

A  Strategic 

Point 


164      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

gun.  This  place  has  been  chosen  by  the  Japan 
mission  for  the  permanent  location  of  a  mission- 
ary family.  Here  our  missionaries  could  touch 
and  influence  a  great  many  young  men  and  young 
women  who  will  fill  responsible  positions  in  the 
government,  in  society,  and  in  the  home. 
Kyoto  A  short  ride  from  Otsu  brings  us  to  Kyoto, 

the  ancient  western  capital  of  Japan.  Our  church 
here  is  located  near  the  Second  Imperial  Univer- 
sity. The  vicinity  of  the  church  will  always  be 
a  student  district,  though  there  are  business 
people  all  around  by  the  thousands.  From  the 
beginning  of  the  church  the  growth  has  been 
steady  and  normal.  There  is  an  interesting 
Young  People's  Christian  Endeavor  Society,  and 
also  a  mission  in  another  part  of  the  city  where 
regular  preaching  services  and  a  large  Sunday 
school  are  conducted.  The  church  meets  in  a 
rented  Japanese  building  that  is  inadequate  to 
meet  the  present  needs  of  the  work.  The  mem- 
bers are  anxious  to  have  a  church-building  of 
their  own  and  are  contributing  for  that  purpose. 

Summary. 
To  carry  on  our  work  in  Japan  we  had  in  the 
spring  of  1908  six  foreign  missionaries  (three 
ordained  men  and  their  wives),  fifteen  Japanese 
pastors  and  evangelists  (of  these,  eight  are  or- 
dained men),  three  Bible  women,  and  381  com- 
municant members.  At  the  annual  conference 
that  year  there  were  reported  thirteen  organized 


Japan 


165 


churches,  eighteen  additional  regular  preaching- 
places,  twenty-one  Sunday  schools,  with  935 
teachers  and  scholars,  and  seven  Senior  and  three 
Junior  Christian  Endeavor  societies.  The  amount 
contributed  on  the  field  during  1907-08  was 
$578.85,  while  the  total  value  of  the  property  was 
$23,096. 

The  Methods  of  Work. 

The  methods  of  work  used  in  Japan  do  not 
differ  a  great  deal  from  those  used  in  this  coun- 
try. In  addition  to  the  morning  and  evening 
preaching  services  on  Sunday,  in  each  church  a 
Sunday  school  is  carried  on  and  a  mid-week 
prayer-meeting  is  conducted. 

The  new  missionary,  while  learning  the  native 
language,  teaches  one  or  more  English  Bible 
classes,  generally  composed  of  students. 

The  missionary's  wife  organizes  foreign  cook- 
ing-classes, mothers'  meetings,  and  sometimes 
teaches  English  to  students.  Bible  instruction  is 
made  prominent  in  all  of  this  work,  either 
directly  or  through  the  aid  of  a  native  Bible 
woman.  Visiting  in  the  homes  in  company  with 
the  Bible  woman  is  also  part  of  the  work  of  a 
lady  missionary.  These  duties  and  the  respon- 
sibility of  the  missionary  home,  which  must  be 
more  or  less  an  open  house  for  the  native  people, 
especially  workers,  are  usually  all  that  a  wife  can 
undertake  in  the  mission  field. 


Similar  to 
Those  Used 
in  This 
Country 


English 

Bible 

Classes 


The 

Missionary's 

Wife 


166      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Influence  of 
a  Missionary's 
Home 


Country 
Touring 


Developing 
Self-Support 


The  enervating  effects  of  the  Japanese  climate 
upon  Americans,  the  great  inconvenience  of 
native  houses,  and  the  high  rentals  for  foreign- 
style  buildings,  make  it  necessary  for  our  Church 
to  own  missionary  residences.  In  1906  a  well- 
located  property  in  the  western  part  of  Tokyo 
was  bought  and  two  houses  suitable  for  mission- 
ary homes  and  mission  headquarters  were 
erected.  A  Christian  home  is  a  beautiful,  rest- 
ful, fruitful  oasis  in  the  desert  of  life.  It  is  an 
inspiration  to  those  who  share  it,  and  an  ideal  to 
those  who  have  it  not.  Such  I  found  the  homes 
and  families  of  Brothers  Howard,  Cosand,  and 
Shively.  While  the  men  are  doing  the  public 
work  of  missionaries,  their  wives  create  such 
happy  homes  and  do  such  social  Christian  work- 
as  will  make  home  life  attractive  to  the  Japanese 
people.     And  no  greater  work  can  be  done. 

The  trained  missionary,  having  a  knowledge 
of  the  language,  often,  either  alone  or  in  com- 
pany with  native  brethren,  tours  in  the  country 
among  the  churches,  frequently  breaking  new 
ground.  For  this  purpose,  sometimes  theaters 
are  hired  and  addresses  given  to  the  crowds  of 
people  who  assemble.  Good  results  are  generally 
obtained  from  such  meetings. 

Most  of  the  temples  and  shrines  in  Japan  were 
built  during  the  Middle  Ages  by  nobles  or 
samurai  of  wealth  and  given  to  the  people. 
These  places  of  worship  often  had  estates  which 


Japan  167 

served  the  purpose  of  an  endowment.  Conse- 
quently, the  religious  expense  to  the  people  was 
trifling.  This  the  Christian  has  often  taken  as  an 
example  of  what  his  attitude  in  regard  to  the 
support  of  the  church  should  be.  Hence,  self- 
support  for  the  Japanese  Church  has  been  more 
difficult  to  attain  than  for  the  churches  in  some 
other  countries.  But  the  recent  spirit  of  inde- 
pendence developed  in  Japan  is  causing  the 
churches  to  take  up  the  question  of  self-support 
in  earnest,  and  much  progress  is  being  made. 
Our  own  Japan  Mission  Conference  has  devel- 
oped a  plan  by  which  the  churches  are  to  become 
self-supporting  not  later  than  at  the  expiration 
of  twenty  years  from  the  time  of  the  organiza- 
tion of  work  in  any  particular  place. 

The  policy  early  adopted  by  the  Japan  mission  Our  Mission 
was  that  of  direct  evangelization  by  the  preach-  Pohcy 
ing  of  the  gospel,  rather  than  the  establishing  of 
mission  schools.  This  policy  has  been  adhered 
to  until  the  present  time.  When  we  entered 
Japan  a  large  number  of  mission  schools  for  both 
sexes  had  already  been  established  by  other  de- 
nominations. This,  added  to  the  fact  that  the 
government  had  an  excellent  school  system  for 
primary  grades,  and  high  school,  college,  and 
university  courses  for  boys,  besides  a  few  high 
schools  for  girls,  made  it  seem  unnecessary  for 
us  to  establish  schools.  The  relatively  large 
amount  of  funds  required  for  educational  work 


168      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


A   Native 
Ministry 
Absolutely 
Essential 


Our 

Greatest 

Accomplishment 


also  acted  as  a  deterrent  in  that  particular.  More- 
over, the  low  spiritual  condition  of  the  masses 
seemed  to  sound  in  our  ears  the  Macedonian  cry, 
"Come  over  and  help  us." 

It  is  evident  that  the  masses  in  foreign  coun- 
tries can  be  Christianized  only  by  a  native  min- 
istry. The  missionary,  though  he  may  study  the 
language  for  years,  can  never  speak  quite  like 
a  native.  The  native  minister  is  also  better 
acquainted  with  the  customs  of  his  people,  and 
can  better  adapt  his  illustrations  and  methods  of 
instruction  to  them  than  it  is  possible  for  a  mis- 
sionary to  do. 

Therefore  our  aim  in  Japan  from  the  Very  be- 
ginning of  our  work  has  been  to  raise  up  a  strong 
native  ministry.  We  now  have  fifteen  pastors, 
eight  of  whom  are  ordained  men.  Five  of  these, 
Revs.  O.  Seki,  Y.  Yoshida,  T.  Minaguchi,  T. 
Makino,  and  Y.  Ono,  finished  their  course  of 
study  and  were  ordained  at  the  annual  confer- 
ence in  1908,  two  of  them,  Revs.  G.  Mayama 
and  Y.  Okazaki,  had  been  ordained  in  1906,  and 
Rev.  T.  Ishiguro  was  ordained  in  America  in 
1908.  The  greatest  work  our  Japan  mission  has 
so  far  accomplished  is  the  selection  and  educa- 
tion of  this  fine  body  of  men.  They  are  ready 
now  to  begin  a  forward  movement  along  the 
lines  of  evangelism,  Sunday-school  work,  and 
church-building.  The  patience,  wisdom,  and  con- 
scientiousness   of    the    superintendent,     Doctor 


Japan 


169 


Howard,  and  the  exalted  influence  of  himself 
and  family,  are  potent  factors  in  this  work  of  the 
making  of  these  men ;  but  each  of  the  other  mis- 
sionaries has  done,  and  is  still  doing  a  noble  part. 

The  greatest  need  of  our  work  in  Japan  at  the 
present  time  is  a  large  increase  in  the  number  of 
native  pastors  and  more  church-buildings.  Men 
like  Rev.  Takejiro  Ishiguro,  whom  many  of  the 
readers  of  this  book  met  during  his  stay  in 
America,  are  seriously  handicapped  in  their  work 
when  their  congregations  must  meet  in  ordinary 
Japanese  dwelling-houses.  With  such  an  equip- 
ment it  is  impossible  for  our  men  to  do  their  best 
work.  Larger  accommodations  would  make  pos- 
sible the  reaching  of  many  more  people  through 
special  evangelistic  meetings.  Suitable  church- 
buildings  would  also  command  the  attention  and 
respect  of  the  Japanese  not  yet  interested  in 
Christianity.  It  is  our  intention  not  to  build 
expensively,  but  with  a  view  to  meeting  the 
actual  needs  of  the  work. 

It  must  be  conceded,  when  Japan's  influence 
in  the  Orient  and  her  own  needs  are  considered, 
that  it  is  a  most  important  mission  field.  Effectual 
work  done  there  will  be  multiplied  a  hundred- 
fold to  the  good  of  the  millions  in  Japan,  and 
through  them  to  multitudes  of  the  Asiatic  peo- 
ples. To-day  there  is  in  Japan  among  all  classes 
of  people  a  growing  appreciation  of  Christianity. 
Our  Church  has  the  privilege  of  doing  its  part 


The 

Present 

Need 


Our  Glorious 
Privilege 


170      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

in  hastening  the  day  when  the  islands  of  Japan 
shall  wait  for  God's  law,  and  on  his  arm  they 
shall  trust.  Then  will  the  world  be  enriched  by 
the  entrance  into  the  kingdom  of  God  of  the 
most  enlightened  and  progressive  nation  of  the 
East. 


QUESTIONS  FOR  STUDY  AND  DISCUSSION. 
CHAPTER  IV. 

1.  Why  have  the  Japanese  made  such  remark- 
able progress  during  the  last  fifty  years? 

2.  Name,  in  the  order  of  their  importance,  three 
reasons  why  you  consider  Japan  a  strategic  mission 
field. 

3.  Compare  the  strength  of  such  organizations 
as  the  Christian  Endeavor  Society  and  the  Young 
Men's  Christian  Association  in  Japan  with  similar 
ones  in  our  own  country. 

4.  Imagine  yourself  a  missionary  in  Japan. 
With  what  Christian  truth  would  you  approach 
a  Shintoist?  What  would  be  your  point  of  contact 
with  a  Buddhist? 

5.  In  what  part  of  Japan  is  our  work  located? 
Describe  the  work  of  the  most  important  churches. 

6.  What  has  been  the  greatest  achievement  of 
our  Japan  Mission?     Why? 

7.  State  three  reasons  why  our  Church  should 
give  a  larger  support  in  prayers  and  money  to  our 
work  in  Japan. 


PORTO  RICO 

By  S.  S.  Hough,  D.D. 


171 


"The  fields  are  ripe  to  harvest  in  Porto  Rico.  There 
is  no  doubt  about  the  outcome  if  we  push  the  work 
vigorously  now.  We  are  waiting  on  the  Lord  of  the 
harvest  that  he  may  stir  up  the  minds  and  hearts  of 
our  co-laborers  in  the  States,  that  they  may  come  up 
to  the  help  of  the  Lord  against  the  mighty  forces  of 
evil  in  this  fair  island.  We  have  only  begun  the 
battle  down  here  against  ignorance,  and  superstition, 
and  for  light,  truth,  and  salvation,  and  we  do  not 
want  to  give  up  until  a  decisive  victory  has  been 
won." 

— From  one  of  our  missionaries. 

"The  isles  shall  wait  for  me,  and  on  mine  arm  shall 
they  trust." 

— Isaiah  51:5. 


L72 


Peak 


V 

PORTO  RICO. 

Physical,    Historical,    Political,   and   Com- 
mercial Features. 

There  is  a  giant  mountain  in  the  Atlantic  The  Island 
Ocean  fourteen  hundred  miles  southeast  of  New  a  Mountain 
York  City,  whose  sloping  sides  descend  abruptly 
into  the  water  to  the  depth  of  five  miles,  and 
whose  summit  rises  over  three  thousand  seven 
hundred  feet  above  sea  level.  That  mountain- 
top,  above  the  sea,  is  the  island  of  Porto  Rico. 
A  million  people  are  living  on  that  island  with 
their  faces  turned  to  the  United  States  for  help 
in  their  struggle  upward  to  find  the  best  in  life. 

To  reach  Porto  Rico  by  steamship  from  New 
York  City  requires  four  and  one-half  days,  from 
New  Orleans  five  days,  and  from  the  nearest 
South-American  port  two  days. 

The  island  itself  is  full  of  interest.  It  belongs 
to  that  great  volcanic  mountain  system  which 
includes  Cuba,  Haiti,  Jamaica,  and  many  smaller 
islands  situated  to  the  south  and  east.  Porto  Rico 
in  shape  is  a  parallelogram,  being  one  hundred 
miles  long  and  thirty-six  miles  wide. 

173 


174      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


With  the  exception  of  the  plain  that  borders  on 
the  coast,  the  surface  of  Porto  Rico  is  exceed- 
ingly broken  and  mountainous.  It  is  a  land  of 
contrasts.  One  can  ride  in  a  balmy,  cool  atmos- 
phere over  mountain  paths  two  thousand  feet 
above  sea  level,  surrounded  by  deep  gorges  and 
sharp  mountain  peaks,  which  are  cultivated  to 
the  very  summit,  and  within  two  hours  there- 
after be  in  the  midst  of  the  coast  plain  under  a 
temperature  of  ninety  degrees  in  the  shade  in  the 
month  of  January. 

Cold  weather  is  unknown  in  Porto  Rico.  The 
range  of  the  thermometer  during  the  year  is 
from  sixty-five  to  ninety-four  degrees.  Much 
rain  falls  during  the  months  from  April  to  No- 
vember. There  is  usually  a  heavy  shower  every 
afternoon  or  evening,  and  in  a  few  minutes  the 
sky  is  clear  and  work  goes  on  as  before.  The 
northern  half  of  the  island  receives  an  annual 
average  rainfall  of  seventy-five  inches,  while  on 
the  southern  side,  where  agriculture  is  aided  by 
means  of  irrigation,  the  average  rainfall  is  less 
than  fifty  inches.  "The  island,  therefore^  has  a 
wet  and  a  dry  side  rather  than  a  wet  and  dry 
season." 

Porto  Rico  was  discovered  on  November  16. 
1493,  by  Columbus  on  his  second  voyage  to 
America.  In  1508,  Ponce  de  Leon,  who  figures 
largely  in  the  early  history  of  the  island,  and  who 
had  been  with  Columbus  when  he  first  landed. 


Porto  Rico 


175 


returned  with  an  exploring  party  in  search  of 
gold,  and  built  the  first  town,  called  Caparra, 
near  the  present  site  of  San  Juan.  Ponce  de 
Leon  was  the  first  governor  of  Porto  Rico,  and 
here  he  dreamed  of  the  fountain  of  perpetual 
youth,  in  his  search  for  which  he  later  discov- 
ered Florida. 

The  Indians,  a  copper-colored  race  who  were 
found  on  the  island  in  considerable  numbers 
when  it  was  discovered  by  the  Spaniards,  were 
practically  exterminated  within  half  a  century  by 
the  hardships  imposed  upon  them  by  Spanish 
taskmasters.  Negroes  were  early  imported  from 
Africa  to  take  the  place  of  the  Indians,  and  servi- 
tude continued  until  the  year  1873,  when  slavery 
was  finally  abolished. 

Prior  to  1778  no  persons  except  Spaniards 
were  permitted  to  land  in  Porto  Rico.  From 
1778  to  1815,  Roman  Catholic  workmen  from 
other  countries  were  admitted,  but  none  other 
than  Catholics.  In  1815,  however,  a  royal  decree 
was  issued,  known  as  "Regulations  for  Promot- 
ing the  Population,  Commerce,  Industry,  and 
Agriculture  of  Puerto  Rico."  By  this  proclama- 
tion, foreigners  were  invited  to  the  island,  and 
rights  of  Spanish  citizenship,  under  certain  con- 
ditions, were  promised.  This  proved  to  be  a 
great  boon,  and  the  population  increased  rapidly 
thereafter.  Many  internal  troubles — conflicts  be- 
tween slaves  and  their  masters,  and  among  the 


Indians 
Exterminated 


None  but 
Catholics 
Admitted 


176      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

Spaniards   themselves    concerning   the   form   of 

government — continued  through  a  long  period  of 

years. 

Density  of  The  population  of  Porto  Rico  when  the  last 

Population  census    was   taken    (lg99)    was   953243.     The 

census  of  1910  will  doubtless  show  a  large  in- 
crease. The  density  of  the  population  of  the 
island  will  appear  by  the  following  comparison, 
showing  the  number  of  persons  per  square  mile, 
in  each  case :  Iowa,  40 ;  Illinois,  86 ;  Ohio,  102 ; 
Pennsylvania,  140;  and  for  the  United  States  as 
a  whole,  28;  while  for  Porto  Rico  there  are  277 
persons  per  square  mile. 

More  than  three-fifths  of  the  present  inhabi- 
tants are  classified  as  whites.  From  the  very 
beginning  of  the  Spanish  colonization  there  has 
been  a  mixture  of  races,  first  with  the  Indians 
and  later  with  the  negroes,  the  result  being  that  a 
large  per  cent,  of  those  included  in  the  class  re- 
ported as  whites,  is  an  amalgamation  of  white. 
Indian,  and  black  blood. 

Porto  Rico  Becomes  on  American  Possession. 
The  birth  of  a  new  era  dawned  unexpectedly 
upon  Porto  Rico,  July  25,  1898,  when  the  United 
States  army  entered  the  island  at  the  town  of 
Guanica.  Without  knowing  it,  the  American 
nation  was  fulfilling  the  prophecy  of  Isaiah, 
"Nations  that  knew  not  thee  shall  run  unto  thee 
because  of  the  Lord  thy  God.  ...  for  he  hath 
glorified  thee." 


A   Country   Public   School.  Poor  Native's   Home. 


Military  Road.   Porto  Rii 


(  Ioffee  Plantation. 


Hauling  Sugar  Cane 


A  Sugar  Mill,   Porto  Iln 


Governed 


Porto  Rico  177 

After  four  hundred  years  of  control,  the  Span- 
ish officials  withdrew  from  Porto  Rico,  October 
18,  1898;  and  at  the  close  of  eighteen  months  of 
military  rule,  on  May  1,  1900,  the  people  were 
given  a  civil  government  by  the  United  States, 
and  the  right  to  vote  for  their  own  representa- 
tives. 

The  Legislative  Assembly,  which  makes  the  How 
laws  for  the  island,  consists  of  two  houses — the 
Executive  Council  and  the  House  of  Delegates. 
The  Executive  Council  is  composed  of  eleven 
members,  six  of  whom  are  heads  of  the  various 
departments  of  the  government  of  the  island,  and 
five  others,  all  of  whom,  together  with  the  Gov- 
ernor of  the  island,  are  appointed  by  the  Presi- 
dent of  the  United  States,  subject  to  the  approval 
of  the  Senate.  At  least  five  of  the  members  of 
this  Council  must  be  native  citizens  of  Porto 
Rico. 

The  House  of  Delegates  consists  of  thirty-five 
members,  elected  by  the  popular  vote  of  the  peo- 
ple for  a  period  of  two  years. 

Unfortunately,  up  to  the  present  time  the  Not  American 
status  of  the  Porto  Rican  in  relation  to  the  Citizens 
United  States  Government  has  never  been  estab- 
lished. He  is  neither  a  citizen  nor  a  foreigner. 
Only  by  a  special  act  of  the  United  States  Con- 
gress can  the  Porto  Ricans  become  American 
citizens.  A  bill  to  grant  this  privilege  has  been 
pending  for  some  time,  but  as  yet  no  action  has 


178      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


An  Undeveloped 
Land 


Why  So 
Many  Idle 


Americans 

Build 

New  Roads 


been  taken.  For  this,  and  other  reasons,  there 
has  been  of  late  much  discontent  and  bitterness 
in  Porto  Rico,  and  a  growing  desire  for  more 
liberty  in  their  political  affairs. 

When  Porto  Rico  became  an  American  pos- 
session, its  land  was  largely  undeveloped,  and 
the  majority  of  its  people  were  unemployed.  The 
island  has  an  area  of  2,198,400  acres,  and  almost 
all  of  it  is  capable  of  cultivation ;  yet  in  1899 
the  total  area  under  cultivation  aggregated 
only  478,026  acres.  This  is  all  the  more  remark- 
able when  it  is  known  that  636,878  persons,  or 
more  than  one-half  of  the  entire  population,  were 
without  remunerative  occupation  at  that  time, 
according  to  the  census  report. 

Various  reasons  are  given  for  this  undeveloped 
condition  of  the  island  and  for  the  large  number 
of  unemployed,  the  chief  being  that  much  of  the 
land  was  owned  by  persons  who  lived  in  Spain  ; 
that  the  whole  of  the  interior  has  been  practically 
without  passable  roads  for  transportation,  and 
that  the  great  majority  of  the  people  have  been 
too  poor  to  get  a  start  at  independent  farming. 

The  American  Government  early  in  its  admin- 
istration mapped  out  a  large  number  of  new 
roads,  and  during  the  last  eight  years  three  hun- 
dred and  twenty-seven  miles  of  macadam  road- 
ways have  been  built  at  an  average  cost  of  $10,000 
a  mile.  Spain  during  her  four  hundred  years  of 
control   had   constructed  onlv   one   hundred   and 


Porto  Rico  179 

seventy-one  miles  of  such  roads.  These  high- 
ways are  of  immense  advantage  in  bringing 
into  the  interior  the  material  for  the  construction 
of.  houses  and  factories ;  likewise  in  aiding  the 
coffee  and  other  growers  to  get  their  products 
to  market.  To  transport  coffee  from  some  of  the 
interior  districts  over  the  bad  roads  to  the  coast 
costs  more,  it  is  said,  than  to  ship  the  same  from 
Porto  Rico  to  New  York  City. 

Twice  as  many  miles  of  railroad  are  now  in 
operation  as  were  found  in  1898,  and  the  effi- 
ciency of  the  system  has  been  greatly  increased. 
But  all  of  this,  owing  to  the  extremely  moun- 
tainous condition  of  the  interior  of  the  island,  is 
but  a  beginning  of  what  must  yet  be  done  before 
the  whole  of  Porto  Rico  is  opened  up  for  the 
cultivation  of  its  soil  and  the  development  of  its 
industries. 

In  September,  1902,  an  Agricultural  Experi-  scientific 
ment  Station  was  established  at  Mayagiiez  by  the  Cultivation  of 
United  States  Government.  The  object  of  this 
station  is  to  ascertain  what  products  can  be  culti- 
vated with  profit  in  Porto  Rico,  and  how  this 
can  best  be  done.  Two  hundred  and  thirty-five 
acres  of  fertile  soil  are  devoted  to  a  great  variety 
of  scientific  experiments,  with  a  view  to  increas- 
ing the  quantity  and  quality  of  the  products. 
Much  of  the  recent  progress  in  agriculture  is 
directly  traceable  to  the  work  of  this  station. 
Here  the  native  planters  are  shown,  free,  just 


Under  Adverse 
Circumstances 


180      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

how  they  may  enrich  their  soil  and  cultivate  the 
sugar-cane,    rice,    pineapple,    coffee,    and    other 
products  so  as  to  bring  a  complete  transformation 
to  their  island  agriculturally. 
Prospering  A  remarkable  change  is  taking  place.     During 

the  ten  years  prior  to  the  American  administra- 
tion in  Porto  Rico,  the  island's  imports  amounted 
to  $19,137,835  more  than  its  exports.  The  first 
eight  years  under  the  American  rule  it  exported 
$3,263,483  more  goods  than  it  imported.  This 
gain  has  come  to  the  island  notwithstanding  the 
fact  that  for  two  years  after  it  came  under  Amer- 
ican control  most  unfavorable  conditions  pre- 
vailed, resulting  from  the  abrupt  cutting  off  of 
the  European  markets  before  trade  with  the 
United  States  could  be  well  established,  and  the 
loss  sustained  by  the  great  hurricane  of  1899, 
when  thousands  of  persons  were  killed,  a  fifth  of 
the  inhabitants  rendered  homeless,  and  millions 
of  dollars  worth  of  property  destroyed.  But 
over  these  seeming  insuperable  difficulties,  the 
plucky  little  island  is  rising  rapidly. 
a  Market  for  ^n  recent  years  Porto  Rico  has   furnished  a 

American  splendid  market  to  the  United  States  for  its  flour, 

articles  of  clothing,  agricultural  implements,  and 
other  products.  In  1896  the  island  imported  from 
the  United  States  only  $2,555,534  worth  of 
goods,  but  for  the  twelve  months  ending  June, 
1908,  she  purchased  from  the  United  States 
$22,360,366  worth  of  our  products,  or  nearly  one- 


Porto  Rico  181 

third   of   the   entire   amount   purchased   by   the 
whole  continent  of  South  America. 

The  increase  of  the  sugar-cane  crop  has  been  sugar 
most  remarkable.  In  1895  only  $2,000,500  worth  Becomes 
of  that  product  was  exported  by  Porto  Rico,  but 
for  the  year  ending  June,  1908,  $18,690,149 
worth  were  sent  abroad ;  thus  this  industry  has 
grown  in  eight  years  to  the  place  of  first  impor- 
tance in  the  island.  Large  sugar  factories  cost- 
ing millions  of  dollars,  with  the  latest  improved 
machinery,  are  now  in  operation.  The  factory 
at  Guanica,  when  running  full,  turns  out  every 
twenty-four  hours,  four  hundred  tons  of  sugar. 

The  coffee-planter,  however,  has  not  shared  in 
the  general  prosperity  of  the  island.  The  cyclone  Reasons  for 
of  1899  destroyed  at  least  half  of  the  coffee  the  Decline 
bushes,  and  it  usually  takes  five  years  for  a  coffee 
tree  to  begin  to  bear.  Another  drawback  has 
been  that  Spain  and  other  European  countries 
imposed  a  large  duty  upon  coffee  from  Porto 
Rico  after  the  American  occupation,  and  the 
coffee-growers  of  the  island  have  been  compelled 
to  bring  their  product  into  competition  in  the 
United  States  with  great  quantities  of  low-grade 
coffee  from  Brazil.  All  this  resulted  in  reducing 
the  coffee  output  of  the  island  more  than  one- 
half,  and  thousands  of  persons  were  thrown  out 
of  employment,  and  the  wages  paid  to  many 
others  reduced  to  the  starvation  point.  This  is 
all  the  more  regrettable  because  of  the  fact  that 


182      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

coffee  had  the  largest  acreage  of  any  product  on 
the  island,  and  this  industry  furnished  labor  in 
the  cool,  refreshing  mountain  atmosphere  for  a 
large  number  of  persons  who  need  regular  em- 
ployment. 

Many  who  were  formerly  employed  in  the 
coffee  industry  have  turned  their  attention  to  the 
cultivation  of  tobacco  in  mountain  districts  adja- 
cent to  the  coffee  plantations.  By  growing  the 
tobacco-plant  under  cheese-cloth  a  superior  qual- 
ity is  being  produced, 
cultivation  of  The  systematic  cultivation  of  oranges,  grape- 

Citrus  Fruits  fruits,  and  lemons  has  recently  been  undertaken. 

About  nine  thousand  acres  have  been  planted, 
seventy  per  cent,  of  which  is  in  oranges.  In  all 
probability  there  will  soon  be  a  great  increase  in 
the  acreage  of  these  citrus  fruits,  because  of  the 
cheapness  of  land  and  the  low  price  of  labor,  and 
the  fact  that  the  freight  on  a  box  of  oranges 
from  Porto  Rico  to  New  York  is  but  twenty- 
eight  cents,  while  the  rate  on  a  similar  box  from 
California  to  New  York  is  ninety-eight  cents, 
and  from  Florida  seventy-two  cents.  Pineapples 
have  been  planted  by  orange  growers  to  secure 
some  income  while  waiting  for  their  groves  to 
become  fruitful. 

Educational  and  Religious  Conditions. 

The  United  States  Government  recognized  that 
education  was  an  essential  factor  in  the  develop- 


Porto  Rico 


183 


ment  of  Porto  Rico.  The  few  schools  in  opera- 
tion under  the  Spanish  administration  were  of 
very  inferior  grade.  The  teachers  were  far  be- 
hind the  times,  and  scarcely  a  school-building 
could  be  found  on  the  island.  In  the  vast  rural 
district,  comprising  over  700,000  of  the  popula- 
tion, only  fourteen  so-called  schools,  with  an 
enrollment  of  possibly  two  hundred  and  fifty 
pupils,  were  in  operation,  and  these  for  boys 
only.  In  the  towns  it  is  claimed  there  were  over 
four  hundred  schools  of  one  grade  or  another ; 
but  the  census  of  1899  revealed  the  fact  that  only 
117,  260  persons,  or  less  than  one  in  eight  of  the 
entire  population,  could  read  and  write.  The 
percentage  of  illiterates  in  Porto  Rico  was 
greater  than  in  any  other  West-Indian  island. 

American  Schools  Introduced. 

In  all  the  larger  towns  of  the  island,  commo- 
dious public-school  buildings  have  been  erected 
since  the  arrival  of  the  Americans.  High  schools 
have  been  established  in  San  Juan,  Ponce,  and 
Mayaguez ;  also,  an  agricultural  college  and 
three  industrial  schools  have  been  in  operation. 
In  1899,  when  the  American  schools  were 
opened,  English  was  taught  but  one  period  in 
the  day.  At  the  present  time,  in  all  the  higher 
grades  of  the  town  schools,  English  is  taught 
every  period  but  one.  A  normal  school,  located 
at  Rio  Piedras,  for  the  education  and  training  of 


Great 

Illiteracy 


Progress  in 
Education 


184      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Many  Without 

School 

Privileges 


public-school  teachers,  so  much  needed,  is  now 
in  operation. 

A  good  beginning  has  been  made  for  the  edu- 
cation of  the  children  of  Porto  Rico,  but  the 
problems  yet  to  be  solved  are  many  and  great. 
There  are  312,000  children  between  the  ages  of 
six  and  eighteen  on  the  island.  During  the  year 
ending  June,  1908,  about  1,250  day  schools,  75 
night  schools,  and  250  private  schools  were  in 
operation,  with  a  total  enrollment  of  80.000 
pupils,  the  average  attendance  being  about 
62,000.  One  hundred  and  seventy-one  American 
teachers  were  employed  during  1907  in  the  pub- 
lic schools  of  Porto  Rico. 


2Z2.00Q 


80,000 
Boys  ^o 

v  BtRLS  \ChUdren  of  Schsal  Ape 

iff    )Without  School '  Privileges } 
\Scmool 


School  Facilities  of  Porto  Rica  I3D& 


Missionaries 
Help  to 
Educate 


A  great  pressing  need  is  for  rural  school- 
buildings  and  an  adequate  supply  of  teachers  for 
such  schools.  In  many  instances  the  mission- 
aries have  done  pioneer  work  by  erecting  chapels 


Porto  Rico  185 

in  rural  places,  in  which  day  schools  are  taught 
free.  As  the  American  school  system  grew  and 
the  authorities  were  able  to  supply  a  teacher  of 
their  own,  such  day  schools  have  usually  been 
turned  over  to  the  public-school  authorities,  and 
thus  the  missionaries  have  been  working  in  sym- 
pathetic cooperation  with  those  in  control  of  the 
public  schools  of  the  island. 

The  Signal  Failure  of  the  Roman  Catholic 
Church. 

For  four  hundred  years  the  Roman  Catholic 
Church  had  a  religious  monopoly  on  Porto  Rico. 
Its  temples  were  built  and  kept  in  repair,  and  its 
clergy  supported  by  the  state.  If  ever  a  church 
had  an  opportunity  to  show  what  it  can  do,  that 
church  was  the  Roman  Catholic  in  Porto  Rico. 
It  follows,  therefore,  that  this  church  must  be 
held  responsible  for  the  religious  condition  of  the 
people.  Its  signal  failure  as  a  spiritual,  moral, 
and  educational  force  is  abundant  justification 
for  the  entrance  of  Protestant  missions. 

The  Catholic  Church  claims  the  right  to  edu-  ignorance 
cate  her  children,  yet  when  the  Americans  took  Encouraged 
possession  of  the  island  eighty-fire  out  of  every 
one  hundred  of  the  population  above  the  age  of 
five  could  not  read  and  zvrite.  The  utter  failure 
of  the  church  and  state  to  make  an  effort  to  teach 
the  great  rural  population,  which  has  been  for 
years  and   years  practically  without  church  or 


186      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Immorality 
Revealed  by 
Census 


The  Sabbath 
Desecrated 


Barriers  to 
Spiritual  Life 


school  privileges,  is  without  justification,  and  is 
strong  evidence  of  serious,  if  not  criminal  neg- 
lect. 

The  recent  census  revealed  another  startling 
fact;  namely,  that  fully  one-third  of  the  people 
living  as  husband  and  wife  acknowledged  that 
they  zvere  not  married,  and  148,605  illegitimate 
children  zvere  reported.  One  naturally  asks, 
What  was  the  church  doing  all  these  years  that 
it  failed  to  create  a  moral  atmosphere  in  which 
the  sanctity  of  the  home  might  be  recognized  and 
maintained  ? 

The  Sabbath  day  was  desecrated,  it  being  the 
chief  market  and  business  day  of  the  week,  and  a 
day  for  gambling,  cock-fighting,  and  the  like. 
Indolence  was  encouraged  by  teaching  the  people 
to  observe  forty  holidays  annually,  connected 
with  which  were  many  superstitious  ideas. 

The  Catholic  Church  of  Porto  Rico  is  very 
different  from  the  church  of  the  same  name  in 
the  United  States,  which,  though  far  from  being 
a  true  spiritual  guide,  has  been  enlightened  by 
one  hundred  years  of  contact  with  aggressive, 
spiritual  Protestantism.  One  must  visit  Latin 
countries  to  appreciate  this  contrast. 

The  priests  in  Porto  Rico  put  insuperable  bar- 
riers in  the  way  of  legal  matrimony  by  charging 
excessive  marriage  fees,  and  thus  encouraged 
illegitimacy.  The  immorality  of  the  priests  and 
the   ignorance   and    superstitious   doctrines    fos- 


Porto  Rico  187 

tered  by  the  church  combined  to  make  it  practi- 
cally impossible  for  the  small  percentage  of  the 
people  who  came  in  contact  with  the  Catholic 
Church  to  be  able  to  grasp  the  spiritual  signifi- 
cance of  the  religion  of  Jesus  Christ.  As  a  result, 
great  numbers  of  the  men  have  drifted  into  utter 
indifference  and  unbelief  concerning  all  spiritual 
realities,  and  this  is  one  of  the  chief  perils  in 
Porto  Rico  at  the  present  time. 

V      Protestant  Missionaries  Enter  the  Island. 

As  soon  as  the  American  flag  waved  over  The  challenge 
Porto  Rico,  on  October  18,  1898,  the  awful  spir- 
itual and  intellectual  poverty  of  eighty-five  per 
cent,  of  its  people  brought  a  challenge  to  the 
Protestant  churches  of  the  United  States.  The 
island  was  at  once  recognized  as  one  of  the  most 
needy  mission  fields  of  the  world.  The  last  com- 
mand of  our  Lord,  together  with  patriotic 
motives,  stirred  the  hearts  of  American  Chris- 
tians to  give  their  newly-recognized  brothers  on 
this  island  the  priceless  privileges  of  Bible  Chris- 
tianity, the  foundation  of  our  cherished  liberties 
and  the  source  of  our  strength,  joy,  and  hope. 
A  strong  testimony  to  the  life  and  loyalty  of  the 
various  Protestant  denominations  is  found  in 
their  prompt  action  in  sending  missionaries  to 
Porto  Rico. 

An  early  agreement  was  entered  into  to  pre- 
vent   duplication    and    overlapping    of    religious 


188      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Districting 
for  Effective 
Work 


work.  The  Presbyterians  were  held  responsible 
for  the  section  along  the  western  coast  of  the 
island,  the  Methodists  for  the  north-central  sec- 
tion, the  United  Brethren  in  Christ  for  the  section 
in  the  southwestern  part  of  the  island,  and  the 
Baptists  chiefly  along  the  military  road,  while 
the  Congregationalists,  Christian,  and  other  so- 
cieties were  given  the  eastern  and  southeastern 
parts  extending  to  the  center  of  the  island. 

It  was  decided  that  the  two  chief  cities.  San 
Juan  and  Ponce,  should  be  open  to  all  denom- 
inations who  desired  to  enter  for  religious  work ; 
but  for  other  towns  and  barrios  it  was  under- 
stood that  when  any  evangelical  denomination 
entered  and  maintained  regular  preaching  serv- 
ices the  other  denominations  should  not  intrude, 
unless  by  special  agreement.  This  plan  has 
proven  to  be  a  great  advantage  in  the  develop- 
ment of  the  mission  work  of  the  island. 

The  Work  of  the  United  Brethren  Church 
in  the  Uplifting  of  Porto  Rico. 

The  United  Brethren  Church,  through  its  For- 
eign Missionary  Society,  was  among  the  first  to 
respond  to  the  great  need  for  gospel  work  in 
Porto  Rico.  William  M.  Bell,  D.D.,  then  Secre- 
tary of  the  Missionary  Society,  made  a  journey 
to  the  island  in  February,  1899,  within  four 
months  after  it  became  an  American  possession, 
to  locate  personally  our  mission.     He  found  the 


to    Evangelize 


First 


190      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

country  divided  into  seven  departments,  and  the 
departments  were  subdivided  into  several  districts 
(or  counties),  and  these  in  turn  into  barrios  (or 
townships). 

Our  Field  The    field    chosen    for    the    United    Brethren 

Church  to  cultivate  lies  in  the  Ponce  department 
of  the  island,  and  includes  five  municipal  dis- 
tricts ;  namely,  Juana  Diaz,  Ponce,  Penuelas, 
Guayanilla,  and  Yauco. 

Rev.  and  Mrs.  Nathan  H.  Huffman,  graduates 

Missionaries  0f   Lane  University,   who   completed   their  the- 

ological course  in  Union  Biblical  Seminary  in 
May,  1899,  were  appointed  our  first  missionaries 
to  Porto  Rico.  They  arrived  on  the  island  July 
28,  1899,  and  opened  mission  work  in  Ponce,  a 
city  of  30,000  inhabitants,  situated  near  the  coast 
on  the  south  side  of  the  island.  A  new  situation 
confronted  the  Huffmans.  A  strange  language 
(the  Spanish)  was  spoken  on  all  sides.  This, 
coupled  with  many  conditions  wholly  un-Amer- 
ican, intensified  the  isolation  and  loneliness.  To 
add  to  the  trial  and  test  of  those  first  months, 
articles  of  first  importance  in  setting  up  house- 
keeping in  a  new  country,  which  had  been 
shipped  by  freight,  were  not  to  be  found  when 
the  ship's  cargo  was  put  ashore  at  Ponce.  For 
three  months  the  new  missionaries  had  to  live 
with  the  simplest  accommodations. 

The  great  number  of  children  in  poverty  and 
without    school   privileges    appealed    strongly   to 


Porto  Rico 


191 


the  missionaries.  A  day  school  was  opened  Sep- 
tember 12,  1899,  with  eight  pupils,  and  a  week 
later  night  classes  were  started  for  young  people 
who  desired  to  study  English. 

A  mission  Sunday  school  in  Spanish  was  soon 
organized  for  the  pupils  of  the  day  school  and 
others  who  came  together  on  the  Lord's  day.  In 
November  a  hall  was  rented  on  one  of  the  prin- 
cipal streets  of  the  city,  into  which  the  school 
was  moved,  and  in  which  English  services  also 
were  held  for  the  American  soldiers  and  other 
English-speaking  persons. 

In  the  meantime  the  missionaries  were  apply- 
ing themselves  to  a  close  study  of  the  Spanish 
language,  with  a  view  to  its  complete  mastery, 
in  order  that  they  might  preach  the  gospel  to  the 
Porto  Ricans  in  their  own  language.  Rapid 
progress  was  made  in  language  study,  and  at  the 
end  of  ten  months  Mr.  Huffman  conducted  his 
first  Spanish  preaching  service.  Thus  within 
less  than  a  year  after  the  arrival  of  our  first  mis- 
sionaries, the  mission  was  opened  with  a  day 
school,  night  classes,  a  Sunday  school,  and 
preaching  services  in  English  and  Spanish. 

The  first  family  to  reinforce  the  Huff  mans  was 
that  of  Rev.  and  Mrs.  E.  L.  Ortt,  sent  out  by  the 
Sunday  School  Board  in  February,  1900.  These 
workers  labored  faithfully  in  the  day  school,  and 
in  the  English  work  until  1901,  when,  on  account 
of  ill  health,  thev  returned  to  the  States.    Dr.  C. 


The  First 

Sunday 

School 


Preaching 
in  Spanish 


Increasing  the 

Missionary 

Force 


192      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

W.  Clymer  served  as  a  medical  missionary  for  a 
brief  period. 

In  August,  1901,  Rev.  and  Mrs.  Philo  W. 
Drury,  graduates  of  Leander  Clark  College,  and 
Mr.  Drury  having  also  graduated  from  Union 
Biblical  Seminary,  arrived  on  the  field.  Mr.  and 
Mrs.  Huffman  and  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Drury  laid 
broad  and  deep  the  foundations  of  the  work 
without  the  help  of  additional  missionaries  from 
America  until  June  and  July  of  1907,  when  Rev. 
and  Mrs.  I.  E.  Caldwell,  graduates  of  York  Col- 
lege, and  Miss  Elizabeth  Reed,  a  graduate  of  the 
Shippensburg  (Pa.)  State  Normal  School,  were 
added  to  the  missionary  staff.  In  September, 
1908,  Rev.  Charles  I.  Mohler  and  wife,  who  also 
are  graduates  of  York  College,  arrived  on  the 
island,  thus  strengthening  the  missionary  force. 

The  Work  Enlarges. 

The  First  The  first  church  organization  was  effected  in 

Church  Ponce  in  May,  1900.  with  ten  members.    A  suit- 

Organized  y 

able  lot  for  a  new  church-buildmg  was  secured 
the  same  month.  During  1901,  new  work  was 
opened  at  Sabanetas,  a  suburb  of  Ponce,  and  at 
Juana  Diaz,  a  town  of  2,700  inhabitants,  situated 
eight  miles  northeast  of  Ponce,  on  the  Military 
Road.  This  town  is  the  center  of  a  district  of 
28,000  inhabitants,  where  no  other  Protestant  de- 
nomination is  working.  Here  our  Church  has 
done  most  effective  work. 


A   Circuit  Ride 


U.  P>.  Chapel,  La  I'laya,  Guaya- 
nilla. 


United  Bbethren  Sunday  School,  Ponce. 


Preaching  in  the  Mahket-Placb,  Yauco. 


On;   I'okto  Uii'an   Pastors. 


Porto  Rico 


193 


Our  first  church-building,  a  large  edifice  in 
Ponce,  was  completed  August,  1902,  and  was 
dedicated  on  November  2  of  the  same  year  by 
Bishop  J.  S.  Mills,  D.D.,  and  Secretary  W.  M. 
Bell,  D.D.  The  erection  of  this  church  gave  a 
decided  impetus  to  the  work. 

To  develop  properly  the  district  of  Juana  Diaz, 
Rev.  Philo  W.  Drury  and  family  located  in  the 
town  of  that  name  in  September,  1902,  and 
assumed  the  direction  of  the  work.  The  organ- 
ization of  the  church  in  Juana  Diaz  took  place 
July  19,  1903,  when  nineteen  members  were  re- 
ceived into  church-fellowship.  From  the  begin- 
ning there  was  a  steady  and  healthy  growth. 
The  evangelistic  spirit  prevailed  at  all  the  serv- 
ices, and  some  remarkable  conversions  took 
place.  Many  persons  who  had  been  addicted  to 
drunkenness  and  other  forms  of  vice  were  re- 
deemed by  the  power  of  God,  and  are  now  living 
lives  of  purity  and  helpfulness  for  others. 

The  work  had  to  be  carried  on  without  the 
advantage  of  a  church-building  until  November 
9,  1905,  when  a  commodious  church-house  was 
dedicated.  The  annual  conference  of  the  mission 
was  held  in  Juana  Diaz,  January  12  to  15,  1906, 
at  which  time  two  of  the  native  pastors,  Julio  D. 
Ramu  and  Jose  Santana,  were  ordained  by 
Bishop  Mills,  who  presided  at  the  conference. 
These  were  the  first  ordained  native  ministers  of 
anv  Protestant  denomination  on  the  island. 


New   Church 
Dedicated 


The  Drury s 
Take  Charge  of 
Juana   Diaz 


First  Native 

Pastors 

Ordained 


194      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Coto  Laurel 
a    Flourishing 
Church 


The  Gospel 
Carried  to 
Mountain 
Districts 


From  Juana  Diaz  as  a  center,  the  gospel  was 
sounded  forth  throughout  that  whole  region.  As 
early  as  October,  1902,  Mr.  Drury  began  preach- 
ing the  gospel  in  the  barrio  of  Coto  Laurel,  a 
settlement  midway  between  Ponce  and  Juana 
Diaz.  The  interest  grew  so  rapidly  that  the 
attendance  soon  filled  the  rented  hall  to  overflow- 
ing. A  new  church  was  organized  August  14, 
1903,  with  twenty-six  members.  The  work  in- 
creased and  a  new  frame  church-building  was 
erected  at  a  cost  of  $800,  and  dedicated  Decem- 
ber 18,  1903. 

Coto  Laurel  also  became  a  center  for  the  prop- 
agation of  the  gospel.  Two  preaching-places, 
that  afterwards  became  organized  churches,  were 
established ;  namely,  Collores,  a  settlement  six 
miles  northeast  in  the  midst  of  the  mountains, 
and  Cerrillos,  two  and  one-half  miles  northwest 
of  Coto  Laurel. 

The  message  of  salvation  was  carried  from 
Juana  Diaz  into  Guayabal,  the  Caves,  Villalba, 
and  Limon,  mountain  barrios  situated  to  the 
north,  and  containing  a  thickly-settled  population 
of  unevangelized  people.  Great  obstacles  have 
been  encountered  in  establishing  the  churches  in 
these  places,  but  a  good  beginning  has  been  made 
and  sure  foundations  laid. 

At  the  Caves  a  rural  chapel  was  erected  in 
1906  with  the  missionary  offerings  of  the  native 
churches,  and  a  day  school  was  maintained,  the 


Porto  Rico 


195 


teacher  being  supported  by  the  church  at  Juana 
Diaz  until  the  public  school  authorities  promised 
to  provide  a  teacher  of  their  own. 

Villalba  is  a  settlement  on  a  very  important 
new  road  now  being  built  over  the  mountains  to 
connect  with  the  railroad  that  runs  along  the 
northern  coast.  It  is  the  center  of  a  vast  coffee 
region,  and  the  new  road  will  open  up  this  coun- 
try in  a  way  that  will  greatly  increase  the  popu- 
lation and  value  of  the  property.  It  is  a  very 
important  though  difficult  field  to  work.  A  new 
church-building  is  most  urgently  needed  at  this 
point,  where  we  have  a  membership  of  forty.  In 
this  whole  district,  agriculturally  as  well  as  reli- 
giously, "much  land  remaineth  to  be  possessed." 

While  Mr.  Drury  was  busy  starting  and  devel- 
oping the  Sunday  schools  and  churches  in  the 
Juana  Diaz  district,  Mr.  Huffman,  the  superin- 
tendent of  the  mission,  was  doing  successful 
intensive  work  in  the  church  at  Ponce,  establish- 
ing what  is  regarded  as  one  of  the  model  Protes- 
tant congregations  of  the  island.  His  efforts 
were  not  limited,  however,  to  the  work  in  Ponce. 
In  1902  a  mission  was  opened  in  the  center  of 
two  additional  districts ;  namely,  Guayanilla,  a 
town  situated  on  the  railroad  eighteen  miles  west 
of  Ponce,  and  the  center  of  a  district  which  has  a 
population  of  10,000,  and  in  Pefiuelas,  twelve 
miles  northwest  from  Ponce,  and  the  center  of  a 
district  of  12,500. 


Villalba  an 
Important 
Center 


Ponce  e 

Model 

Church 


Guayanilla 


Penuelas 


196      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Tallaboa 


Mr.  Huffman 
Opens  Yauco 


Mr.   Drury 
Superintendent 


In  1904,  work  was  opened  in  Tallaboa,  a  settle- 
ment on  the  railroad  ten  miles  west  of  Ponce, 
and  an  excellent  chapel  was  erected  with  the 
anniversary  offerings  of  the  Young  People's  so- 
cieties of  the  Church  in  the  United  States.  This 
congregation  has  given  to  the  Porto  Rican  mis- 
sion a  number  of  faithful  native  pastors. 

New  Adjustments  for  Greater  Work. 

In  the  spring  of  1907,  with  new  workers  and 
more  money  for  equipment  in  sight,  Rev.  Mr. 
Huffman,  the  superintendent,  recommended  that 
we  extend  our  missionary  operations  to  another 
district,  that  of  Yauco,  situated  twenty-five  miles 
west  of  Ponce,  and  containing  27,000  persons. 
Only  a  little  gospel  work  had  been  done  for  that 
district.  Outside  of  the  city  of  Yauco,  the  center 
of  the  municipality,  there  were  fifteen  barrios, 
each  with  a  population  of  from  800  to  1,400  per- 
sons, without  any  gospel  privileges  whatsoever. 

Mr.  Huffman,  who  speaks  the  Spanish  lan- 
guage with  a  high  degree  of  accuracy  and 
fluency,  and  who  had  long  desired  to  preach 
Christ  in  this  new  territory,  requested  the  Board 
to  grant  him  the  privilege  of  doing  pioneer  work 
in  the  Yauco  district.  After  careful  investiga- 
tion the  plan  was  approved  and  Rev.  Mr.  Drury, 
who  had  already  demonstrated  his  ability,  was 
made  superintendent  of  the  mission  and  located 
at  Ponce. 


Porto  Rico 


197 


Rev.  and  Mrs.  I.  E.  Caldwell  were  placed  in 
charge  of  the  large  Juana  Diaz  district,  where 
they  have  made  excellent  progress  in  language 
study,  and  have  directed  in  evangelistic  and  mis- 
sionary extension  work  with  marked  efficiency. 
Miss  Elizabeth  Reed,  whose  experience  as  a 
public-school  teacher  in  the  island  had  prepared 
her  for  effective  mission  work,  was  appointed  to 
assist  in  the  large  work  at  Ponce.  Under  this 
new  arrangement  a  vigorous  advance  has  been 
made  along  all  lines. 

A  new  church  was  built  at  Guayanilla  and 
dedicated  February  4,  1908.  The  church-build- 
ing at  Ponce  was  repaired  and  remodeled  so  as 
to  make  it  a  convenient  edifice  for  its  growing 
Sunday  school  and  church-membership. 

A  church  was  organized  with  thirty  members, 
and  a  new  chapel  dedicated,  August  27,  1908,  at 
the  Playa  (port)  of  Guayanilla.  About  half  of 
the  money  for  the  erection  of  this  chapel  was 
contributed  by  the  native  churches  during  1907. 

The  latest  large  advance  was  the  appointment 
of  Rev.  and  Mrs.  Charles  I.  Mohler  as  mission- 
aries to  have  charge  of  the  Pefiuelas  district. 
They  will  reside  in  the  town  of  Pefiuelas.  A 
modern  church-edifice  is  being  erected  in  that 
important  place,  the  corner-stone  of  which  was 
laid  August  25,  1908.  From  this  as  a  center,  the 
numerous  outlying  districts  will  ere  long  receive 
the  gospel. 


The  Caldwells 
at  Juana  Diaz 


Miss  Reed 
at  Ponce 


A   Vigorous 
Advance 


The  Mohlers 
at  Penuelas 


198      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Gospel 
Victorious 
in  Yauco 


In  the  city  of  Yauco,  August  16,  1908.  just 
one  year  after  the  opening  of  mission  work  in 
that  district,  the  first  church  was  organized  with 
twenty-three  members.  It  has  a  Sunday  school 
of  sixty-five,  and  there  are  many  who  are  receiv- 
ing instruction  preparatory  to  church-member- 
ship. Three  regular  preaching-places  have  been 
opened  in  adjacent  country  districts,  at  each  of 
which  a  hall  has  been  rented  and  one  or  more 
services  are  held  weekly. 

Rev.  Mr.  Huffman,  who  has  charge  of  this 
work,  writes :  "This  year  has  been  in  many 
respects  the  best  of  my  life.  I  have  been  able, 
with  fewer  interruptions,  to  dedicate  myself  to 
the  most  precious  work  in  the  world — the  pre- 
sentation of  Jesus  Christ  as  the  only  and  suffi- 
cient Savior  of  men." 

A  careful  study  is  being  made  of  the  entire 
territory  for  which  our  Church  is  responsible, 
and  preaching-places  are  being  established,  as 
rapidly  as  the  funds  will  allow,  in  centers  which 
will  bring  the  message  of  salvation  not  only  to 
those  who  live  in  the  towns,  but  to  those  in  the 
long-neglected  rural  districts  as  well.  The  task 
is  a  very  great  one,  but  God  is  giving  victory, 
and  encouraging  progress  has  already  been  made. 

Instructing  and  Training  the  Native  Church. 

Day-school  work  has  been  carried  on  in  a  lim- 
ited way,  as  teachers  and  funds  would  allow,  but 


Porto  Rico 


199 


only  in  places  where  no  American  school  was  in 
operation.  The  English  service  was  dropped 
after  a  brief  period,  as  the  number  of  English- 
speaking  people  did  not  justify  the  continuance 
of  such  a  service.  Since  the  year  1902,  all  de- 
partments of  the  work  have  been  carried  on  in 
the  Spanish  language. 

The  Bible  school  is  the  only  Sunday-morning 
service  in  Porto  Rico,  the  missionary  or  some 
competent  native  pastor  or  assistant  being  the 
superintendent.  The  whole  church  is  supposed 
to  be  in  the  Bible  school.  Notwithstanding  the 
fact  that  Porto  Rico  has  no  Sabbath  until  noon 
on  the  Lord's  day,  the  stores  being  wide  open 
and  it  being  the  chief  market-day  of  the  week, 
the  attendance  at  the  Bible  school  is  usually 
larger  than  the  church-membership.  The  school 
is  conducted  in  a  way  to  bring  the  word  of  God 
impressively  home  to  the  hearts  of  all  who 
attend. 

The  writer  was  privileged  to  be  in  the  Bible 
school  at  Ponce  on  February  2,  1908,  when  the 
lesson  taught  was  the  third  chapter  of  the  Gospel 
according  to  John.  Superintendent  Drury  re- 
viewed the  lesson  at  the  close  of  the  school  in  a 
winning,  impressive  way,  and  requested  that  all 
bow  their  heads  in  prayer.  Then  he  appealed  to 
those  present  who  had  heard  the  word,  and  asked 
who  would  respond  to  the  love  of  God  who  sent 
his  Son  "that  whosoever  believeth  in  him  should 


All  the 
Work  in 
Spanish 


The  Bible 
School   a 
Power 


Winning 
Souls  in  the 
Sunday 
School 


200      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


The   Whole 
Church   at 
Prayer- 
Meeting 


Y.  P.  S.    C.   E. 

Enthusiastic 


not  perish,  but  have  everlasting  life."  The  im- 
pressiveness  of  that  moment  I  shall  never  forget. 
Without  being  unduly  urged,  eleven  persons 
quietly  arose  and  made  the  great  choice  of  Christ 
as  their  Savior.  The  meeting  closed  with  a 
prayer  service,  and  the  names  of  those  who  made 
the  choice  were  secured  and  enrolled  in  a  class 
for  prayer  and  further  instruction. 

What  impresses  one  most  in  Porto  Rico  is  the 
large  attendance  and  power  of  the  mid-week 
meetings.  At  the  prayer-meeting  eighty  per 
cent,  of  the  entire  church-membership  may  fre- 
quently be  found.  Bible  study  and  earnest  pray- 
ing and  hearty  singing  are  made  strong  factors. 

The  Christian  Endeavor  meeting  also  is  usually 
held  on  some  week  evening,  and  practically  the 
entire  membership  of  the  church  is  present.  At 
this  meeting  emphasis  is  placed  on  witnessing  for 
Christ  in  public  testimony  and  training  for  per- 
sonal work  in  winning  others  and  in  public 
speaking  on  Christian  themes.  There  is  no  need 
of  exhorting  the  members  to  take  part.  Often 
two  are  on  tlie  floor  at  the  same  time,  ready  to 
speak,  and  the  meeting  goes  along  with  enthu- 
siasm to  the  close.  Members  of  the  Christian 
Endeavor  societies  make  evangelistic  tours  and 
distribute  tracts  and  invite  the  people  to  regular 
services. 

Meetings  are  frequently  held  in  the  homes  of 
the  members  and  others  who  are  in   sympathy 


Porto  Rico 


201 


with  the  gospel,  and  at  public  market-places. 
The  services  consist  of  singing,  praying,  and 
preaching.  The  houses  in  which  these  meetings 
are  held  are  generally  quite  small,  often  consist- 
ing of  but  one  or  two  rooms,  not  more  than  eight 
or  ten  feet  square.  In  such  cases  the  speaker 
may  stand  in  the  door  and  thus  address  those 
who  are  in  the  house  as  well  as  those  who  may 
gather  in  the  street.  Such  meetings  furnish 
splendid  opportunity  for  announcing  the  regular 
services  in  the  church,  and  they  frequently  result 
in  the  conversion  of  those  who  were  formerly 
either  prejudiced  against  the  gospel  or  too  indif- 
ferent to  go  far  to  hear  it. 

Lady  missionary  visitors  and  the  wives  of  mis- 
sionaries have  a  fruitful  field  for  cultivation  in 
Porto  Rico.  Only  by  personal  visits  in  their 
homes  will  the  great  majority  of  the  women  be 
shown  the  way  of  salvation.  Some  idea  of  what 
a  lady  visitor  sees  and  does  may  be  obtained  from 
the  following  description  of  a  recent  visit  in  one 
of  the  poorer  homes : 

"I  entered  the  house  and  found  it  had  but  one 
room  with  a  canvas  partition  running  half  way 
across  it.  The  furniture  consists  of  one  cot,  one 
home-made  chair,  one  small  trunk,  and  a  canvas 
hammock  that  looks  as  though  it  had  been  in  the 
family  for  generations,  but  has  yet  the  first  time 
to  see  water.  The  cooking  is  done  on  a  charcoal 
brazier  out  back  of  the  house.  No  table  is  needed 


Cottage 
Meetings 


The  Work  of 
Lady  Visitors 


A  Visit  to  a 
Home 


202      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

from  which  to  eat.  The  food  is  dished  from  the 
kettle  to  the  plates,  which  are  passed  around,  and 
if  the  plates  are  not  numerous  enough  the  rest  of 
the  family  gather  about  the  kettle  to  eat. 

"In  this  little  house  live  an  old  grandmother, 
her  two  daughters,  and  I  have  never  counted  the 
grandchildren.  As  I  entered,  the  grandmother 
greeted  me,  the  daughters  being  down  at  the 
river  washing.  I  was  urged  to  take  a  seat  in  the 
hammock.  I  much  preferred  the  chair,  but  as  the 
old  lady  insisted  on  the  hammock  I  accepted  it 
with  fear  and  trembling.  A  little  naked  baby  was 
crawling  over  the  equally  dirty  floor.  Several 
children  outside  left  their  play  and  came  to  see 
'La  Americana.'  We  read  a  portion  of  the  Word 
and  had  prayer,  and  by  that  time  quite  a  number 
of  women  had  gathered  about  the  door,  and  we 
entered  into  conversation  with  them  and  distrib- 
uted some  tracts,  and  gave  all  an  invitation  to 
attend  our  services  in  the  church." 

It  should  be  said  that  the  missionary  finds  the 
homes   of  the    upper   class   very   different   from 
that  just  described,  many  of  them  being  models 
of  convenience  and  cleanliness. 
Draw;ng  In  the  regular  weekly  services,  as  well  as  in  the 

the  Net  special  evangelistic  meetings,  opportunity  is  fre- 

quently given  for  making  public  profession  of 
faith.  Those  who  have  been  hearing  the  gospel 
are  invited  to  make  a  decision  and  manifest  the 
purpose  of  following  Christ.     After  praying  for 


Porto  Rico 


203 


such  persons  as  present  themselves,  their  name? 
are  taken  and  an  effort  is  made  to  get  acquainted 
with  them  as  soon  as  possible,  and  to  get  them  to 
attend  regularly  the  services. 

Those  who  profess  conversion  are  not  admitted 
at  once  into  church-membership.  Many  have  no 
idea  what  it  means  to  be  a  true  Christian.  They 
have  either  received  no  instruction  or  have  been 
misinstructed.  Their  first  need  is  instruction  as 
to  the  spiritual  significance  of  the  religion  of 
Jesus  Christ  and  its  practical  application  to  the 
daily  life,  and  this  must  be  accompanied  by  intel- 
ligent direction  as  to  how  a  Christian  can  serve 
our  risen  Lord  and  extend  his  kingdom.  This 
instruction,  which  constitutes  a  very  important 
part  of  the  missionary's  work,  is  given  them 
singly  or  in  classes,  as  the  case  may  be.  The 
disciplinary  questions  for  applicants  for  admis- 
sion into  the  Church  are  explained.  Bible  read- 
ings are  given,  based  upon  these  questions.  The 
candidates  are  thus  instructed  and  tested  in  prac- 
tical service  for  three  months,  six  months,  and 
sometimes  a  year,  until  the  missionary  is  con- 
vinced that  the  truth  has  taken  hold  of  the  heart 
and  life.  Under  this  process,  naturally,  those 
who  make  profession  of  faith  thoughtlessly  or 
for  unworthy  motives  either  drop  out  of  the  class 
after  a  short  time  or  are  brought  to  renew  their 
profession  with  a  more  intelligent  and  sincere 
purpose. 


Preparing 
Candidates 
for  Church- 
Membership 


204      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Progress 

Toward 

Self-Support 


A   Printing 
Outfit 


The  native  church  is  being  taught  the  prin- 
ciples of  Christian  stewardship,  and  is  being 
trained  in  honoring  the  Lord  with  a  weekly  offer- 
ing for  the  support  and  extension  of  the  gospel 
work  in  the  island.  Excellent  progress  has 
already  been  made,  considering  the  poverty  of 
the  people.  In  1903,  ninety  dollars  were  con- 
tributed for  such  purposes  by  native  Christians 
in  our  church,  and  in  1907  the  offerings  for  this 
work  amounted  to  $811.59.  As  has  been  stated, 
two  mission  chapels  have  already  been  erected. 
largely  with  money  contributed  by  native  church- 
members,  and  thus  the  spirit  of  self-support  and 
self-extension  is  having  a  healthy  development. 

Early  in  the  history  of  our  Porto  Rican  mis- 
sion the  importance  of  a  printing  outfit  was  rec- 
ognized, Mr.  Drury  being  a  practical  printer.  In 
1902  a  small  printing-press  was  purchased,  with 
which  all  of  the  mission  printing  was  done  for 
some  time.  Two  years  later  a  new  press  and 
additional  type  were  purchased  and  a  periodical 
called  "El  Testigo  Evangelico"  (The  Evangelical 
Witness)  was  published  in  January,  1905,  and 
since  then  it  has  been  issued  monthly.  In  the 
fall  of  1907  this  paper  was  doubled  in  size.  It 
now  contains  eight  pages,  and  has  a  larq^e  paid 
circulation.  The  subscription  price  is  within  the 
reach  of  all,  being  twenty-five  cents  annually. 

The  advantages  of  having  this  publication  are 
manifest,  especially  when  it  is  remembered  that 


Porto  Rico 


205 


we  have  no  denominational  literature  in  the 
Spanish.  The  paper  serves  to  unify  the  work, 
keeping  the  churches  in  close  touch  with  one 
another.  It  presents  an  opportunity  of  bringing 
before  the  members  of  the  church  special  mes- 
sages, and  there  is  also  the  training  that  accrues 
to  native  pastors  and  lay  members  who  contrib- 
ute to  its  columns. 

Thousands  of  religious  tracts  have  been  pub- 
lished and  widely  circulated.  "A  Manual  of  the 
United  Brethren  in  Christ,"  "The  Constitution 
and  By-laws  of  the  Christian  Endeavor  Society," 
"A  Book  of  Forms  for  United  Brethren  Minis- 
ters," and  a  small  booklet  containing  "Alternate 
Readings  from  the  Psalms,"  have  come  from  our 
presses.  At  the  present  time  the  work  of  trans- 
lating the  principal  parts  of  our  "Church  Disci- 
pline" is  well  under  way,  and  the  issuing  of  this 
important  work  will  soon  be  begun. 

Our  presses  in  Porto  Rico  make  about  one 
hundred  thousand  impressions  annually,  a  part 
of  this  work  being  for  other  denominations. 
Competent  native  men  have  been  in  charge  of  the 
printing.  This  has  relieved  the  missionaries 
greatly  and  at  the  same  time  developed  the  native 
workers. 

Our  missionaries  have  sought  to  foster  a 
healthy,  well-trained  native  church,  rather  than 
merely  to  win  large  numbers,  who,  without 
proper  training,  would  be  unfit  to  lay  the  founda- 


Advantages 
of  the 
Mission 
Paper 


Tracts  and 
Booklets 


Native 
Pastors  in 
Training 


206      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Mastering 
a  New 
Language 


tions  necessary  for  centuries  of  Christian  work. 
Special  emphasis  has  been  given  to  the  instruc- 
tion and  training  of  the  native  pastors.  These 
workers  are  pursuing  a  regular  course  of  study, 
and  they  meet  once  a  month  in  an  institute  with 
the  superintendent  of  the  mission  and  others,  to 
review  their  studies  and  to  discuss  the  practical 
problems  that  arise  from  time  to  time  in  their 
work.  The  native  worker,  when  assigned  to  a 
field  of  labor,  is  given  large  responsibility,  and 
the  missionary  seeks  to  honor  him  and  work 
through  him  for  the  uplifting  of  the  people  in 
his  parish. 

Obstacles  Encountered. 

Every  missionary  should  expect  to  encounter 
obstacles  both  from  within  and  without.  The 
prince  of  darkness  has  a  thousand  agencies  with 
which  to  oppose  and,  if  possible,  defeat  the  work 
of  Christ's  messengers.  To  begin  with,  each 
missionary  in  Porto  Rico  has  the  difficulty  of 
mastering  the  Spanish  language,  and  this  always 
takes  time  and  is  an  impediment  to  the  rapid 
progress  of  the  work.  Excellence  in  writing  and 
speaking  a  new  language  requires  much  hard 
work  and  patient,  persistent  practice.  One  of 
the  most  hopeful  features  connected  with  this 
mission  is  the  fact  that  our  missionaries  stand  in 
the  very  front  rank  in  their  ability  to  speak  and 
write  the  Spanish  language. 


Porto  Rico 


207 


In  addition  to  personal  difficulties  of  a  social 
and  mental  character  arising  from  isolation  and 
adverse  surroundings,  all  missionaries  in  tropical 
countries  find  the  climate  to  be  a  serious  obstacle. 
In  the  lowlands  of  Porto  Rico  the  heat  during 
the  day  is  intense  the  year  round,  and  the  mis- 
sionary misses  the  reviving  and  invigorating 
effect  of  the  change  of  seasons  found  in  the 
United  States.  The  unsanitary  condition  is 
another  source  of  trial  and  suffering.  When  the 
Americans  took  possession  of  Porto  Rico  they 
found  nearly  all  the  towns  without  sewerage, 
and  garbage  and  all  forms  of  filth  in  the  streets. 

The  extreme  poverty  and  ignorance  present 
another  serious  problem  to  the  rapid  building  up 
of  a  self-supporting  native  church.  As  already 
stated,  only  one  in  eight  could  read  and  write, 
and  over  one-half  of  the  people  of  the  island  were 
without  remunerative  work  in  1899.  Those  who 
had  employment  received  wages  that  ranged 
from  twenty  cents  to  fifty-five  cents  per  day,  on 
which,  in  many  cases,  large  families  had  to  be 
supported.  It  is  not  surprising,  under  such  con- 
ditions, to  know  that  many  are  without  clothing 
and  wholly  dependent  upon  a  stalk  of  sugar-cane 
or  a  yam  potato  for  a  day's  sustenance. 

Messrs.  Alfred  Baltzly,  C.  M.  Benson,  and  W. 
L.  Hough,  Christian  laymen  of  our  Church  who 
made  a  missionary  tour  of  the  island  in  January, 
1908,  wrote:      "We  are  deeply  impressed  with 


The  Heat  and 

Unsanitary 

Conditions 


Ignorance 
and  Poverty 


Laymen 
Testify 


208      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Prejudice  and 
Superstition 


Social 
Difficulty 


the  awful  spiritual,  intellectual,  and  physical 
poverty  of  the  people.  Thousands  upon  thou- 
sands are  destitute  of  proper  food  and  clothing, 
and  are  without  religious  privileges." 

Superstition  and  prejudice  have  done  what 
they  could  to  hinder  the  gospel  in  Porto  Rico,  as 
in  other  lands.  Much  opposition  has  been  en- 
countered in  the  opening  of  the  first  Protestant 
service  in  many  districts.  Sometimes  the  house 
in  which  the  meeting  was  held  has  been  stoned, 
and  the  lives  of  those  inclined  to  attend  the  meet- 
ing threatened ;  but  the  people  are  learning, 
under  the  American  Government,  that  it  is  per- 
fectly safe  to  attend  these  religious  services,  and 
the  gospel  is  winning  in  spite  of  prejudice  and 
opposition. 

The  social  condition  of  the  people  constitutes 
a  serious  obstacle.  As  stated  before,  many  have 
been  living  as  husband  and  wife  without  being 
married.  Where  one  person  holding  this  relation 
becomes  interested  in  the  gospel  and  desires  to 
become  a  member  of  the  church,  he  or  she  is 
often  hindered  by  the  indifference  or  opposition 
of  the  other.  One  woman  was  a  candidate  for 
baptism  for  four  years,  the  only  impediment 
being  the  fact  that  she  was  net  married  to  the 
man  with  whom  she  was  living.  At  last  she 
gained  his  consent  to  be  married,  and  there  was 
no  happier  person  in  the  church  than  this  woman 
the  dav  she  was  received  into  full  communion. 


Porto  Rico  209 

The  obstacles  found  in  the  poor  roads  and  the  want  of 
scattered  population  and  mountainous  condition  Roads 
of  the  country  districts,  while  not  insuperable, 
are  very  great.  The  governor  of  the  island  has 
recommended  the  formation  of  villages  for  the 
grouping  of  the  country  people.  This  would  give 
them  better  social  and  educational  advantages, 
and  would  greatly  facilitate  mission  work.  There 
is,  however,  little  hope  that  this  idea  will  soon  be 
carried  into  effect. 

New  roads  are  being  completed  as  rapidly  as 
possible,  every  mile  of  which  is  a  help  to  mission 
work,  but  many  years  will  be  required  to  com- 
plete these,  and  even  then  all  the  districts  will 
not  be  supplied.  The  homes  of  thousands  of  the 
people  are  accessible  only  to  the  evangelists  trav- 
eling on  horseback  or  on  foot.  This  will  make  it 
necessary  to  have  a  large  force  of  native  preach- 
ers who  may  visit  from  barrio  to  barrio  and  from 
home  to  home,  in  order  that  all  the  people  may 
receive  the  gospel. 

Growth  of  the  United  Brethren  Church  in 
Porto  Rico. 

God  has  been  leading  us  to  victory  in  Porto 
Rico,  in  spite  of  all  the  difficulties  mentioned, 
and  others  that  might  be  named.  When  we  con- 
sider the  fact  that  until  recently  only  two  mis- 
sionary families  were  supported  on  this  field, 
the  rapid  growth  of  our  work,  from  1899  to  Sep- 


210      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

tember,  1908,  as  shown  in  the  following  table  of 
statistics,  seems  remarkable : 

1890    1903    1005    1903 

Missionaries    2  4  4  9 

Native  Pastors   0  2  5  8 

Organized  Churches  ....  0  3  7  14 

Communicant  Members   .  0  95  244  *042 

Church-Buildings    0  2  3  9 

Vakie  of  Church  Property  0    $11,800    $14,345  $28,000 

Sunday    Schools    0  5  8  14 

Sunday-School    Scholars.  0  225  500  SCO 
Young  People's  Societies.  0  O  1  5 
Members  in  Y.  P.  Societies  0  0  35  203 
Contributed  for  Self-Sup- 
port   and    Self-Exten- 
sion     0  $90  $225  $811.59 

*In  addition   there  are  200  seeker  members   being  in- 
structed in  preparation  for  church-membership. 

Looking  Forward. 

Notwithstanding  the  fact  that  Porto  Rico  has 
many  serious  and  difficult  problems  yet  unsolved, 
its  future  is  full  of  promise.  Becoming  an  Amer- 
ican possession  at  this  particular  time  will  soon 
bring  to  it  a  most  remarkable  transformation. 
a  Great  If  the  reader  will  take  a  map  of  the  world  and 

observe  the  location  of  Porto  Rico,  he  will  find 
that  this  island  is  in  direct  line  with  the  traffic 
from  Europe  that  will  pass  through  the  prospec- 
tive Panama  Canal.  The  distance  from  San 
Juan,  Porto  Rico,  to  Liverpool  is  3,593  miles  and 
to  Gibraltar  3,374  miles,  and  the  distance  from 
San  Juan  to  Colon  (Panama)  is  1,004  miles. 
The  harbor  at  San  Juan  is  now  being  dredged 
with  a  view  to  making  it  accessible  to  vessels 
of  the  largest  draft,  and  without  doubt  this  place 


Future 


Porto  Rico 


211 


will  become  a  coaling  station  and  a  port  of  call 
for  a  large  number  of  vessels  from  Europe  as 
soon  as  the  Panama  Canal  is  open  for  traffic. 

Moreover,  the  position  of  this  island  gives  the 
Americans  the  protecting  entrance  to  the  Panama 
Canal  from  the  Atlantic  Ocean,  and  in  view  of 
our  close  relations  to  the  South  American  repub- 
lics, Porto  Rico  will  occupy  a  position  of  the 
greatest  strategical  value  in  the  years  to  come. 

The  work  accomplished  thus  far  by  the  Prot- 
estant churches  in  Porto  Rico  reveals  the  diffi- 
culty and  greatness  of  the  tasks  yet  to  be  per- 
formed before  every  man,  woman,  and  child  will 
have  a  fair  opportunity  to  know  personally  the 
way  of  life  through  Jesus  Christ.  However, 
the  foundations  already  laid  and  the  victories 
achieved  speak  much  for  the  speedy  evangeliza- 
tion of  the  island.  Notwithstanding  the  fact  that 
much  of  the  time  and  energy  of  the  missionaries 
had  to  be  given  to  language  study  and  the  pre- 
liminary organization  and  equipment  always 
associated  with  "beginnings,"  yet,  on  an  average, 
one  thousand  persons  have  been  received  into  the 
Protestant  churches  in  Porto  Rico  each  year 
since  the  Americans  took  possession  of  the  island. 
With  the  trained  missionary  force  and  the  larger 
number  of  native  pastors  now  devoting  their 
lives  to  the  work,  doubtless  many  thousands  of 
persons  will  soon  be  received  each  year  into  the 
native  church. 


Position  of 
Strategy 


Excellent 
Spiritual 
Foundations 


Larger 
Victories 
in  Sipht 


212      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

The  chief  needs  of  the  United  Brethren 
Church  in  Porto  Rico  are:  First,  a  much  larger 
number  of  efficient  native  pastors.  We  are  con- 
ducting religious  services  regularly  at  thirty- 
five  places,  but  there  are  at  least  thirty-six 
barrios  in  our  territory,  each  with  a  population 
ranging  from  five  hundred  to  twenty-five  hun- 
dred persons,  in  which  no  religious  services  have 
yet  been  held.  It  will  be  impossible  to  carry  the 
gospel  to  these  neglected  districts  without  a  large 
increase  in  the  number  of  native  pastors.  A 
work  of  great  importance  for  our  missionaries 
will  be  to  teach  and  to  train  these  native  leaders 
and  to  direct  them  in  practical  work.  It  is  highly 
important  that  our  Church,  either  independently 
or  in  connection  with  some  other  denomination, 
establish  a  suitable  training-school  for  native 
workers  in  Porto  Rico.  Much  earnest  prayer 
should  be  offered  to  God  for  the  calling  forth  of 
the  right  kind  of  native  pastors,  teachers,  and 
evangelists,  upon  whom  the  chief  responsibility 
must  rest  for  the  complete  evangelization  of  their 
own  people.  The  native  pastors  now  at  work 
rank  high  in  efficiency. 

The  second  urgent  need  is  for  more  and  better 
equipment  in  the  way  of  chapels,  churches,  and 
missionary  residences.  The  writer  recently  made 
a  tour  of  inspection  through  the  five  municipal 
districts  for  which  our  Church  is  responsible, 
and  after  careful   calculation   he    found  that,  to 


Porto  Rico  213 

properly  equip  our  work  where  we  have  organ- 
ized churches,  it  will  require  at  least  $20,275. 
This  is  over  and  above  the  money  needed  for 
carrying  forward  the  current  work  of  the  mis- 
sion. In  addition  to  this,  in  fifteen  barrios, 
where  we  are  holding  religious  services,  we  need 
to  rent  halls  or  erect  chapels  in  which  to  hold 
meetings.  Then  as  speedily  as  possible  we  must 
advance  into  the  thirty-six  settlements  in  which 
no  religious  services  have  yet  been  held,  and 
supply  them  with  the  privileges  of  the  gospel. 
From  one  hundred  and  fifty  to  five  hundred  dol- 
lars will  provide  a  suitable  chapel  for  any  one  of 
these  mountain  barrios. 

Missionary  residences  are  greatly  needed  in  importance  of 
Porto  Rico.  Up  to  this  time  our  missionaries  Residences 
have  had  to  live  in  rented  houses,  some  of  which 
have  been  unhealthy  and  inconvenient,  subjecting 
the  children  to  many  social  perils  in  the  streets. 
It  is  very  important  that  we  provide  healthful 
and  convenient  residences  for  our  missionaries  in 
the  tropics,  otherwise  there  will  be  serious 
nervous  breakdowns  and  the  cutting  short  of  the 
period  of  effective  service  on  the  part  of  these 
workers.  The  power  of  each  missionary  as  a 
spiritual  force  increases  with  the  years  of  faith- 
ful service.  It  is  the  desire  and  hope  of  the 
society  to  so  guard  the  health  of  its  representa- 
tives in  the  foreign  field  that  each  family  may 
make  this  service  a  life  work. 


214      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

No  other  work  done  by  the  United  States  in 
Porto  Rico  can  compare  in  importance  to  that 
which  the  missionaries  are  permitted  to  do ; 
namely,  to  bring  to  the  thousands  of  darkened, 
sad  lives  the  knowledge  of  a  Savior — the  joy, 
peace,  and  hope  that  the  incoming  of  the  life 
from  Christ  always  brings.  The  greatest  change 
in  the  island  is  the  spiritual  transformation 
wrought  by  the  gospel  in  the  lives  of  the  people. 
Thousands  in  the  recent  past  have  perished  for 
want  of  proper  food,  but  many  more  are  famish- 
ing for  the  true  bread  from  heaven.  Is  not  the 
Master  saying  to  us,  "Give  ye  them  to  eat"  ? 

"Freely,  as  ye  have  received,  so  give. 

He  bade  who  hath  given  us  all. 
How  shall  the  soul  in  us  longer  live, 

Deaf  to  their  starving  call, 
For  whom  the  blood  of  the  Lord  was  shed. 
And  his  body  broken  to  give  them  bread. 

If  we  eat  our  morsel  alone?" 


QUESTIONS  FOR   STUDY   AND   DISCUSSION. 
CHAPTER  V. 

1.  What  are  some  of  the  striking  physical 
characteristics  of  Porto  Rico? 

2.  Describe  the  people,  and  state  the  density  of 
its  population. 

3.  Contrast  educational,  political,  and  religious 
conditions  in  Porto  Rico  before  and  after  the 
American  occupation  of  the  island. 

4.  In  what  ways  has  the  Roman  Catholic 
Church  failed  to  meet  the  needs  of  the  Porto 
Ricans? 


Porto  Rico  215 

5.  Locate  our  field,  name  the  missionaries  and 
the  principal  stations,  and  state  the  growth  of  the 
work. 

6.  How  do  the  methods  used  in  Porto  Rico  differ 
from  those  used  in  the  States? 

7.  What  do  you  consider  the  greatest  obstacle 
to  the  progress  of  the  gospel  in  Porto  Rico? 

8.  What  is  the  outlook  and  the  greatest  need 
of  our  work  in  Porto  Rico? 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS 

By  Bishop  J.  S.  Mills,  D.D. 


2)7 


"Never  was  a  more  glorious  opportunity  offered  to 
a  nation  than  that  now  open  to  the  people  of  the 
United  States  in  the  Philippines.  To  bring  to  them 
the  gift  of  free  institutions,  of  a  great  unifying 
language  that  shall  make  their  dream  of  nationality 
possible,  of  an  open  Bible  and  an  ennobling  faith; 
these  are  the  high  privileges  into  which  we  may  enter 
if  we  will." 

— Helen  B.  Montgomery. 


218 


VI 


THE  PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS. 
The  Philippines  Under  Spanish  Rule. 

The  islands  included  in  the  Philippine  group 
number  more  than  three  thousand,  only  eleven  of 
which  are  of  any  geographical  importance.  The 
group  lies  south  of  China  and  north  of  Australia, 
and  has  a  total  area  of  more  than  127,000  square 
miles,  or  a  territory  larger  than  New  England, 
with  New  York  included.  Of  the  eleven  impor- 
tant islands,  Luzon  on  the  north  and  Mindanao 
on  the  south  are  the  largest.  Next  to  them  in 
size  is  Samar,  about  one-eighth  as  large,  and  fol- 
lowing are  Palawan,  Negros,  Panay,  Cebu, 
Leyte,  Mindoro,  Bohol,  and  Masbate,  with  an 
area  of  less  than  two  thousand  square  miles. 

A  chain  of  mountains  runs  down  the  islands 
from  north  to  south,  and  on  the  islands  are  many 
volcanoes,  about  twenty  of  which  are  more  or 
less  active. 

While  the  whole  group  lies  within  the  tropics, 
the  climate  over  the  group  varies  greatly.  "As 
a  rule,  however,  the  climate  upon  the  seacoast 
may  be  described  as  temperate  and  delightful 
from  November  to  February ;  it  is  excessively 

219 


Location 
and  Si.'e 


Mountains 


Climate 


220      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

hot  in  April,  May,  and  June,  and  intermediate  in 
March,  July,  August,  and  September.  The  nights 
everywhere  are  cool.  Sunstroke  is  not  known. 
The  high  mountain  districts  present  a  temperate 
climate,  with  temperate-zone  vegetation  and  ani- 
mal life.  The  monthly  mean  in  Manila  ('the 
hottest  place  in  the  Philippines')  varies  from 
77°  Fahrenheit  in  January  to  83°  in  May.  The 
rainfall  is  about  seventy-five  inches  annually, 
two-thirds  of  which  fall  in  the  months  of  July, 
August,  September,  and  October." 
Discoveries  The  first  European  to  discover  the  islands  was 

Magellan.  He  sailed  from  Spain,  August  9, 
1519,  in  the  endeavor  to  find  a  northwest  passage 
to  the  Moluccas  or  Spice  Islands,  and  thus  add 
wealth  to  the  king  and  obtain  glory  for  himself. 
His  voyage  was  full  of  adventures.  On  the  16th 
of  March,  1521,  he  touched  at  Homonohon,  and 
later  at  other  islands  of  the  Philippine  group. 

On  November  24,  1564,  an  expedition  sailed 
from  Mexico  under  command  of  Miguel  Lopez 
de  Legaspi,  who  was  appointed  governor-general 
of  the  lands  he  might  occupy.  He  arrived  on  the 
island  of  Leyte,  February  13,  1565,  and  in  Cebu 
in  April  of  that  year.  At  once  the  friars  who 
had  come  with  him  went  to  work  converting  and 
baptizing  the  natives,  and  thus  became  the  first 
teachers  and  civilizers  of  the  people.  Later 
Manila  was  taken,  and  in  1571  Legaspi  formed 
for  it  a  government  and  made  it  an  archbishopric. 


The  Philippine  Islands  221 

The  total  population  of  the  Philippines,  accord-  Population 
ing  to  the  census  taken  in  March,  1903,  was 
7,635,426.  Of  this  number,  more  than  6,500,000 
are  classified  as  having  a  considerable  degree  of 
civilization,  while  the  remainder  consists  of  wild 
people.  The  civilized  people,  outside  of  the  for- 
eigners, are  mostly  Roman  Catholics.  The  most 
cultured  and  influential  of  all  the  tribes  are  the 
Tagalogs.  This  is  probably  because  of  their  long 
residence  around  Manila  and  their  contact  with 
outside  peoples.  Most  of  the  leaders  of  the  Fili- 
pinos in  all  lines  of  activity  come  from  the  Taga- 
logs. The  Ilocanos  of  northern  Luzon,  among 
whom  our  mission  is  located,  come  next  in  vigor, 
trustworthiness,  and  industry.  The  Igorots  are 
classified  among  the  "wild"  people  of  the  islands. 

"The  most  colossal  industrial  undertaking  in 
the  Philippines,  and  perhaps  the  most  stupendous 
task  ever  accomplished  by  a  thoroughly  savage 
people,  is  to  be  found  in  the  mountains  of  central 
and  northern  Luzon.  Here  the  Igorots  have  igorot 
built  terraces  for  the  growing  of  rice,  like  giant  Terraces 
steps  up  the  steep  .mountain  canyons,  to  a  height 
of  three  thousand  feet  or  more.  These  terraces, 
each  of  which  is  flooded  with  water  at  certain 
periods  of  the  year,  are  wonderful  feats  of  en- 
gineering; sometimes  they  follow  the  contour  of 
a  canyon  for  as  great  a  distance  as  half  a  mile 
without  varying  two  inches  from  the  dead  level. 
The  summit  of  the  retaining  wall  of  each  terrace 


222       Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

is  so  constructed  as  to  be  about  fifteen  inches 
above  water  level,  and  at  the  time  of  flooding  it 
has  been  invariably  found  that  this  condition  has 
been  complied  with.  The  Igorots  are  the  most 
remarkable  of  all  the  pagan  races  of  the  Philip- 
pines. Perhaps  no  people,  either  savage  or  civil- 
ized, have  ever  further  developed  the  art  of 
intensive  cultivation  of  the  soil.  None,  as  far  as 
is  now  known,  have  so  far  progressed  in  meth- 
ods of  irrigation  as  have  many  Igorot  communi- 
ties. The  pyramids  of  Cheops,  or  the  tallest 
'sky-scraper'  in  New  York,  would  appear  insig- 
nificant beside  these  clean-cut,  Herculean  achieve- 
ments of  the  simple  ancestor-worshiping  Igorot." 
As  will  thus  be  seen,  it  is  entirely  possible  for 
even  the  least  civilized  of  these  Malay  peoples  to 
make  great  industrial  progress, 
character  One  of  the  strong  points  in  the  character  of 

of  People  the  Filipino  people,  as  a  whole,  is  their  extreme 

adaptability.  It  must  be  remembered  that  the 
Filipinos  were  under  a  most  paternalistic  form 
of  government  for  three  hundred  years,  a  gov- 
ernment of  church  and  state,  such  as  we  Amer- 
icans know  nothing  about  in  actual  experience. 
Neither  the  friars  nor  the  Spanish  rulers  wished 
the  Filipinos  to  become  sufficiently  civilized  and 
self-dependent  to  rule  themselves.  In  every  way 
possible  the  spirit  of  independence  was  crushed. 
So  it  must  not  be  expected  that  because  the  Fili- 
pino never  has  had  self-government,  he  will  never 


The  Philippine  Islands 


223 


become  capable  of  exercising  the  same.  They 
are  very  observant ;  they  readily  assimilate  the 
customs  and  manners  of  the  civilized  people  with 
whom  they  come  in  contact.  One  of  the  first 
things  which  impresses  itself  upon  the  foreigner 
in  his  travels  in  the  Philippines  is  the  extreme 
hospitality  and  courtesy  of  the  people.  This  is 
not  for  the  foreigner  alone ;  any  who  come  are 
treated  to  the  best  the  host  owns  or  can  borrow 
"No  one  ever  need  want  for  food  or  lodging  in 
the  Philippines ;  doubtless  one  could  travel  from 
one  end  of  the  archipelago  to  the  other  without 
a  peso  (dollar)  in  his  pocket." 

They  are  passionately  fond  of  music,  and  there 
is  scarcely  a  civilized  village  in  the  islands  which 
does  not  boast  a  band  or  an  orchestra.  It  will  be 
recalled  that  the  Philippine  Constabulary  Band 
took  the  second  prize  at  the  St.  Louis  World's 
Fair,  the  first  prize  going  to  the  famous  Sousa 
band  of  our  own  country.  There  is  little  or  no 
pauperism  in  the  islands,  for  the  reason  that  the 
poor  relatives  are  always  welcomed  into  the 
homes  of  those  more  fortunate.  Veracity  is  not 
a  strong  trait  of  the  Filipino  people.  They  will 
always  try  to  please,  even  if  they  have  to  equivo- 
cate. Furthermore,  the  Spanish  friars  never 
taught  or  practised  a  strict  truthfulness,  if  equiv- 
ocation would  serve  their  ends.  Hon.  William 
H.  Taft  says :  ''They  are  an  Oriental  people,  and 
the  Orientals  believe  in  saying  to  the  person  to 


Hospitality 


Love  of 

Music 


Taft's 
Estimate 


Life 


224      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

whom  he  is  talking  what  he  thinks  that  person 
would  like  to  hear.  That  is  the  tendency  of  the 
race.  You  graft  on  to  that  the  Spanish  tendency 
to  superlatives,  and  a  Filipino  will  talk  to  you  in 
such  language  that,  if  you  do  not  weigh  it  in  the 
light  of  this  trait,  you  are  quite  certain  to  mis- 
understand him  and  be  misled  by  what  he  says. 
He  thinks  you  will  construe  what  he  says  through 
that  medium." 
Family  The  Filipino  is  a  most  cleanly  person,  and  has 

a  great  amount  of  dignity  and  self-respect.  In 
the  family  life  the  women  occupy  a  position 
much  higher  than  the  women  of  any  other 
Asiatic  race.  The  wife  has  the  management  of  the 
household  finances,  and  is  commonly  consulted  in 
the  business  negotiations  of  her  husband.  Within 
the  household  the  family  life  has  many  traits  to 
commend  it:  old  age  is  honored,  and  the  children 
are  most  obedient  and  respectful.  The  father  is 
the  head  of  the  house,  and  when  a  daughter 
marries  she  passes  under  the  authority  of  the 
husband's  family.  As  the  Filipinos  are  very  fond 
of  children,  each  household  has  usually  many 
sons  and  daughters.  Socially,  there  are  two  dis- 
tinct grades,  "the  gente  illustrade,  which  is  the 
cultivated  class,  and  the  gente  boda,  or  subor- 
dinate class."  From  the  higher  social  class  comes 
the  ruling  class,  although  they  number  perhaps 
not  a  hundredth  part  of  the  whole  population  of 
the  islands. 


Igorot  Rice  Terraces. 


I'i. anting  Rice   in  the   Philippines 


Types   of   Igorot   Tribe. 


Ilocano  Women  and  Children. 


The  Philippine  Islands 


225 


The  sport  most  enjoyed  among  the  natives  is 
cock-fighting.  This  was  not  originally  an  indig- 
enous vice,  but  was  brought  over  from  Mexico. 
With  this  goes  gambling,  not  on  an  extensive 
scale  usually,  but  enough  to  make  it  exciting  and 
to  cause  it  to  be  classed  as  the  chief  vice  of  the 
people. 

Ninety  per  cent,  of  the  native  population  be- 
longs to  the  agriculturist  class.  The  native  of 
this  class  is  more  interesting  in  his  own  home 
community,  his  family,  and  his  own  holdings 
than  in  the  politics  of  his  country,  and,  according 
to  one  of  his  own  countrymen,  has  no  political 
opinions  of  his  own,  but  takes  all  his  ideas  from 
his  leader.  Dr.  Manuel  Xerez,  Chief  of  the 
Bureau  of  Statistics,  and  himself  a  Filipino,  says : 
"Ordinarily  the  native  Filipinos,  because  they 
have  been  under  the  influence  of  the  friar  for 
so  long  a  time,  are  stoical.  They  are  fond  of 
work  up  to  a  certain  point ;  they  will  work  as 
long  as  it  is  necessary  to  gain  a  livelihood. 
They  have  not  yet  learned  to  save  what  they 
earn  by  their  work,  for  they  have  always  been 
obliged,  whenever  they  had  any  money,  to  give 
it  to  the  church,  and  in  this  way  they  have 
become  indifferent  to  saving."  The  Filipino 
is  like  a  child,  imitative,  and  able  to  learn ;  hav- 
ing had  few  chances,  he  is  now  ready  and  eager 
to  receive  all  that  may  lead  him  to  something 
hisfher  and  better  than  he  has  hitherto  known. 


Gambling 


Lack  of 

Public 

Spirit 


War 


226      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

The  Philippines  Under  American  Rule. 

For  three  hundred  years  preceding  1898  the 
Filipinos  had  been  under  Spanish  rule.  The 
Spanish  plan  of  colony  government  in  these 
islands  was  a  union  of  church  and  state,  largely 
church,  and  a  requirement  of  absolute  obedience 
on  the  part  of  the  governed.  This  led,  in  the  last 
quarter  century  of  Spanish  rule,  to  many  up- 
risings of  the  natives. 
Spanish-  ^n  tne  year  1898  the  American  Government 

American  protested    to    Spain    on    account    of    the    great 

cruelty  of  the  Spanish  army  toward  the  Cubans, 
then  in  armed  revolt.  This  led  to  a  severance  of 
diplomatic  relations  between  the  two  countries, 
and,  after  the  United  States  warship  "Maine" 
was  blown  up  in  Havana  harbor,  to  a  declaration 
of  war.  Admiral  Dewey  was  then  on  the  Chinese 
coast  with  a  fleet-  of  United  States  war  vessels, 
and  he  was  at  once  ordered  to  proceed  against 
the  Spanish  fleet  in  Manila  Bay.  This  he  did, 
and  on  May  1,  1898,  without  the  loss  of  a  ship, 
destroyed  the  entire  Spanish  fleet.  Being  shortly 
reenforced  with  infantry,  Manila  itself  was  car- 
ried by  assault  on  August  13.  The  Filipinos, 
under  Aguinaldo,  were  not  allowed  to  take  part 
in  this  assault,  nor  to  enter  the  city  after  it  was 
taken.  This  caused  friction  between  the  Amer- 
ican troops  and  the  Filipinos.  Aguinaldo  set  up 
a  capital  at  Malolos,  and  had  himself  elected 
president  of  the  Filipinos.     His  army  was  eager 


The  Philippine  Islands 


227 


to  fight  the  Americans,  whom  they  believed  to  be 
cowards,  on  account  of  their  long-suffering 
patience  in  the  face  of  continued  Filipino  insults. 
After  several  months,  word  finally  came  that  the 
Treaty  of  Peace  of  Paris  had  been  signed, 
Article  III.  of  which  passed  the  Philippines  from 
the  sovereignty  of  Spain  to  that  of  the  United 
States. 

The  duty  at  once  devolved  upon  the  American 
Government  of  bringing  order  out  of  chaos.  The 
Filipinos  could  not  appreciate  the  fact  that  the 
United  States  had  broken  the  power  of  their 
oppressors,  but  looked  upon  her  as  an  enemy, 
and  finally,  on  February  4,  1899,  war  was  actually 
begun.  The  Americans  pushed  the  campaign 
vigorously  until  July  4,  1901,  when  "war  was 
officially  declared  at  an  end  and  civil  rule  began." 
We  had  no  colonial  policy  by  which  to  be  guided, 
so  had  to  form  one  without  precedent. 

Governmental  Policy. 

To  carry  out  the  beneficent  aims  of  the  country 
toward  the  Filipinos,  a  Commission  of  Concilia- 
tion and  Investigation  was  appointed  to  look  into 
the  needs  of  the  islands.  The  first  Commission 
reported  to  Congress,  and  was  succeeded  by  a 
Civil  Commission.  July  4,  1901,  Judge  William 
H.  Taft,  who  had  been  president  of  the  Civil 
Commission,  was  inaugurated  Civil  Governor  of 
the  islands,  with  General  A.  R.  Chaffee  as  Mili- 


Treaty 
of  Peace 


Civil 
Commission 


228      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

tary  Governor  under  him.  "The  theory  upon 
which  the  American  Government,  through  its 
Commission,  had  proceeded  from  the  first,  is  that 
the  only  possible  method  of  instructing  the  Fili- 
pino people  in  the  methods  of  free  government  is 
to  make  the  government  partly  of  Americans  and 
partly  of  Filipinos,  giving  the  Americans  control 
for  some  time  to  come ;  so,  on  September  1,  1901, 
the  Civil  Commission  as  a  legislative  body  was 
enlarged  by  the  addition  of  three  Filipinos.  This 
Commission  has  worked  hard  and  has  put  into 
operation  more  than  one  thousand  laws  for  the 
betterment  of  the  conditions  of  the  islands." 
Municipal  One  of  the  shortcomings  of  native  officials  in 

the  islands  is  to  feel  no  responsibility  for  the 
proper  discharge  of  their  duties.  In  Spanish 
times  an  official  enriched  himself  at  the  public 
expense,  and  was  more  or  less  indifferent  to  pub- 
lic opinion.  All  this  is  now  changed,  and  as  a 
first  step  in  the  direction  of  self-government  and 
the  responsibility  of  officials,  the  Municipal  Code 
was  passed.  This  Code  divides  the  towns  of  the 
islands  into  four  classes,  from  less  than  ten  thou- 
sand in  population  up  to  more  than  twenty-five 
thousand.  Each  class  calls  for  a  certain  number 
of  councilmcn  as  a  governing  body,  making  each 
municipality  independent,  and  "with  a  limited 
electorate,  having  their  operations  subject  to  the 
scrutiny  and  criticism  of  a  provincial  govern- 
ment in  which  the  controlling  element  must  be 


The  Philippine  Islands  229 

American,  and  directly  responsible  to  the  Insular 
government."  This  will  give  the  Filipinos  an 
opportunity  to  become  familiar  with  the  work- 
ings of  government,  and  will  prevent  enrichment 
at  the  public  expense.  The  Spanish  were  ex- 
ploiters, usually,  and  governed  for  the  benefit  of 
the  home  country  ;  the  Americans  are  emphati- 
cally not  exploiters,  and  are  governing  for  the 
benefit  of  the  governed. 

It  is  interesting  to  see  the  relations  the  friars  Friar 
sustained  to  the  municipality  under  Spanish  rule. 
The  quotation  is  taken  from  the  report  of  the 
Commission  and  was  given  by  an  officer  of  the 
Franciscan  Order  of  Friars:  "He  (the  friar) 
was  inspector  of  the  primary  schools ;  president 
of  the  Health  Board,  and  of  the  Board  of  Char- 
ities ;  president  of  the  Board  of  Urban  Taxation ; 
inspector  of  taxation ;  he  certified  to  the  correct- 
ness of  the  Cedulas,  seeing  that  they  conformed 
to  the  entries  in  the  parish  books ;  he  was  presi- 
dent of  the  Board  of  Statistics ;  he  was  president 
of  the  census-taking  of  the  town ;  he  was  censor 
of  the  municipal  budgets ;  he  was  president  of  the 
Prison  Board,  and  inspector  of  the  food  provided 
for  the  prisoners ;  he  was  also  a  member  of  the 
board  for  partitioning  crown  lands ;  he  was 
councilor  for  the  Municipal  Council.  The 
parish  priest  was  also  the  supervisor  of  the  elec- 
tion of  the  police  force ;  he  was  the  examiner  of 
the  scholars  attending  the  first  and  second  grades 


230      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


American 
Schools 


Teachers 


in  the  public  schools."  So  that  in  all  positions 
of  public  trust  the  church  played  a  very  impor- 
tant part.  But  the  new  Municipal  Code  has  the 
following  provision,  Chapter  II.,  Section  5 :  "In 
no  case  shall  there  be  elected  or  appointed  to  a 
municipal  office  ecclesiastics,  soldiers  in  active 
service,  persons  receiving  salaries  from  pro- 
vincial, departmental,  or  government  funds,  or 
contractors  for  public  works  of  the  municipality." 

An  Educational  System  Established. 

One  of  the  most  important  things  the  Com- 
mission did  was  to  provide  for  the  establishment 
of  a  school  system  over  the  islands  similar  to 
that  of  the  United  States.  The  system  which 
existed  prior  to  the  American  occupation  was 
medieval  in  tone,  and  the  curriculum  consisted 
merely  in  church  doctrine  and  catechism. 

The  secularization  of  the  schools  began  in 
earnest  when,  on  the  twenty-third  of  August, 
1901,  there  landed  in  Manila  from  the  transport 
"Thomas,"  five  hundred  and  forty-five  trained 
American  teachers.  All  were  graduates  of  uni- 
versity, college,  or  normal  school,  and  nearly  all 
were  men  and  women  of  experience.  These 
teachers  were  soon  scattered  over  the  islands, 
and  at  once  began  the  work  of  educating  a 
nation.  Without  a  knowledge  of  the  language, 
unaccustomed  to  a  tropical  climate,  and  without 
a  knowledge  of  the  customs  and  habits  of  the 


The  Philippine  Islands 


231 


people,  it  is  a  great  wonder  that  they  succeeded 
at  all.  But  they  did  succeed,  and  hundreds  of 
other  teachers  followed  these  pioneers  of  educa- 
tion to  the  islands. 

It  was  thought  on  all  sides,  in  the  Philippines 
and  in  America,  that  public  schools  under  the 
domination  of  the  Roman  Catholic  Church  would 
not  succeed  in  the  islands,  as  eighty  per  cent,  of 
the  Filipinos  are  of  Catholic  faith.  But  these 
fears  were  groundless,  as  a  glance  at  the  figures 
showing  the  attendance  will  prove :  "The  census 
in  1903  shows  that  the  enrollment  was  100,000 
pupils.  In  March,  1904,  this  had  risen  to  227,- 
000;  in  September,  1905,  to  320,000  children  in 
the  primary  schools,  8,000  in  the  intermediate, 
12,000  in  the  night  schools.  In  April,  1906,  the 
surprising  total  of  500,000  was  reached.  There 
are  now  employed  in  teaching  the  children  more 
than  3,700  Filipino  teachers  and  900  American 
teachers."  As  the  Filipino  teachers  are  not 
equipped  educationally  as  are  the  Americans,  the 
duty  of  the  latter  is  fast  becoming  that  of  super- 
vision and  less  of  actual  teaching.  As  the  friars 
never  wished  the  Filipinos  to  advance  education- 
ally, they  are  opposing  the  American  school  sys- 
tem in  the  islands.  Rival  schools  were  started  by 
the  friars,  some  of  which  have  a  few  branches 
fairly  well  taught.  In  certain  localities  this  an- 
tagonism of  the  Roman  Church  is  partially  suc- 
cessful.   The  church  is  trying  to  gain  control  of 


Growth  in 
Attendance 


Opposition 
of  Friars 


Training 


232      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

the  public-school  system  by  having  its  own  mem- 
bers hold  the  offices.  To  what  end  this  will  come, 
time  alone  will  tell.  In  order  to  furnish  native 
teachers  for  the  public  schools,  normal  schools 
are  contemplated  or  are  in  course  of  construction, 
industrial  But  it  is  not  alone  the  children  of  the  islands 

who  are  benefiting  by  the  American  teachers. 
Their  parents,  too,  are  being  taught,  if  not  alto- 
gether directly,  then  by  example,  in  industrial 
education.  In  putting  sugar  into  marketable 
form,  modern  methods  are  being  slowly  intro- 
duced by  the  Americans.  The  same  is  true  in 
the  preparing  of  timber  for  export.  In  the  Phil- 
ippines are  thousands  of  acres  of  the  finest  hard- 
wood trees  suitable  for  the  highest  grade  of 
cabinet  work — white  and  red  mahogany,  molave 
supra,  tindalo,  and  several  other  woods  which 
take  as  high  a  polish  as  mahogany,  in  all,  over 
seventy  varieties.  The  Americans  are  intro- 
ducing modern  methods  of  handling  this  timber. 
In  transportation,  the  Americans  are  introducing 
our  Western  methods  and  helping  the  Filipinos 
by  throwing  open  vast  fields  hitherto,  with  the 
poor  transportation  facilities  existing  during 
Spanish  occupation,  too  far  removed  from  trade 
centers  to  be  worth  while  working.  This  same 
thing  holds  true  in  the  development  of  mineral 
resources,  of  which  the  islands  have  great  stores 
in  gold,  silver,  iron,  copper,  coal,  and  some  other 
minerals. 


The  Philippine  Islands 


233 


Mention  must  be  made  of  the  Philippine  con- 
stabulary in  connection  with  the  above-mentioned 
servants  of  progress.  These  natives,  officered  by 
Americans,  are  a  force  primarily  to  patrol  the 
islands  and  keep  order.  They  were  organized 
by  the  order  of  the  present  Secretary  of  War, 
General  Luke  B.  Wright,  when  he  was  gov- 
ernor of  the  islands.  They  are  an  armed  force, 
and,  when  necessary,  do  resort  to  arms  to  keep 
or  bring  about  order.  But  they  do  many  other 
things,  too;  they  have  helped  to  build  roads,  run 
telegraph  lines,  and  many  other  things  tending  to 
bring  civilization  to  remote  towns ;  and  their 
example  has  been  uniformly  good. 

But  of  all  these  influences,  that  of  the  Amer- 
ican school-teacher  has  been  the  most  far-reach- 
ing. It  has  been  said  that  the  kind  of  teacher 
stationed  at  a  village  can  often  be  told  by  observ- 
ing the  ways  of  the  Filipinos  of  that  village. 
This  is  probably  an  exaggeration,  but  it  illus- 
trates the  fact  that  the  American  teachers  have 
been  most  influential  in  helping  to  uplift  the  Fili- 
pinos. 

Religious  Influences  in  the  Philippines. 

Roman  Catholicism  first  gained  a  foothold  in 
the  Philippines  in  1564.  Here,  as  in  all  of  her 
colonies,  Spain's  policy  was  to  Christianize  the 
natives.  It  mattered  little  to  her  kings  whether 
officials  made  themselves  rich  and  ill  treated  the 


Constabulary- 


Teacher's 
Influence 


234      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


The  Work 
of  the 
Friars 


Why   Hated 


natives  in  addition,  so  long  as  they  carried  out 
the  original  thought.  So  from  the  beginning  we 
can  see  in  the  Philippines  the  Spanish  officials 
acting,  and  can  know  that  the  orders  to  act  came 
from  a  priestly  source.  We  must  not  lose  sight 
of  the  fact  that  whatever  else  they  did,  the  friars 
brought  to  the  islands  the  Christian  religion,  as 
taught  by  the  Roman  Catholic  Church,  and  while 
we  do  not  believe  in  many  things  therein  taught, 
yet  what  those  friars  taught  the  Filipinos  of  God 
and  of  Christ  was  much  better  than  the  pagan- 
ism, Brahmanism,  and  Mohammedanism  which 
many  of  them  had.  The  friars  did  oppress  the 
Filipinos,  it  is  true ;  the  Catholic  Church  has  ever 
been  an  oppressor  and  a  foe  to  the  individual 
thinker.  The  friars  established  church  schools 
and  colleges ;  while  the  courses  of  study  offered 
in  any  of  them  cannot  compare  to  the  courses 
offered  by  the  public  schools  of  to-day,  yet  they 
were  far  better  than  nothing.  The  Dominican 
friars  established  a  college  in  Manila  about  1629, 
which  has  graduated  thousands. 

Why  there  should  exist  among  the  majority  of 
the  Philippine  people  an  intense  dislike,  amount- 
ing to  hatred,  against  the  friars,  who  have  been 
their  spiritual  guides  for  centuries,  will  not  be 
hard  to  understand  when  we  look  at  the  follow- 
in  reasons,  which  have  been  given  by  Dr. 
Homer  C.  Stuntz,  for  years  a  Protestant 
missionary  in  the  islands : 


The  Philippine  Islands  235 

1.     "Because  the  friars  secured  and  held  large      Enriched 


tracts  of  the  most  valuable  land,  and  used  these 
tracts  as  a  means  of  enriching  their  orders."  The 
individual  members  of  the  priesthood  orders  are 
riot  permitted  by  the  church  to  own  property ;  in 
other  words,  they  take  a  vow  of  poverty.  But 
the  order  itself  may  possess  as  much  property  as 
it  can  acquire,  within  limits,  except  the  Fran- 
ciscan, which  can  own  only  convents  and  schools. 
In  the  province  of  Cavite  alone  the  orders  owned 
121,747  acres  of  land,  and  altogether  the  three 
orders  owned  403,713  acres.  All  of  this  is  of  the 
very  best  lands  in  the  islands,  and  little  or  none 
of  it  is  swamp  land.  From  the  immense  land 
holdings  the  orders  derived  much  profit.  They 
sold  none  of  the  land,  but  would  rent  much  of  it. 
The  rentals  were  often  exorbitant,  but  the  friars 
did  not  hesitate  to  compel  payment  of  the  same. 
When  the  United  States  came  into  possession 
of  the  islands,  orders  put  their  landed  property 
under  the  control  of  different  corporations,  Cath- 
olic in  each  case ;  so  that  the  friars  really  retained 
control,  although  the  management  was  held  by 
some  one  else.  On  recommendation  of  the  First 
Philippine  Commission,  the  United  States  tried 
to  buy  the  lands  of  the  orders  from  the  church. 
Governor  Taft  negotiated  directly  with  the 
church  authorities  in  Rome,  and  finally,  after 
months  of  delay,  proposal,  and  counter-proposal, 
on  the  part  of  the  church  authorities,  succeeded 


Themselves 


236      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Destroyed 
Liberty 


Persecution 
and   Martyrdom 
of  Rizal 


in  buying  the  land  from  the  friar  orders  for 
$7,237,000. 

2.  "Because  they  stifled  all  liberty  of  thought 
or  -freedom  of  speech  in  matters  political  and  re- 
ligious." It  was  in  the  code  of  laws  in  the 
islands,  under  Spanish  dominion,  that  any  one 
preaching  or  propagating  any  religion  outside 
the  state  religion  (Roman  Catholic)  should  incur 
a  penalty  of  fine  and  imprisonment.  No  student 
in  any  of  the  church  schools  was  allowed  to  do 
independent  religious  or  political  thinking.  If  he 
did  so,  and  continued  to  show  and  exercise  his 
ability  for  independent  thought,  he  was  finally 
banished,  through  friar  influence,  from  the 
islands.  The  Filipinos  are  said  to  be  loyal  Cath- 
olics. Of  course  they  are ;  to  be  anything  else, 
up  until  American  occupation,  meant  punish- 
ment and  death.  Many  were  the  Filipinos  shot 
to  death  on  the  field  of  Bagumbayan  for  holding 
to  independent  thought  and  action. 

One  of  the  most  widely-known  cases  of  friar 
activity  against  a  Filipino  with  adverse  opinions 
to  those  of  the  church  is  that  of  Jose  Rizal. 
When  a  lad,  Rizal  proved  to  be  a  very  bright 
student.  He  went  to  the  Jesuit  school  in  Manila, 
and  after  that,  still  desiring  education,  he  went 
to  Spain  to  the  University  of  Madrid,  where  he 
took  two  degrees,  one  as  a  Doctor  of  Philosophy 
and  one  as  a  Doctor  of  Medicine.  After  that  he 
took  further  work  at  several  universities  in  Ger- 


The  Philippine  Islands  237 

many  and  France.  While  in  Europe  he  studied 
to  find  knowledge  of  such  better  national  condi- 
tions as  would  help  his  own  people.  He  wrote 
two  novels,  "Noli  me  Tangere"  and  "El  Fili- 
busterismo,"  both  dealing  with  conditions  in  the 
Philippines,  and  both  picturing  the  friars  in  a 
way  not  at  all  complimentary  to  them.  Soon 
after  his  return  to  the  islands,  he  helped  in  an 
effort  to  prevent  the  Dominican  friars  proving 
proper  title  to  an  estate  in  his  own  community. 
The  friars  were  in  such  rage  that  he  returned  to 
Europe  for  his  own  safety.  While  Rizal  was 
gone,  all  sorts  of  indignities  were  heaped  upon 
his  family ;  even  while  they  professed  loyalty  to 
the  church,  their  lands  were  taken  from  them. 
Rizal  wrote  the  Governor-General,  and  in  1893 
came  back  to  the  Philippines  under  assurances 
that  it  would  be  safe  for  him  to  do  so.  But  he 
was  at  once  arrested,  and  anti-friar  documents 
found  upon  him,  put  there,  as  was  afterwards 
proved,  by  agents  of  the  friars.  He  was  not 
acquitted,  but  sent  to  a  remote  town  in  Min- 
danao Island  to  live.  As  he  was  already  a  famous 
oculist,  many  came  to  that  distant  point  to  be 
treated.  When  the  Cuban  war  broke  out  he 
offered  his  services  as  a  physician  to  the  Spanish 
authorities,  and  while  in  Madrid,  on  his  way  to 
Cuba,  he  was  arrested  for  sedition  and  rebellion 
and  sent  back  to  Manila,  and  there  condemned 
to  death  and  executed  for  something  which  he 


238      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

had  not  done.     This  was  the  end  of  the  earthly 
life   of  Jose  Rizal,  executed  by  connivance   of 
friars.     His  crime  was  that  he  had  learned  to 
think. 
Friar  Greed  3.     "Their  insatiable  greed  for  money."  There 

was  much  rivalry  between  the  orders  on  the 
point  of  wealth.  The  authorities  of  each  order 
desired  their  own  friars  to  send  in  as  much 
wealth  as  possible  to  the  treasury  of  the  order. 
The  friars  already  had  large  incomes  from  their 
estates,  but  they  gained  much  more,  as  Foreman, 
an  historian  of  the  Philippines  says,  "on  the  sale 
of  cedulas  (poll-tax  certificates),  sales  of  papal 
bulls,  masses,  pictures,  books,  chaplets  and  in- 
dulgences, marriage,  burial,  and  baptismal  fees, 
benedictions  touted  for  after  the  crops  were 
raised,  legacies  to  be  paid  for  in  masses,  remains 
of  wax  candles  left  in  the  church  by  the  faithful, 
fees  for  getting  souls  out  of  purgatory,  alms,  etc. 
The  church  as  a  body  politic  dispensed  no  char- 
ity, but  received  all.  It  claimed  immunity  from 
taxation ;  proclaimed  poverty,  and  inculcated  in 
others  charity  to  itself."  But  the  friars  went 
beyond  mere  reasonable  fees  on  everything  which 
they  did  for  the  people.  They  demanded  most 
exorbitant  fees  and  were  in  a  position  to  enforce 
their  demands.  They  alone  could  marry  persons 
and  perform  the  various  rites  of  the  church.  On 
all  of  these  things  there  was  a  fixed  scale  of 
charges,  but  this  scale  was  disregarded  and  the 


The  Philippine  Islands 


239 


wealth  of  the  parties  was  made  the  basis  for  the 
charge  for  services  rendered  by  the  friar.  Thou- 
sands of  poor  people  could  not  marry ;  they 
lived  together  without  the  marriage  ceremony. 
Deaths  and  funerals  are  a  particularly  choice 
field  of  financial  operation  for  the  friar.  "They 
charge,"  says  Doctor  Stuntz,  "for  the  dying  con- 
solations of  religion,  according  to  the  robes  worn, 
and  the  length  and  kind  of  prayers  offered. 
Every  stroke  of  the  church  bell  announcing  the 
death  costs  from  ten  cents  to  a  dollar.  The 
funeral  itself  can  be  ordinary,  solemn,  or  most 
solemn,  with  proportionate  fees.  Burial  charges 
are  extra.  If  the  friar  goes  all  the  way  to  the 
grave  it  is  twice  as  expensive  as  if  he  only  goes 
half  way.  If  death  and  funeral  fees  are  not  forth- 
coming, there  can  be  no  bells  rung,  no  service 
held,  and  the  body  may  not  be  permitted  to  rest 
in  'holy  ground.'  " 

4.  "Because  of  the  immorality  of  the  major- 
ity of  the  friars  who  served  as  village  priests." 
It  has  been  proved  before  the  Philippine  Com- 
mission and  to  others  who  have  at  all  investigated 
the  question,  that  the  great  majority  of  the  friars 
violated  their  vows  of  chastity.  There  are  to-day 
a  very  large  number  of  young  men  and  women 
in  the  islands  who  are  the  sons  and  daughters  of 
friars  and  even  bishops. 

5.  "Because  of  despotism  exercised  over  all 
classes    of    people."      The    friars    had    a    hand, 


Immorality 


Despotism 


240      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

directly  or  indirectly,  in  all  matters  ecclesiastical, 
civil,  military,  and  judicial.  In  a  word,  the  friar 
was  the  dictator  wherever  he  was.  It  is  little 
wonder  that  the  Filipinos  hated  them,  and,  when 
the  opportunity  came,  treated  them,  in  so  far  as 
they  were  able,  as  they  had  formerly  been  treated 
by  the  friars. 

American  Protestantism. 

After  the  American  occupation,  representatives 
from  various  Protestant  churches  came  to  the 
islands  to  open  work  for  their  respective  denom- 
inations. Their  mission  was  not  to  proselyte,  but 
to  bring  to  the  Filipinos  the  open  Bible,  which 
the  Romanists  had  withheld,  and  the  result  is 
that  since  1902  the  Filipinos  have  been  buying 
Bibles  at  the  rate  of  five  thousand  per  month. 
Through  the  influence  of  the  American  mission- 
aries of  the  various  churches,  over  thirty  thou- 
sand Filipinos  are  to-day  professing  faith  in  the 
gospel  of  Jesus  Christ.  During  the  past  year 
more  than  eight  thousand  were  received  into 
Protestant  churches. 
AgHpay  The    Protestant    movement    has    been    aided 

somewhat  by  the  Independent  Catholic  Church 
of  the  Philippines,  in  that  this  church,  commonly 
called  the  Aglipay  movement,  sanctions  reading 
the  Bible,  and  also  permits  independent  thinking. 
Aglipay,  the  originator  of  this  movement,  was  a 
very  bright  Romanist  friar  who  fell  into  disfavor 


Rohan  Catholic  Church,  San  Feknando. 


U.  B.  Chapel  and  Congregation,  Balaoan. 


- 
I 


r.nu.i:  i'iini  i:i:i:mi:,    Sax   Feuxaxd 


P.  I.  Dnited  Brethren  Mission  Conference. 


The  Philippine  Islands  241 

with  his  superiors  and  cast  in  his  lot  with  Aguin- 
aldo.  After  peace  was  established,  he  formed  the 
Independent  Catholic  Church ;  declared  it  free  of 
the  authority  of  the  Pope,  and  drew  up  for  it  a 
constitution.  Aglipay  himself  was  elected  arch- 
bishop. It  is  purely  a  Filipino  movement,  and 
has  spread  amazingly,  it  being  estimated  that 
there  are  now  1,500,000  adherents.  It  fails,  how- 
ever, in  the  fact  that  it  does  not  make  any  spir- 
itual or  moral  demands  on  its  followers. 

The  United  Brethren  Mission  in  the 
Philippines. 

Early  in  1901  the  Woman's  Missionary  Asso-  Evangelical 
ciation  chose  Rev.  E.  S.  Eby,  of  Elkhart,  Indiana, 
and  Rev.  S.  B.  Kurtz,  of  Hygiene,  Colorado,  as 
their  pioneer  workers  in  the  Philippine  Islands. 
Soon  after  their  arrival  a  conference  of  the  dif- 
ferent missions  was  held  in  Manila  to  consider 
the  advisability  of  organizing  a  union  of  the 
evangelical  societies  operating  in  the  field,  with 
a  view  to  securing  comity  and  effectiveness,  and 
a  satisfactory  distribution  of  the  territory  among 
the  forces  for  speedy  evangelization.  The  con- 
ference met  April  24  to  26,  1901,  with  a  repre- 
sentative attendance  of  missionaries,  the  secre- 
taries of  the  Y.  M.  C.  A.,  and  the  agents  of  the 
American  and  the  British  and  Foreign  Bible  so- 
cieties. The  outcome  of  the  conference  was  the 
organization   of   the    Evangelical   Union   of   the 


242      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


United 

Brethren 

Field 


San  Fernando 


Philippine  Islands,  with  a  constitution,  and 
mutually  satisfactory  resolutions  regarding  the 
territory  divided  among  the  missions. 

The  field  assigned  to  our  mission  consisted  of 
the  three  northwest-coast  provinces  of  Luzon, 
Ilocos  North,  Uocos  South,  and  La  Union,  all 
speaking  the  Ilocano  language.  Vigan,  in  Ilocos 
South,  was  taken  as  our  temporary  headquarters, 
and  work  begun  in  the  distributing  of  literature, 
visiting  surrounding  towns,  and  studying  the 
language. 

Rev.  L.  O.  Burtner  and  wife  joined  the  force 
in  November,  1902.  They  located  in  Manila, 
investigated  the  field,  and  organized  Bible-class 
work.  Pestilence  and  sickness  followed,  and 
after  assisting  Rev.  and  Mrs.  H.  W.  Widdoes, 
who  arrived  in  the  fall  of  1903,  in  becoming 
acquainted  with  the  work,  they  were  compelled 
to  leave  the  field.  Previous  to  this  time,  because 
of  unsettled  conditions,  Messrs.  Eby  and  Kurtz 
had  entered  the  Y.  M.  C.  A.  work  in  Manila. 
This  left  us  a  force  too  weak  to  meet  the  needs 
of  the  large  territory  allotted  to  our  Church,  so 
at  the  meeting  of  the  Evangelical  Union  in  1903, 
part  of  our  field  was  surrendered. 

After  a  thorough  canvass  of  the  field  by  Mr. 
Widdoes,  San  Fernando,  the  capital  of  Union 
Province,  and  centrally  located,  was  selected  as 
permanent  headquarters  and  work  was  begun  at 
once,  tracts  were  distributed,  a  Bible  class  with 


The  Philippine  Islands 


243 


an  enrollment  of  ten  was  organized  among  the 
high-school  students  who  knew  English.  This 
number  was  soon  increased  to  twenty-five. 

Through  the  efforts  of  the  postmaster  in  San 
Fernando,  who  knew  the  Spanish  language,  an 
invitation  was  received  to  visit  Cava,  a  town  of 
four  thousand  people,  about  thirteen  miles  south. 
The  colporteurs  of  the  British  and  Foreign  Bible 
Society  had  sold  many  Bibles  in  Cava  and  the 
people  were  eager  to  know  the  truth.  Here,  on 
Easter  Day,  1904,  the  first  Protestant  church  in 
Union  Province  was  organized,  with  eighteen 
members.  All  work  had  to  be  carried  on  through 
such  interpreters  as  could  be  found,  and  the  im- 
partation  of  spiritual  truth  during  this  period  of 
language  study  was  very  difficult  and  slow,  so 
that  little  progress  was  made  the  first  year  in 
Cava.  Most  of  the  little  band  were  faithful, 
however,  and  stood  firm  in  the  persecution  that 
followed. 

Rents  in  San  Fernando  were  very  high  and 
satisfactory  houses  hard  to  find,  so  plans  were 
made  to  build  a  mission  house.  A  fine  lot  was 
secured  in  May,  1904,  and  the  house  completed 
by  December.  During  this  same  month  a  church 
was  organized  with  five  members,  and  the  chapel 
in  the  lower  story  of  the  mission-house  was  dedi- 
cated and  opened  for  public  use. 

Early  in  1905  work  was  begun  in  Tubao  and 
San  Juan,  and  congregations  organized  in  both 


Cava 


Mission 

House 

Built 


Extending 
the   Work 


The  Philippine  Islands  245 

towns.  It  was  thought  best  for  Rev.  H.  W.  Wid- 
does  and  family  to  move  to  Cava,  leaving  Rev. 
M.  W.  Mumma  and  wife,  who  arrived  in  No- 
vember, 1904,  to  carry  on  the  work  among  the 
English-speaking  students  in  San  Fernando,  and 
in  charge  of  the  newly-opened  work  in  San  Juan. 
This  gave  Mr.  Widdoes  an  opportunity  to  more 
firmly  establish  the  little  church  in  Cava.  Later 
a  splendid  opening  was  found  into  Agoo,  the 
most  important  town  in  the  southern  part  of  the 
province,  and  Mr.  Widdoes  moved  thence  to 
begin  the  work.  The  basement  of  their  home 
was  fitted  up  with  bamboo  benches  and  used  as  a 
chapel.  The  attendance  was  fairly  good  from  the 
beginning,  but  opposition  here  and  at  all  our 
other  stations  was  very  strong,  and  the  converts 
who  were  willing  to  take  an  open  stand  suffered 
much  persecution.  After  the  arrival  of  Rev.  E. 
J.  Pace  and  wife  in  December,  1905,  work  in  the 
northern  part  of  the  province  was  opened. 

In  May,  1905,  the  first  Bible  institute  was  held      Bible 
for   the   instruction   of   workers    and    members.      J"8***111* 

Held 

Sixteen  workers  were  in  attendance,  and  were 
given  lessons  in  church  history,  fundamental  doc- 
trines, and  outline  Bible  studies.  The  success  of 
this  effort  led  to  the  holding  of  workers'  confer- 
ences or  conventions  for  Bible  study  and  the 
development  of  the  spiritual  life. 

In  1906,  Dr.  and  Mrs.  B.  M.  Piatt  and  Rev. 
and  Mrs.  A.  B.  DeRoos  reenforced  the  mission, 


246      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Districting 
Our  Field 


South 
District 


Central 
District 


the  former  carrying  on  medical  and  the  latter 
special  evangelistic  work  for  one  year. 

With  the  coming  of  Rev.  and  Mrs.  S.  B. 
Kurtz,  in  December,  1906,  a  division  and  thor- 
ough organization  of  our  entire  field,  for  the 
purpose  of  giving  the  gospel  at  once  to  all  the 
people  for  whom  our  mission  is  responsible,  was 
made  possible.  With  this  in  view,  the  territory 
was  divided  into  four  districts — South,  Central, 
North  Central,  and  North.  The  South  District, 
with  headquarters  at  Agoo,  is  under  the  super- 
vision of  Rev.  and  Mrs.  S.  B.  Kurtz.  Four  im- 
portant towns  and  about  one  hundred  and  fifty 
barrios,  or  outlying  villages,  are  included  in  this 
district.  Three  of  these  towns,  Agoo,  Santo 
Tomas,  and  Tubao,  have  organized  churches. 
The  great  country  of  the  Igorots  is  also  being 
touched  to  some  extent  from  this  point.  The 
native  people  at  Amangonan,  in  Igorot  territory, 
after  occasional  visits  from  the  missionary,  built 
their  own  chapel  and  invited  the  missionary  to 
come  and  dedicate  the  same. 

San  Fernando,  the  headquarters  of  the  mis- 
sion, is  also  the  center  of  the  work  on  the  Central 
District.  It  is  the  most  strategic  town  in  La 
Union  Province.  Here  is  located  the  high  school 
of  the  province,  and  also  a  normal  school.  Young 
men  from  towns  all  over  the  province  come  here 
for  their  higher  education,  giving  the  missionary 
a   splendid    opportunity,    through    Bible    classes 


The  Philippine  Islands 


247 


which  have  been  organized,  of  touching  the  lives 
of  those  who  are  preparing  to  be  teachers  of  the 
Filipino  youth  in  the  various  towns  of  the 
province.  In  this  district  of  four  important 
towns,  each  with  its  proportionate  number  of 
barrios,  averaging  about  thirty  to  a  town,  Mr. 
and  Mrs.  Widdoes,  with  their  corps  of  earnest 
native  workers,  are  building  up  a  strong  work. 
There  is  an  organized  church  in  three  of  these 
towns — San  Fernando,  Cava,  and  Baoang.  From 
the  little  church  at  Cava  alone  have  come  three 
of  our  strong  native  workers. 

The  North-Central  district  comprises  four  im- 
portant towns,  two  of  them  in  Union  Province, 
one  in  Amburayan,  and  one  in  Benguet  Province, 
with  over  one  hundred  barrios.  There  are  three 
organized  churches  in  the  district,  at  San  Juan, 
Bugbugcao,  and  Bacnotan,  the  latter  being  the 
headquarters  and  home  of  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Mumma, 
who  are  in  charge  of  the  district. 

The  North  district,  with  Tagudin  as  a  center, 
in  charge  of  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Pace,  is  the  largest 
in  the  territory.  Eleven  important  towns,  with 
one  hundred  and  twenty  barrios,  may  easily  be 
.reached  from  this  point.  Four  churches  are 
already  organized  at  Balaoang,  Bangar,  Alilem, 
and  Tagudin. 

Summing  up  the  work  of  the  four  districts, 
there  are  at  present  thirteen  organized  churches, 
nineteen  regular  preaching-places,  beside  many 


North-Central 
District 


North 
District 


A   Brief 
Summary 


248      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


A  Ripe 
Field 


New 

Territory 

Added 


barrios  which  receive  frequent  visits ;  a  total 
membership  of  680 ;  eleven  Sunday  schools ; 
three  Junior  and  three  Christian  Endeavor  so- 
cieties ;  property  valued  at  $3,963. 

At  the"  time  of  the  division  of  the  territory  by 
the  Evangelical  Union  our  field  was  declared  to 
be  the  most  ripe  portion  for  immediate  evangel- 
ism of  the  entire  islands.  The  record  of  the 
ingathering  of  souls  and  the  organization  of 
churches  during  the  past  six  years  since  the  bap- 
tism of  the  first  convert,  evidences  the  marvelous 
opportunity  which  is  open  to  the  missionaries 
and  native  workers  laboring  in  their  several  dis- 
tricts. 

In  the  year  1907  the  sub-province  of  Am- 
burayan  was  added  to  our  field,  making  our  ter- 
ritory at  present  consist  of  Union  Province, 
Amburayan  Sub-Province,  and  the  western  half 
of  Benguet  Province.  This  new  territory  lies  to 
the  east  and  north  of  Union,  and  has  a  population 
of  twenty-five  thousand.  About  ten  thousand  of 
these  are  Ilocanos ;  the  rest  are  Igorots.  Tagudin, 
the  capital  of  the  province,  had  been  occupied  by 
the  Methodist  mission,  but,  being  unable  to  give 
it  the  attention  required,  they  have  turned  the 
little  church  of  twenty-four  members  over  to  the 
care  of  our  missionaries.  The  town,  with  its 
nineteen  barrios,  has  a  population  of  eight  thou- 
sand people.  The  opposition  in  these,  and  the 
persecution    which    the    handful    of    Protestants 


The  Philippine  Islands  249 

have  been  called  upon  to  bear,  has  been  unusually 
severe.  They  have  been  ridiculed  and  jeered; 
they  have  been  stoned  and  reported  to  the  gov- 
ernment as  revolutionists ;  but,  with  few  excep- 
tions, they  have  remained  steadfast  and  faithful 
to  the  simple,  pure  teachings  of  the  gospel. 
Among  them  are  representatives  of  the  best  fam- 
ilies in  the  town,  who  constitute  a  strong  element 
of  permanency  and  standing.  Tagudin  occupies 
a  strategic  position.  Being  the  capital  of  the 
Igorot  sub-province,  it  is  the  Mecca  for  all  the 
inhabitants  of  the  mountains  of  Amburayan,  who 
come  to  trade  with  the  coast  people  or  to  consult 
with  the  American  Governor.  It  is  also  on  the 
trail  which  connects  Cervantes,  the  capital  of 
Lepanto  Bontoc  Province,  with  the  coast ;  so  that 
all  the  country  of  the  Igorots,  far  into  the  in- 
terior, is  in  touch  with  Tagudin,  and  gives  our 
mission  a  splendid  opening  into  the  country  of 
the  Igorots,  a  people  who  have  never  been 
reached  by  the  Roman  Catholic  Church,  and  who 
now  wait  in  their  paganism  for  the  pure  gospel 
message. 

Methods  of  Work. 

From  the  beginning,  work  has  been  carried  on 
by  tract  distribution,  visits  to  homes,  Bible 
classes,  and  public  teaching  and  preaching; 
meetings  are  held  in  the  public  markets,  and 
Bibles  sold  to  the  people  who  come.     More  and 


250      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Work  Among 
Women 


Sunday 
Schools 


Native 
Workers 


better  results,  however,  seem  to  be  secured  by 
quiet,  personal  work  than  in  the  large  public 
gatherings.  In  the  regular  meetings,  preaching 
takes  the  form  of  Bible  expositions,  with  a  few 
simple  illustrations  to  make  the  teaching  clear. 

Efforts  were  made  continually  to  interest  the 
women  and  children,  but  with  little  success  until 
1906,  when  children's  work  was  started  by  Mr. 
and  Mrs.  Mumma  in  San  Juan,  and  for  some 
months  Mrs.  Mumma  conducted  a  class  for 
women  in  San  Fernando  with  very  good  results. 
After  moving  to  Bacnotan  she  inaugurated  a 
Bible  conference,  covering  a  month  each  year, 
for  the  training  of  Christian  women  for  work 
among  their  own  people. 

The  first  successful  Sunday  school  was  organ- 
ized at  San  Juan  in  1906,  undfer  the  personal 
direction  of  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Mumma.  Efforts  were 
made  early  in  other  places  to  organize  with 
native  leadership,  but  the  time  did  not  seem  ripe. 
Near  the  close  of  1907  more  extensive  plans  were 
made  and  Sunday-school  literature  prepared,  and 
a  number  of  schools  have  since  been  organized 
with  Filipino  leaders.  Junior  and  Young  Peo- 
ple's societies  are  also  a  part  of  the  organized 
work. 

The  great  mass  of  people  here,  as  in  other  mis- 
sion fields,  must  be  reached  through  their  fellow- 
countrymen,  and  the  main  work  of  the  missionary 
should  be  the  training  of  these  future  workers. 


The  Philippine  Islands  251 

This  has  been  the  aim  and  policy  of  our  mission 
in  the  islands,  and  one  of  the  greatest  causes  for 
profound  gratitude  has  been  the  rapidity  with 
which  native  workers  have  been  called  into  the 
work  and  inspired  to  give  all  the  assistance  in 
their  power  to  propagating  the  gospel.  It  is  only 
through  their  devotion  and  hearty  cooperation 
that  the  extensive  evangelistic  work  in  the  scores 
and  scores  of  barrios  is  made  possible.  Not  only 
are  their  preaching  and  the  presentation  of  high 
moral  ideals  to  the  people  and  their  attacks  upon 
vice  in  every  form  becoming  more  and  more 
effective,  but  their  own  personal  lives  are  beyond 
reproach,  and  they  are  indeed  lights  "in  the 
midst  of  a  crooked  and  perverse  nation."  On 
account  of  the  strong  opposition  of  friends  and 
relatives,  nearly  all  converts  are  very  earnest  and 
thoroughly  convinced  before  making  any  public 
confession  of  faith.  Under  such  conditions,  they 
usually  become  zealous  propagandists  of  the  new 
gospel,  and  expound  it  wherever  opportunity 
offers  itself.  The  more  earnest  and  successful 
of  these  brethren  have  been  given  license  to 
preach,  and  in  exceptional  cases  have  been  em- 
ployed so  that  all  their  time  might  be  given  to 
preaching  the  gospel  and  visiting  the  homes  of 
the  people.  In  this  way  a  good  corps  of  native 
preachers  has  been  raised  up.  These  have  been 
instructed  in  special  Bible  institutes  and  workers' 
conferences.     Most  of  them  are  of  the  middle 


252      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

class  of  people.    Some  of  the  younger  know  Eng- 
lish, and  the  requirement  for  all  candidates  for 
the    regular    ministry    is    that   they    must   know 
either  Spanish  or  English. 
Literature  The   New   Testament  had  been  published   in 

Ilocano  by  the  Bible  societies  before  the  begin- 
ning of  our  work.  We  have  found  a  ready 
reception  for  the  book,  which  is  carefully  read 
and  reverently  studied.  The  sales  continue  stead- 
ily, with  a  growing  demand  for  the  Old  Testa- 
ment among  the  people.  The  American  Bible 
Society  has  undertaken  the  task  of  publication, 
and  has  assigned  to  the  workers  of  our  mission 
the  rare  privilege  of  assisting  in  the  translation 
of  some  of  the  prophetical  and  historical  books. 
The  Psalms  and  Genesis  will  be  issued  this  year, 
and  subsequently  the  whole  of  the  Old  Testament 
will  be  issued  in  one  volume.  Too  much  cannot 
be  said  in  favor  and  praise  of  the  work  of  the 
Bible  Society.  Scores  of  the  members  of  our 
church  here  to-day  have  been  brought  to  Christ, 
their  lives  transformed,  their  hopes  renewed,  and 
life  made  worth  living,  simply  by  reading  the  Old 
Book.  Very  often  the  missionary  finds  in  some 
out-of-the-way  place  a  man  who  has  never  come 
in  contact  with  workers  of  the  mission,  but  who 
has  come  into  possession  of  a  new  peace  and 
feels  a  new  spiritual  force  working  within  him, 
and  has  begun  to  strive  to  reach  the  ideals  taught 
by  Jesus  Christ.     The  bond  of  fellowship  that 


The  Philippine  Islands 


253 


almost  immediately  binds  this  man  and  the  mis- 
sionary together  had  its  origin  in  a  well-read 
copy  of  the  New  Testament.  Very  often  in 
giving  their  testimonials  do  we  hear  expressions 
like  this :  "It  is  not  the  work  of  the  Americano 
that  has  made  me  accept  the  new  religion,  but 
the  reading  of  the  Book" ;  "I  am  not  following 
the  religion  of  the  Americano,  but  the  teaching 
of  Jesus  Christ  as  written  in  the  sacred  Word." 

The  use  of  literature  brought  such  large  and 
quick  returns  that  a  small  weekly  paper  in  the 
dialect  of  the  people  was  established  in  Septem- 
ber, 1905.  The  extent  of  its  influence  may  be 
seen  in  the  circulation,  which  has  reached  about 
six  hundred  subscriptions  during  the  past  two 
years.  This  paper  has  been  a  constant  and 
effective  helper  to  the  whole  mission.  Many  of 
the  subscribers  have  been  "born  again  and  made 
new  creatures"  by  reading  it,  and  the  "Naimbag 
a  Damag"  has  found  a  ready  entrance  to  homes 
where  the  worker  and  missionary  would  have 
found  no  welcome.  Mr.  Mumma  is  the  editor 
and  manager. 

Not  the  least  of  the  achievements  of  the  year 
1907  was  the  publication  of  our  new  hymnal, 
entitled  "Himhimno  ken  Cancancion  a  Naespir- 
ituan"  (Hymns  and  Spiritual  Songs).  The 
Methodist  and  Christian  missions  fraternally 
joined  with  us  in  its  publication,  the  responsibility 
for  the  preparation  and  translation  of  materials, 


Weekly  Paper 


Hymn-Book 


254      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


Intellectual 
Hunger  of 
People 


Chapels   an 

Essential 

Need 


and  the  publication  of  the  book  was  delegated  to 
Mr.  Mumma,  translated  hymns  being  furnished 
by  all  the  missions.  The  book,  which  is  a  word 
edition,  contains  one  hundred  and  eighty  of  our 
best  and  most  popular  hymns ;  also  responsive 
readings  and  an  order  of  service.  The  hymnal 
supplies  a  long-felt  need,  and  has  been  received 
by  our  workers  and  people  with  enthusiasm. 
A  music  edition  will  be  published. 

The  people  are  eager  to  read  everything  they 
can  secure  in  their  dialect.  Reading-matter  is 
very  scarce,  being  confined  to  the  Roman  cate- 
chism and  a  poetical  life  of  Christ,  called  "The 
Passion,"  which  is  sung  or  chanted  during  Lent. 
Mr.  Mumma  is  preparing  a  religious  primer  in 
Ilocano,  for  use  in  private  schools.  With  the 
installation  of  the  new  printing-press,  the  oppor- 
tunities of  supplying  large  quantities  of  reading- 
matter  to  satisfy  the  intellectual  hunger  of  this 
awakened  people  cannot  be  estimated. 

In  order  that  mission  work  in  Roman  Catholic 
countries  may  command  the  respect  of  the  people 
and  become  permanent,  it  is  necessary  that,  as 
rapidly  as  possible,  chapels  and  church-buildings 
take  the  place  of  the  upper  room  or  basement 
place  of  meeting.  This  need  is  recognized  in 
our  mission  among  the  Filipinos,  and  chapels 
are  being  erected  as  rapidly  as  funds  will  per- 
mit, the  natives,  though  poor,  helping  in  this 
building  enterprise. 


The  Philippine  Islands 


255 


Soon  after  the  organization  of  the  church  in 
Cava,  a  lot  was  purchased  by  the  mission  for  the 
purpose  of  erecting  a  chapel.  The  members  be- 
came interested,  subscribed  the  materials  and 
some  money,  and  the  mission  provided  the  bal- 
ance. The  building  seats  over  one  hundred  per- 
sons, but  the  congregations  have  so  increased  in 
size  that  the  chapel  will  have  to  be  enlarged  if 
all  who  come  are  to  be  accommodated.  This  is 
the  only  chapel  in  Cava,  that  of  the  Romanists 
having  been  destroyed  by  fire. 

Late  in  1906  preparations  were  made  to  build 
in  San  Juan.  For  this  also  the  congregation  fur- 
nished material  and  labor.  The  chapel  is  well 
built  and  substantially  furnished,  with  a  seating 
capacity  of  two  hundred.  In  this  connection 
mention  should  be  made  of  the  chapels  erected 
by  the  members  in  the  barrios  of  Cacafian  and 
Bugbugcao,  both  belonging  to  the  municipality 
of  San  Juan.  These  are  simple  structures  erected 
by  the  people  themselves,  on  their  own  initiative. 
The  barrio  of  Bugbugcao  being  quite  distant 
from  the  central  town,  and  very  difficult  to  reach 
during  the  rains,  the  plan  is  to  organize  another 
church  at  this  chapel,  which  will  be  a  new  center 
for  the  propagation  of  the  gospel  among  the 
barrio  people. 

The  Tubao  people  also  planned  to  build  about 
this  time,  and  a  neat  little  chapel  with  good, 
strong  frame   is   the   result.     The   congregation 


Native 
Assistance 
in  the 
Building 
of  Chapels 


256      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 


San   Fernando 
Church 


Conference 
Organized 


furnished  nearly  all  the  materials  and  necessary 
funds  for  the  building. 

For  the  splendid  building  erected  at  Balaoan 
through  the  efforts  of  Mr.  Pace,  the  members 
furnished  the  roof  and  helped  to  pay  the  car- 
penters. This  is  a  hard-wood  structure  with 
nipa  roof,  well  seated,  has  a  beautiful  pulpit,  and 
presents  a  very  neat  and  attractive  appearance. 

Small  chapels  have  been  erected  by  the  people 
where  we  have  congregations  among  the  Igorots, 
one  at  Alilem  and  one  in  the  mountains  near 
Tubao,  where  the  members  did  the  work  unaided. 

Plans  have  been  made  and  money  raised  for 
the  building  of  a  substantial  church  in  San  Fer- 
nando, which  will  be  a  model  and  an  inspiration 
to  the  people  and  a  credit  to  our  missionary 
enterprise.  The  purpose  is  not  to  try  to  compete 
with  the  great  edifices  of  the  Roman  Catholic 
Church,  but  to  build  a  neat  and  durable  church- 
building,  which  will  give  stability  and  strength 
to  our  efforts  and  inspire  confidence  in  our  work 
not  only  in  this  the  capital  city,  but  throughout 
the  entire  province. 

A  mission  conference  was  organized  at  San 
Fernando,  February  14,  1908,  with  eight  mission- 
aries, five  pastors,  and  a  lay  delegate  from  each 
district.  Juan  Abellera,  a  thoroughly  consecrated 
and  capable  native  worker,  received  ordination. 
The  conference  also  undertook  home-mission 
work  in  the  building  of  a  chapel  at  Agoo.     In 


The  Philippine  Islands 


257 


addition  to  the  eight  regularly-employed  native 
pastors,  quite  a  large  force  of  volunteer  workers 
are  giving  either  all  or  a  part  of  their  time  to  the 
mission. 

Difficulties  Encountered. 

The  territory  we  occupy  was  very  conservative 
in  the  beginning,  there  being  none  of  the  inde- 
pendent Filipino  church-members  here.  The 
power  of  custom  is  great  in  the  Orient,  and  every 
one,  from  the  least  to  the  greatest,  had  been 
members  of  the  Catholic  Church.  It  is  a  great 
misfortune  and  disgrace  not  to  be  baptized  and 
counted  among  the  faithful  of  Rome.  It  is  very 
difficult  for  one  to  break  away  from  the  long- 
honored  customs  of  the  fathers  and  thus  bring 
dishonor  to  the  race.  The  common  greeting  of 
the  people  to  our  converts  is,  "Igorot,  how  are 
you?"  which  means,  "How  are  you,  ignorant, 
despised  savage?"  As  our  members  increase  this 
will  cease  to  be  an  obstacle.  There  are  very  few 
cemeteries  not  controlled  by  the  Roman  Church, 
and  in  the  beginning  there  was  only  one,  that  at 
Cava.  The  right  of  burial  is  always  denied  to 
our  members  by  the  priests,  and  not  to  be  honor- 
ably buried  in  the  "consecrated  ground"  is  an- 
other disgrace  more  stinging  than  forsaking  the 
customs  of  the  fathers.  None  but  the  most  cour- 
ageous would  leave  the  Roman  Church  and  join 
us  when  they  knew  that  they  would  be  humiliated 


Converts 
Dishonored 


No   Cemeteries 


258      Our  Foreign  Missionary  Enterprise 

and  persecuted,  and  in  the  end  denied  a  place  of 
burial  for  any  member  of  the  family,  should 
death  claim  him.  Our  people  have  been  fre- 
quently inconvenienced  and  humiliated  by  being- 
refused  a  place  of  burial  for  their  loved  ones.  It 
is  prohibited  by  the  health  department  to  bury 
elsewhere  than  in  a  legally-established  cemetery. 
The  Roman  cemetery  being  the  only  burying- 
place  in  many  towns,  our  people  have  to  wait  the 
pleasure  of  the  municipal  authorities,  who  are 
compelled  by  law  to  provide  for  such  cases.  At 
present  there  are  municipal  cemeteries  at  San 
Juan  and  Cava.  These  two  towns  have  the 
Opposition  largest  congregations  in  the  mission.    In  addition 

of  Officials  to  tjie  difficulties  mentioned,  the  opposition  of  the 

officials  of  the  town  and  the  priests  have  been 
great,  both,  no  doubt,  fearing  the  loss  of  their 
influence. 

Open  Doors. 

Great  Doors  are  opening  on  every  hand,  and  the  time 

Opportunities  |s  rjpe  for  the  gathering  of  a  great  harvest  of 
souls.  Throughout  the  province  opposition  and 
indifference  are  giving  way  to  a  great  hunger 
for  the  truth.  "Instead  of  our  pursuing  the 
opportunities,"  as  Mr.  James  B.  Rogers,  a  pioneer 
missionary  in  the  islands,  says,  "the  opportunities 
are  pursuing  us,  and  we  shall  not  in  the  coming 
vears  find  so  great  an  opportunity  for  service  as 
we  have  now."  The  greatest  needs  at  the  present 


The  Philippine  Islands  259 

time  are  funds  for  the  building  of  chapels  for 
our  growing  congregations  in  the  various  towns 
and  barrios.  These  will  give  confidence  to  the 
members  and  strengthen  and  make  permanent  the 
work.  Now  is  the  time  when  every  advantage 
and  opportunity  should  be  grasped  and  the  cam- 
paign pushed  with  vigor,  so  that  our  churches 
may  be  properly  founded  and  grow  strong  and 
develop  with  the  people. 


QUESTIONS   FOR  STUDY  AND  DISCUSSION. 
CHAPTER  VI. 

1.  Name  the  strong  and  weak  points  in  the 
character  of  the  Filipino. 

2.  Mention  three  important  things  the  American 
government  has  done  for  the  Filipinos.  Which  of 
these  do  you  consider  the  most  important?     Why? 

3.  Why  were  the  friars  disliked  by  the  majority 
of  the  Filipinos? 

4.  For  the  evangelization  of  what  provinces  in 
the  Philippines  is  our  Church  responsible? 

5.  Name  and  describe  briefly  the  four  districts. 

6.  What  important  work  has  been  assigned  to 
some  of  our  missionaries  by  the  American  Bible 
Society? 

7.  Imagine  yourself  a  Filipino.  How  would 
you  regard  the  work  of  the  Protestant  missionaries' 

8.  Why  is  now  the  time  to  push  the  evangel- 
ization of  the  Philippines?     Give  three  reasons. 


APPENDIXES 


261 


Appendix  A  263 


APPENDIX  A 

BIBLIOGRAPHY 
General. 

Dennis,  James  S.  Christian  Missions  and  Social 
Progress.  Three  volumes.  Well  illustrated.  Each, 
$2.50. 

Bliss,  B.  M.,  and  others.  The  Encyclopedia  of 
Missions.     Revised  edition.     One  volume.      $6.00. 

Brown,  A.  J.  The  Foreign  Missionary.  $1.50. 
Cheaper  edition,  60  cents. 

Beach,  Harlan  P.  A  Geography  and  Atlas  of  Prot- 
estant Missions.     Two  volumes.     $4.00  per  set. 

Religions  of  Mission  Fields  as  Viewed  by  Mission- 
aries. By  ten  prominent  missionaries.  Cloth,  50 
cents;  paper,  35  cents. 

Barton,  James  L.  The  Unfinished  Task  of  the 
Christian  Church.      Cloth,  5$  cents;  paper,  35  cents. 

Hodgkins,  Louise  Manning.  An  Introduction  to 
the  study  of  Missions.     50  cents. 

AFRICA 

Mills,  J.  S.     Africa.     50  cents. 

Flickinger,  D.  K.  Fifty-five  Years  in  the  Active 
Ministry.      $1.00. 

Blaikie,  W.  Garden.  The  Personal  Life  of  David 
Livingston.      $1.50. 

Stewart,  James.  Dawn  in  the  Dark  Continent, 
$2.00. 

Noble,  Frederick  Perry.  The  Redemption  of  Africa. 
Two  volumes.     $4.00. 

Thornton,  Douglas  M.  Africa  Waiting,  or  the 
Problem  of  Africa's  Evangelization.  Cloth,  50  cents; 
paper,  35  cents. 


264  Appendix  A 

Nassau,  R.  H.  Fetishism  in  West  Africa.  $2.50 
net. 

Naylor,  W.  S.  Daybreak  in  the  Dark  Continent. 
Cloth,  50  cents;  paper,  35  cents. 

Parsons,  Ellen  C.      Christus  Liberator.     50  cents. 

Pierson,  A.  T.  Seven  Years  in  Sierra  Leone,  the 
Story  of  the  Work  of  Wm.  A.  B.  Johnson.     $1.00. 

CHINA 

Williams,  S.  Wells.  The  Middle  Kingdom.  Re- 
vised edition,  two  volumes.  $8.00.  This  is  still  the 
standard  work  on  China. 

Martin,  W.  A.  P.     The  Lore  of  Cathay.     $2.50. 

Martin,  W.  A.  P.     A  Cycle  of  Cathay.     $2.00. 

Martin,  W.  A.  P.  The  Awakening  of  China.  One 
volume.  $4.00.  Doctor  Martin  has  been  over  fifty 
years  in  China,  and  whatever  he  writes  has  authority. 

Smith,  Arthur  H.     Chinese  Characteristics.     $2.00. 

Smith,  Arthur  H.     Village  Life  in  China.     $2.00. 

Smith,  Arthur  H.  China  and  America  To-dav. 
$1.25. 

Smith,  Arthur  H.  The  Uplift  of  China.  Cloth, 
50  cents;   paper,  35  cents. 

Smith,  Arthur  H.  Rex  Christus.  Cloth,  50  cents; 
paper,  30  cents.  Doctor  Smith  has  spent  a  long  life 
in  China,  and  all  his  books  are  of  the  highest  value. 

Brown,  Arthur  J.  New  Forces  in  Old  China. 
$1.50.     Recent,  fresh,  vigorous. 

Beach,  Harlan  P.  Dawn  on  the  Hills  of  T'ang. 
Cloth,  50  cents;  paper,  3  5  cents.  "A  concise 
summary  of  China  and  missionary  work." 

JAPAN 

Clements,  E.  W.  Handbook  of  Modern  Japan. 
$1.50. 

Griffis,  W.  E.  The  Mikado's  Empire.  Two  vol- 
umes.     $4.00. 

Griffis,  W.  E.      The  Religions  of  Japan.      $2.00. 

Griffis,  W.  E.  The  Japanese  Nation  in  Evolution. 
$1.25. 


Appendix  A  265 

Griffis,  W.  E.  Dux  Christus.  Cloth,  50  cents; 
paper,  30  cents. 

Batchelor,  J.     The  Ainu  of  Japan.     $2.00. 

Gulick,  S.  L.      Evolution  of  the  Japanese.      $2.00. 

Murray,  D.      The  Story  of  Japan.      $1.50. 

Chamberlain,  B.  H.      Things  Japanese.      $2.50. 

Knox,  G.  W.    The  Spirit  of  the  Orient.    $1.50. 

Bacon,  A.  M.      Japanese  Girls  and  Women.     $1.25. 

DeForest,  J.  H.  Sunrise  in  the  Sunrise  Kingdom. 
Cloth,  50  cents;  paper,  35  cents. 

Cary,  Otis.  Japan  and  Its  Regeneration.  Cloth, 
50  cents;  paper,  35  cents. 

PORTO  RICO 

Fowles,  G.  M.     Down  in  Porto  Rico.      75  cents  net. 

Van  Middledyk,  R.  A.  The  History  of  Porto  Rico. 
$1.25  net. 

U.  S.  Government,  Department  of  Commerce  and 
Labor.     Commercial  Porto  Rico  in  1906. 

PHILIPPINE  ISLANDS 

Foreman,  John.  The  Philippine  Islands.  $6.00 
net.  The  best  volume  in  English  written  before  the 
American  invasion. 

U.  S.  Government.  Census  of  the  Philippine 
Islands.  Four  volumes.  This  is  the  best  general 
work. 

Stuntz,  Homer  C.  The  Philippines  and  the  Far 
East.     $1.75.     Valuable  for  religious  information. 

Devines,  John  Bancroft.  An  Observer  in  the  Phil- 
ippines.     $2.00. 

Wright,  Hamilton  M.  A  Handbook  of  the  Philip- 
pines.    $1.00  net. 

Barrows,  David  P.  A  History  of  the  Philippines. 
SO  cents  net. 

Brown,  Arthur  J.  The  New  Era  in  the  Philippines. 
Cloth,  50  cents;  paper,  35  cents  net. 

Montgomery,  Helen  B.  Christus  Redemptor.  Cloth, 
50  cents;  paper,  30  cents. 


266 


Appendix  B 


C/5 
UJ 

OS 
< 

z 

g 

en 


Z 

g 

S3 
oi 

O 
u- 

z 

uj    a: 

ft.      X 


CQ 
X 

5 
z 


a. 
< 


LU 

a: 

OQ 

Q 

LU 
H 
Z 

LU 
O 


on 

-J 


2 

c 

UJ 

-J 
< 

OS 
LU 


o 

M 

n 

<! 
o 
t> 
P 
W 

o 
H 

D 

Germantown  Seminary. 

Ohio  Conference  Academy 
Hartsville       College,       Cincinnati 

Medical  College. 
Mt.  Pleasant  Academy. 

Otterbein   University. 
Roanoke  Academy. 
Hartsville  College. 

Michigan  Collegiate  Institute. 

>  <a  s 

IfllOlOtO          BON(fi!COOrlN«lO 

miALOin       irt«o«o<©c©t-t-t-t-c-t"- 

00000000        oooooooooooooooooooooo 

tHi-It-Ii-I          r-lTHr-lrHr-(T-lr-lT-li-lTHTH 

z33 

Ohio 
Penn. 
Ohio 
Indiana 

Virginia 

Ohio 

Ohio 

Indiana 

Indiana 

Michigan 

Ohio 

Michigan 

Ohio 

Ohio 

Ohio 

8 
< 
ft 

D.  K.  Flickinger 
*D.  C.  Kumler 

W.  J.  Shuey 
*W.  B.  Witt 

•J.  K.  Billheimer 

C.  0.  Wilson 

Mrs.  J.  K.  Billheimer 
*0.  Hadley 

Mrs.  0.  Hadley 
*  Joseph  Gomer 
*Mrs.  Joseph  Gomer 
*J.  A.  Evans 

Peter  Warner 

Mrs.  Peter  Warner 

Joseph  Wolf 

Appendix  B  267 


o    a 


»  p.  Ss  t>       S     b  h    §    a- 


^  (11     rn  /r»     /l-*     rf)     #w 


>. ' 


m  -S66ss    si  a    <d  «  n    Ben 

>  Si  q       "ib^*^"?      _^>o      12  as 

£  s  o^<J'3^^^qOt§..2.2gE?     3  £ 

•g  a  qr-j.qqqq^S-Pto^C'S-S  Si  "55  3 

O  o  J     mjj^ta     So     P&00     u 


a©  CO 

O0  00 
tH  rH 

OOOOSiOM 
C-  t-  C-  00  00 

00  00  00  00  00 
t-I  T-i  tH  tH  tH 

<M  CO  CO  CO  CO 
00  00  00  00  00 
00  00  00  00  00 
tH  r-1  l-H  iH  tH 

ea  as 

00  00 
00  00 

T-l   TH 

O  O  tH  t-I 

OS  OS  C5  Oi 
OO  00  OO  00 
tH  tH  tH  tH 

tH 
OS 

oo 

T-l 

Ontario 

Ohio 

Sierra 

Leone 

Ohio 

Scotland 

Virginia 

Indiana 

o  2  2  °  ° 

q  a  <u^d 
OC^JIhOO 

«6  c3 

q  a 

-3  -3 
q  q 

Indiana 
Ohio 
Ohio 
Ohio 

o 

2 
o 

K  Ll/3  "        m   BiaiH         aig   co         cc         <W  rf        8  to  9  H        rt 
2        S     •         tn   ^  ^     .         *-         >-  »^   ^        SS        2.  *-  ,2  d       ^3 


268 


Appendix  B 


-?3 


_0J 


03  xj 

so  — 
o  d 

5 

s 

5 

u 

Q  § 

oo               _ 

04                        m 

t- 

a 

t, 

'3 

rH 

oo                .£ 

03 

o 

§P 

03   nf 

03  £ 

© 
rH 

bJO  03    03 

«  be  be 

>'. 

eti 
d 

d                   5 
cd     .     .     ,  m 

2*  ><  >>  >>  _ 

73 

a 

03 

o 

+J 

CJ 
03 

>^ 

a 

Ph 

O  o  o 

as 

a 

CD 

cc  -w  *j  -i-i  "o 
^  '3  m  «  S 

03 

"3  ^r 

H 

03 

h 

to 

of  f 

>> 

0 

>,°U 

a> 

02 

•    ti    (.    ti    o 

O      (p      (1J      QJ 

P 
0 

^  Si 

03    00 

CD 

03 

0 

ni 

03  ^  m 

> 

>   >  >  of 

f- 

>  iJ 

a 

> 

Oh 

be1-1   a 

-^    g 

O-a  CO 

.5 

eg  ^  rt 

>*oo 

d 
P 

3 

'g  5  '3  '3  ^ 
-2PPP-2 

i 

'3    O 

PO 

3 

'3 
P 

o 

|j     (4     h 

rt 

5 

•- '  d  d  d  "^ 
O  .S  .-.  .5: 

.9  d 

of  03    d 

be  be" 

d 

a 

O    «)    4) 

"3 

P.  o  a?  a>  a> 

go 

03    Ctf 

93 

03    G3 

>>  cd 

"3 

p 

CfO^ 

£J 

rt 

P.^3  ^  ^3  ■" 

k 

^3    C 

-.  ^3 

a  d 

< 

cd  q  a 

.Q  cd   cd 
»    OJ    0) 

Fh 

c 

O 

"3 

^   t,   t,   t«   ro 
"    a;  a;  a)  > 

a: 

03 

r' 

(-  as 
0)  -— 

<m 

►J   JhJ 

OP 

oooal 

CO 

c 

>  ©  o3 
o  -  M 

tH  iM 

NNN 

CM 

■* 

^h  ^^  ^*  ^^ 

■*  lO 

CD 

Ci  Ci 

05  C5  C?i 

~ : 

as 

O^  O^  OS  C7i 

as  as 

en 

00  oo 

00  00  00  00  00 

00  00  oo  oo 

oo  oo 

00 

x""k 

rHTH 

rH  l-H  rH 

H 

rH 

tH  r-l  rH  tH 

r-t  r-t 

tH 

.9 

M 

03  be 

rt  g  1 

O 

d 

a 

O 

o  9  °  fe 
oHhC^: 

O  Jd 

O 

"S 

2> 

fl   w   w 

O 

eg 

3  5= 

52 

4-J 

d 
O 

a> 

03 

— 

-a          — < 

a> 

»-         9 

d 

rt        v«  P 

a  . 

fi   .s 

03 

5     d  a 

d       ce 

cd 

•a 

o        •« 

rt  xj 

S 

-« 
£ 

tn  03 

n    o  | 

o 

H 

"3 

xi 

Km 

.    Cd 

hIOh 

fcH 

gti    03    g 

©O 
d  >> 

.9  3 

a 

^_j 

S«S^<j 

S  ^S  fe 

S§ 

&; 

«  • 

•!-H- 

•K  # 

Appendix  B 


269 


>>  >>      •   ■  2 

U    !-c      .    03    03  .S 

d  d  03  60  60  03  ^ 

d  d  hfl  03  a>  60    . 


aaa 


£}  o 

CO   «3 
«   co 

d 

oT  "* 
60 'o 

(1)    .-c 

■-5    CO 

~£ 
P4 


Oi 


.  .  d  O 

*-s  +->  -t->  CD 

1-1  .i-l  CO  vn 

CO  CO  01  £? 


03  S  ^    *>    >> 

_  £  O  O  S  ;- 
wcdojOOCJOS 

gM0        o| 

S  .S  .2  o3  ri  ri  03  aj 

•2  pq  S  fn  d  0  u  "3  J 
03  a)  o  o  <d  ic  - 

•pddr°dd,cs,a"tn.~~ 

sooflsioifl^SjS 
-S-^-^oj^^ca^^gg 

: 


60       .d 

o 

■a    a  h 


"-<  ■—  Cu  o 
a  d  ^  ^ 


CD    bfl 

o  3 

Sec 


.5  O    CO 

^    CO   -t->    2 

03  "2  _,  a 
d^-C  £ 

,-h    *-*  CD 

hWHO 


>>  >>  >>  >>  >> 

h  s     — ' .« .tJ  ."S  .tJ  ."S 


CO  CO    CO    CO  CO 

_-^   ?_  S-i   ;-,   f-,  $-. 

w  q)  a)  <p  o  d) 

u  >  >  >  >  > 

•«  '3  '3  '3  "0  "0 

0  0  a  0  0  0 


CD    03    03    03    CD    03 
-C  ,C!  .O  ,0  ,Q  ,Q 

r.  "_  (*  _  -  - 

J2    03    03    03    03    03 
03  +J  +J  +->  +->  -U 

JOOOCO 


cs  to  w  i>  05  en  01  05 

CTi  C73  O^  03  03  Oi  03  03 
0000000000000000 


03  OS  O 

oicno 
00  00  01 


OOHHN 
OOOOO 
05  05  03  03  02 


CM  CO  CO  CO  CO  CO 
OOOOOO 
OS  OS  OS  OS  OS  OS 


TT 


(3 


a  d 

0  0 

.2  oo.Sfl 
^3  *3  'S  'd  fl 

hOOh 


CUPh 


d   . 

03.5.2 

d  ui 

>— 1  1— <  Ul 

0   0 

03  ^  £  2 

>><n  03  c   2 

as  d  cS  a,  ;_, 


§3 « oil 

5  a  03  ^  =  — 


r-H  13  4-J 


-O 


.S  *i 


bO 

d 

60     .^ 


^^oiS^H'gH       d<j« 


d 


jiH  in 


"^    CO  1-j 


2  °3 

^0.2M     Sjfl^ 


OI' 


+->  03 

d      'O 
o       >> 

02  ^  d 
-  2«3 


c6p!^H<tjffi^d^d 


P4 


h  c3  F  ^    .  5    •  H 


CO  ^    CO 


k    •  ^  co  r^ 


270 


Appendix  B 


(/) 


1                            1 

pj                       a> 

.2               3 

a                     3 

■3     S               « 

&                     5 

pq 

o 

QJ~                                  (3 

bfi                                 O 

r»      +*               ao 

p 

5 

'to       cs  -q  '55  o  o  o 

a   Kg.  gal? 

o               ^         g   >>'," 

£      2 .2      SiS 

M    .-s  a    £  o  £ 

0 

< 

ci  d  <v  s->  a  h  h 

.^          ^0>          fl    O   fl 

j 

a  _,  cs^  es         a 

i  2    a-      n    s 

g$      &  rt      as  a  s 
2  K     w  «      «  rt  'S  £ 

m  «      22)     -J=  'S  -25 1= 

+i  ji       a  p  o)  s  i; 

OJ      JOJJ^ 

U      O          ODO 

■ 

>  a;  cj 

eo  ■**       ■*  to  uo  ic  co 

(ONt-                 t-  00  00 

o  o       o  o  o  o  o 

o  o  o           o  o  o 

, .  r^       o}  os  02  c^  o 

Tl  C.   Cj                  ~.   C3  C5 

82     cq 

t— !  i — 1          tH  i-I  tH  iH  tH 

t-I  i-I  rH                 iH  i-t  tH 

«                  g 

H  . - 

03                          o 

o                 ^ 

a! 
C 

awe         .5  a  o 

2  §     g  2  |  |  « 

a  52  c         -o  a  •- 

A 

[A 

Fm 

H 

.b0         >*    tC    m          -i-) 

^       ►»,     ■£  3  d 

a    g   i«a.a 

w  g  a     J^fl 
.  a  o       .      3  cd 

fe 

Ho    ^5Hg 

£  o     |  W  S  S  M 

„5  (^     S^^Q 

>-  .      .   .  •  *-•   • 

rt     .  -^       dw      S 

Stf     <1Hffi^K 

SH<<      9      i^H 

*   h—      +-H—H-  -:-  +- 

•i-  -:-  -i—      -i—      h-  -l— 

Appendix  B  271 


OS  05 

tH 

<M  CO 

CO 

t- 

t-  E-  00 

M 

<N 

eq 

CO 

00  00 

OS 

O  OJ 

<35 

C5 

03  CS  Ci 

o 

© 

o 

© 

00  00 

00 

00  00 

00 

oo 

00  00  00 

as 

Oi 

C5 

OS 

tH  t-I 

1-1 

T-I  rH 

T-I 

T-I 

T-I    TH    T-I 

tH 

T-I 

rH 

rH 

c3 

-4-> 

>> 

d 

o 

d 

d 

Indiana 

Iowa 

Kentuck 

P— 

d 

d 

lid 
d 

o 

02 

d 

0 

d 

Si 

a 

a 

d  d 

as 

o.2 

.2 

2 
o 

d 

d 

•3 
d 

d 

i* 

o 

M 

d  » 

Sag 

tn  d  d 
o>  ^a  sd 

£5  02  d 
d  vJ  rd 
PL,*  CO 

cjK  d 
X5  to  * 

?wj     oi     rtH     §     ffi 


> 
"3 

X 

<D 

ffi 

m 

h 

C3 
F 

d 

d 

S  * 

H 

3 

1> 

CjEh 

H 

ED 

J 

•&H 

to 

M 

•d 

Ex 

O 

>£.  to 
^  p. 

d 

0) 

P. 
02 

V,    -B 

d 

dffl  o 

fe 

O 

W 

^H^ 

o 

72 

u 

O 
P 

«  «6 

r/j 

H 

aj 

M 

.  ^  d 

(H 

H^Ch 

O 

O 

g 

H 

272 


Appendix  B 


tj 


.5 
IS 

U 


a 

i?  o     73 

'S3 

•- .  O        CJ 

Si 

'A 
O 
H 
o 
P 

O 
•  aT 

crJ  & 

5o 

^    .2 

S        -d 

aT  d      O 

o 

H 

a 
< 

■Ha  .£ 

CO  <-'    y    S-.    _ 

—         > 

CO    Cl 

£ 

u   ~ 

»h        .-   s   d 

£  &  S  £  "S 

t-£        d 

UJ     CD 

2    °          ,Q 

•O  TJ 

S  -a      .  ^ 

d    CI 

d    C          ^r-    f— 

p  rt  0^-3 

d  "5       ^ 

O         *J 

hlJ 

»-,           O 

H       O 

►  ®  cj 

M  lO 

to            in 

LO        to 

O  O 

o            o 

o      o 

0.-3) 

as  as 

(35                 O 

OS           Ci 

W     jq 

1-1  rH 

l-<                          T-l 

i-l          rH 

a 

to   -j 

.2  3 

d 

<3 

<  5-1 

•2           o 

O           O 

g* 

°        o 

Id      IS 
O      O 

^ 

•*j 

T3 

o 

>> 

d 
3 

cu 

"   >^ 

< 

-1-J 
o 

Qd 

•— '  CD 

1  d 

£  *  t 

*        o 

CP    CT)  Eti 
fcrl  ^ 

m        m 

l«5       .    CO 

0>      tH 

(4 

d 
£           -H 

S          fc 

mo 

•!—  •!- 

+-             -:- 

+-4— 

Appendix  B 


273 


.A  d  M 

3  o  d 

s  'I  I 

d  -  s- 

o  >,  H 

►5  'S  d 

.Is  ,ti  o  !h  fcc 

to  to  p  -* 


d  d 


2  02  £ 


O      Oh 


d 
d  £j 

Sal    3 

f  o 

O  --    CD      .  »2 

l-H     V     O     O  ,-H 

S   d  °  c3 

3«droo 

«    £ 


S    5 
d    « 

o 


,9       .    «2  CO 

'-3  d  d  d  d 


M. 


V 


CD  +J  4-> 

o    o    o 


oo 

OS  o 

o 

i-l  rH 

M> 

t- 

r- 

o 

OS  o 

o 

O  O 

o 

o 

o 

Si 

00  cs 

OS 

OS  OS 

(35 

OS 

OS 

H 

i-i  rH 

rH 

rH  iH 

rH 

rH 

lH 

ri 

-d 

■d 

rt 

d 

d 

d  d 

d 

W] 

d  d 

d 

-d 

.2  b 
.d^ 
OS 

>> 

d  d 

S 

d 

C 

•o  -d 
d  d 

d 

d 

o 

.d 
O 

d 

d 

k5 

d 

H 

o 
O 

^W 

i-a 

.d 

o 


o 


5     fe' 


?ia 


m    S 


o 
u 

S 

o 

o 

a. 


■3 

*d 

o 

o 

.£2 

-a 

■ffl 

pq 

l^ 

d 

o 

o 

id 

d 

P 

P 

- 

„ 

>. 

>» 

+J 

4-> 

Efl 

CO 

- 

Si 

CD 

CD      • 

> 

> 

>  >■ 

Ph 

Z+  u 

d 

d 

d  d 

13 

(S 

P. 9 

1 
CD 

i 

c 

2  § 

J 

J 

CTS 

OS 

OS 

OS 

00 

00 

H 

tH 

ca 

CO 

d 

d 

OQ 

CO 

1  d 

d 

d 

d 

M 

J 

§ 

1 

a 

d 

^ 

;    3 

-  a 

E 

d 

W 

M 

1-1 

£ 

w 

CO 

'fc 

£ 

-t— 

-i- 

274 


Appendix  B 


a  s 

a 

si 
—  a 


£         £         £         £ 

jr     j5     cq     w 
d 
B 


Ef      -S     |l 


—     H  c     —     —     —     — 


3 
1 


o 


o 

2. 


C  J)        c 

e  "  oi  »  ■ 

EC  Q    £    CO 

Z  2, 


OG 
M 


bx 


be 


Q>  —    CD 


fe    =    P 


~  03 


S  >■—  >.zz  ^-—  >-. 
ot,c'-c!-ot- 

UJUJ°=-  I 

B      S      E      E 

>1  }H  >H  t- 


4.     -    o  ~  a 

S  2  sr     £  £  ~ 


©  o 

C5  C5 


o       o       o 


B 

- 

CC                  re 

J* 
00 

fit 

- 

<2      o  c  c 

::: 


o  oi 


£   8 

—  oj 

-  - 


Z      Z      Z 


u  •- 

c  £ 

.  —  . 

.  «-  . 


t- 


-  - 


C 


—  ~ 


a  h 


,-s    S    c 


Appendix  B 


275 


d 

"3 

;- 

>» 

d 

CD 

u 

CJ 

3 

;*■} 

'55 

£ 

3 

3 
5 

s 

d 
o 

00 

> 
d 

,£3 

s 
o 

3 
u 

o 

V 

d 
o 

a 

'  d 

a 

d 

.13 

bo 

o 

"3 

a 
d 

P 
of 

CD 
fcfl  CD 

CU 
ij                 4J 

si 
eg 

,2 

03 

P 

o 
o 

fc.O 

co 

d 

CO 

d 

> 

~  a 
°  J 

>>  aT 
5?  fee 

CO          ."£  '.Tj 

£*        to  co 

CD         S-    '-i 
►*"    „,•    <»  HH 

d  tfl-S 

O 

00 
03 

R    CD 

ro  i — ! 

co  d 

dO 

o 

GO 

a 
3 

s 

> 
u 

c 

s 

1 

a 
o 

1 

1-1  a 

^  rt  3 

d  "d  a; 
3  d  gq 
9  a 

>8 

1! 

CO   4-1 

j=>  a 

CD    CD 

P5  «5>; 

CD   O  P  5  -"3 

•2  CD  «  o  £ 

O 

o 

a 

0 

+j 

d 

CO 

a 

OQ 

Ph 

4-1 

c 

C5 

0 

o 

o 
as 

W 

£ 

<j 

CG 

JO 

ooo§ 

£ 

p* 

eo 

CO  CO   | 

rH 

iH 

i-i 

rH  CO  00  ■*  "*<  \a  W 

co 

ICO 

o 

o 

o 

o  o  o  o  o  o  o 

o 

o  o 

o  o 

oa 

os 

OS 

OS  OS 

OS 

OS  OS  OS  OS 

OS 

OS  OS 

OS  OS  ! 

H 

H 

iH 

rH  r-l 

H 

rH  rH  rH  rH 

iH 

iH 

iH 

i-l  iH 

j 

^ 

W 

a 

d 

s 

-H 

o 

'd 

■a 

d  ! 

d 

d 

.  d 

a  co 
a  « 

.2 .2 .2  fS 

a 

CO 
CQ 

a 
d 

a  .5  , 

a 

0) 

CD   a 

® 

23a  « 

d 

a 

3 

CD    S 

CL 

> 

Ph^ 

3 

OOO.S 

H 

r^i 

ffih^l 

to 

d 

fh 

0) 

o 

9 

ca 

N 

u 
co 

d 

d 

p5 

2     9 

.  d.  •      Cm 

+J 

3 

E 

m 

o 
c 

2  n  ! 

Ph   h\\ 

J)    H      1 

d 

+3 

d 

CQ 

.  *d 

d  &  ®  ,_• 

^SCmh 

^  aib  in' 

d 

pq 

CQPh 

t%3 

M 

d 

re 

s 

cri 

pq 

CO  co' 

s-    . 

I* 

•  -        (- 

!h 

u  u 

H 

CO 

j 

Sffig 

si 

s 

<iS 

•)— 

h— 

-i- 

i—  •> — ]~-^- 

+- 

-1 

CU 

CO 

> 

a 

90 

APPENDIX  C 
STATISTICS  OF  UNITED  BRETHREN  FOREIGN  MISSIONS 

"Reported  from  the  Field  for  the  year  IQ07 


MISSION   FIELDS 


0*  CQ 

02 

c  s- 


0 

c 

0 
~3 

2 

£ 

c 

a-c 

u. 

"2  ~ 

fl 

tt 

0 

_-7 

0 

d 

CL,  i 

1889 

1895 

1899    | 

1901 

When  Established 


1855 


Ordained  

Unordained  Men... 

Single  Women 

Wives 

Physicians 

Total  Missionaries. 


Ordained  Preachers 

Unordained  Preachers. 
Other  Native  Laborers. 
Total  Native  Laborers 


20 


organized  Churches 

Other  Preaching  Places 

Communicant  Members 

Adherents 

Number  of  Sunday  Schools 

Sunday  School  Teachers  and  Officers... 

Sunday  School  Pupils , 

Total  Sunday  School  Enrollment 

Young  People's  Societies 

Members  of  Young  People's  Societies. 

Junior  Societies 

Members  of  Junior  Societies 

Day  and  Boarding  Schools 

Pupils  in  Day  and  Boarding  Schools.. 

Students  in  Albert  Academy 

Dispensaries 

Cases  Treated 

Church   Houses 

Value  of  Cnurches 

Missionary  Residences 

Value  of  Missionary  Residences 

Value  of  other  Property 

Total  Value  of  Property 

Amount  contributed  on  Foreign 

field     111(17 


21 

390 

705 

2,700 

2) 

1(12 

1,287 

1,389 

(1 

186 

10 

:',7(i 

23 

855 

-161 

1 

2.021 

20 

883.655 

$18,140 
888,780 
880,525 


2 

4 

125 

129 

1 


13 
18 
381 
762 
21 
43 

892 
935 

105 

1 

20 


t7 

271 


■■■•14 

21 

*012 

1,500 

*14 

32 

834 


208 
1 

30 

1 

30 


1 
18,980 

■l 

83,800 

:; 
850,001 

■  1.., 1  in 
i  1,300 


1 
87,700 

2 

811,996 

87,400 

'..(.Ml, 


■527.21(1 


$79(1 


S3.iil3.52  847S.83  8578.85  8811.59 


*13 
*19 
*680 

2,2.  .11 
*ll 


•3 


$1,22:; 

l 

SI, 95(1 

$790 
83,963 


S  .11   55.827.20 


;  Reported  August,  1908.     t  Two  of  these  are  boarding  schools  with  17  pupils. 


Appendix  D  27', 


APPENDIX  D 
ANALYTICAL  INDEX 

In  this  index  are  indicated  the  most  important  topics 
treated  in  each  chapter.  '  It  is  also  intended  for  the  use 
of  mission  study  classes.  By  reading  over  the  analytical 
outline  before  taking  up  a  chapter,  one  may  see  exactly 
what  ground  is  covered.  After  having  studied  the  chapter, 
its  outline  as  here  given  can  be  used  for  review.  The 
numerals  following  the  topics  refer  to  the  pages  where 
they  may  be  found. 

CHAPTER    I. 
Sibrba   Leone,    West   Africa. 

I.     General  Conditions,  1-8. 

1.  Location  and  extent,  1.  2. 

2.  Climate,  2. 

3.  Population,  3. 

4.  Native  houses,   3,   4. 

5.  Customs,  4-8. 

(1)  Dress,  4. 

(2)  Labor,  5. 

(3)  Domestic  slavery,   5. 

(4)  Marriage,  6. 

(5)  Food,  6. 

(6)  Treatment  of  sick.  7. 

(7)  Burial   of  dead,   7. 

(8)  Vices,   8. 

II.     Religious  Conditions  in  Sierra  Leone.  8-33. 

1.  Paganism,  8-10. 

(1)  Belief  in  evil  spirits,  8. 

(2)  Offerings,  9. 

(3)  Secret  societies,  9. 

(4)  Cannibalism,  10. 

(5)  Fear  the  controlling  motive,  10. 

2.  Mohammedanism,  10-21. 

(1)  A  dangerous  foe,  10. 

(2)  Its  founder,  12. 

(3)  Beliefs  and  practices,  13-19. 

(4)  Conversions  from  Mohammedanism.  2o. 

(5)  Our  opportunity  in   Sierra  Leone,  20.  21. 

3.  Christianity,  21-33. 

(1)  Produces  great  changes,  22,  23. 

(2)  An  example  of  consecration,  24. 

(3  i      Reasons  for  industrial  training.  25-29. 
(4)      Educational   work,  29-33. 


278  Appendix  D 


CHAPTER    II. 

The  United  Brethren*  Missions  in   Sierra  Leone. 

I.     Organization    and    growth    of   our    foreign    missionary 
work,  37-45. 

1.  Missionary  Society  organized  in  1853,  38. 

2.  Africa  selected  as  tbe  first  field,  40. 

3.  Earlv  difficulties  and  foundation  laving.  41-43. 

4.  Uprising  of  1898,  43. 

5.  The  favorable  outcome,  44,  45. 

II.  Present   conditions   of   the   work   of   the    Foreign    Mi- 

sionary  Society,  45-53. 

1.  Extent   of  work.   45. 

2.  Principal   stations.  46—53. 

(1)  Shenw.   46-48. 

(2)  Bonthe,   48. 

(3)  Industrial  work  at  Mofus,  50,  51. 

(4)  Mano,  52. 

(5)  New  stations,  53. 

III.  Cooperative  Work,  53-59. 

1.  Joint  superintendent.  55. 

2.  Work  in  Freetown,  53-59. 

(1)  Mission  headquarters.  53. 

(2)  Freetown  Church,  54. 

(3)  Bethany  Collage,  54. 

(4)  Albert  Academy,  55-59. 

IV.  Work  of  the  Woman's  Missionary  Association,  59-70. 

1.  Historical  sketch,  59-04. 

(1)  Origin,  59.  60. 

(2)  Mission  opened  at  Rotifunk,  01. 

(3)  Great  difficulties.  62. 

(4)  Mendi  country  occupied.  63. 

2.  Present  conditions  of  the  work.  01. 

3.  Its  extent,  64. 

4.  Principal  stations,  65-69. 
il)     Rotifunk,  <;:>. 

(21     Moyamba,  66. 

(3)  Ronietta,  07. 

(4)  Taiama.  69. 

(5)  New  territory.  0'->. 
V.     Closing  Word,  70-72. 

1.  Loyalty  and  consecration  of  native  pastors,  70.  71. 

2.  Our  missionaries,  71.  72. 

CHAPTER    III. 
Chin  v. 
I.     Old  China,  79-95. 

1.  The  countrv,  79-82. 

(1)      Its  favorable  location.  80. 
il')      Productions,  80. 

(3)  Minerals,  81. 

(4)  Population.  82. 

2.  Native  customs,  88-92. 

(1)      Domestic  customs.   88. 
(2i      Education.  84,  85. 


Appendix  D  279 


(3)  Social   classes,   86,   87. 

(4)  Religions — Confucianism,  Taoism,  Buddhism, 

87-90. 

(5)  Political  customs,  90,  91. 
3.     Chinese  characteristics,  92-95. 

New  China,  96-105. 

1.  Aroused  by  foreign  aggressiveness,  96. 

2.  Modern  education  introduced,  97. 

3.  War  against  opium,  9S,  99. 

4.  A  constitutional  government  promised,  100. 

5.  Introduction    of    railways    and    other    modern    im- 

provements,  101,   102. 

6.  A  brighter  future  for  women,  102. 

7.  Other  reforms,  103-105. 

Christian  China,  105-115. 

1.  Early  missionary  efforts,  105-107. 

2.  Marvelous  growth  of  a  century,  108. 

3.  Agencies  at  work,   109-112. 

(1)  Bible  Circulation,   109. 

(2)  Christian  press.  110. 

(3)  Y.  M.  C.  A.,  110. 

(4)  Sunday  schools,  111. 

(5)  Medical  work,  111. 

(6)  Christian  schools,  112. 

(7)  Evangelistic  work  paramount.  112. 

4.  Church  union,  113. 

5.  Significant  facts,  114. 

United  Brethren  in  China,  115-122. 

1.  Location  of  mission,  115. 

2.  Pioneer  work,  116. 

3.  Four  departments,  117-121. 

(1)  Medical,  117. 

(2)  Educational,  119. 

(3)  Philanthropic,  120. 

(4)  Evangelistic,  120.  121. 

4.  Conference  organized,  122. 

5.  Great  opportunities,  122. 


CHAPTER    IV. 

Japan. 
The  land  and  the  people,  129-134. 

1.  The  country,  129-132. 

(1)  Its  extent,  129. 

(2)  Volcanic  origin,  129. 

(3)  Climate,  i30. 

(4)  Fertility  of  soil,  131. 

(5)  Land  of  beauty,  132. 

2.  The  people    132-134. 

(1)  Physical   characteristic*,    188. 

(2)  The  samurai,  133. 

(3)  Shoguns,    134. 


>80  Appendix  D 


II.     The  New  Era  in  Japan,  135-137. 

1.  The  coming  of  Commodore  Perry,   1  35. 

2.  The  Charter  Oath,  135. 

3.  Wonderful  changes.  136,  137. 
III.     Manners,  Traits,  Customs,  138-146. 

1.  Many  manners  the  opposite  of  ours,  138. 

2.  Characteristic  traits,    138. 

3.  Society  based   on  Confucian  ethics,   138-141. 

(1)  Marriage  and  divorce,  139,  140. 

(2)  Filial  piety,  141. 

(3)  Condition  of  women.  139.   1  10. 

4.  Economic  conditions.  141. 

5.  Educational  system,  141. 

6.  Religions,  142-145. 

(1)  Shintoism,  142,  143. 

(2)  Buddhism,  143-14.". 

(3)  Confucianism,  145. 

7.  Political  institutions,  14(1. 
H'.     Christian  Japan,  147-152. 

1.     Many  difficulties,   147,    148. 

2v     Active  forces  of  Christianity,  149-152. 

(1)  Statistics,  149. 

(2)  Y.  M.  C.  A.,  150. 

(3)  C.  E.  Movement,  150. 

(4)  Sunday  schools.  150. 

(5)  Bible  Society.  151. 

(6)  Christian  schools,  151. 

(7)  Church  union  in  Japan,  152. 

V.     The  United  Brethren  Church  in  Japan,  153-160. 

1.  Its  beginning,  153. 

2.  Missionaries,   153-155. 

3.  Organization  and  division  of  the  field,  155-  164. 

(1)  The  Northeast  District,  157-159. 

(2)  The  Tokaido  District,  160-104. 

4.  Methods  of  work,  165-168. 

(1)  English  Bible  classes,   165. 

(2)  The  missionary's  home,  166. 

(3)  Country  touring,  166. 

(4)  Self-support,    166,   167. 

(5)  A  native  ministry. 
5.'    Our  present  needs,  169. 

CHAPTER    V. 
Porto  Rico. 
1       Physical,    Historical,    Political,    and    Commercial    Fea- 
tures, 173-182. 

1.  Location,  173. 

2.  Climate,  174. 

3.  Population,   176. 

4.  Present  government,  176,  177. 

5.  Economic  conditions,  178    182, 

II.     Educational  and  Religious  Conditions,   isJ-188. 

1.     Great  illiteracy  under  Spanish  government,  L82. 
2      Introduction    of    American    public    school    system, 
is::.  184. 


Appendix  D  281 


3.  Signal  failure  of  Roman  Catholic  Church,  185,  186. 

4.  Entrance  of  Protestant  missionaries,  187. 

5.  Division  of  territory,  188. 

III.     The  Work  of  the  United  Brethren  Church,  188-213. 

1.  Our  field,  189. 

2.  Historical  sketch,  189-198. 

(1)  The  beginnings  of  the  work,  189,  190. 

(2)  Its  enlargement,  191-195. 

(3)  New  adjustments  for  greater  work,  196-19S. 

3.  The  training  of  the  native  church,   198-205. 

(1)  The    Bible    school,    prayer-meetings,    C.     E., 

119,  120. 

(2)  Cottage  meetings,  200. 

(3)  Lady  visitors,  201,  202. 

(4)  Preparation   of  candidates   for   church-mem- 

bership, 203. 

(5)  Self-support.  204. 

(6)  The  work  of  the  printing-press.  204. 

(7)  Training  the  native  pastors,  205. 

4.  Obstacles  encountered,  206-209. 

(1)  A  new  language,  206. 

(2)  Unfavorable  climate,  207. 

(3)  Ignorance  and  poverty  of  people,  207. 

(4)  Superstition  and  prejudice,  208. 

(5)  Social  conditions,  208. 

(6)  Lack  of  good  roads,  209. 

5.  Growth   of  the   United   Brethren   Church   in   Porto 

Rico,  209. 

6.  The  future  of  Porto  Rico,  210,  211. 

7.  Chief  needs  of  our  work,  212-214. 

(1)  A  larger  number  of  native  pastors,  212. 

(2)  More  chapels   and   church-buildings,   212. 

(3)  Missionary  residences,  213. 

CHAPTER    VI. 

The  Philippine  Islands. 

I.     The  Philippines  Under  Spanish  Rule,  219-225. 

1.  The  islands,  219,  220. 

(1)  Location  and  size,  219. 

(2)  Climate,  219,  220. 

2.  The  people,  221-225. 

(1)  Population,  221. 

(2)  Principal  tribes,  221. 

(3)  Chief  characteristics  of  people,  222-225. 
II.     The  Philippines  Under  American  Rule,  226-233. 

1.  Governmental  policy,  226-229. 

(1)  Civil  Commission,  227. 

(2)  Municipal  code,  228. 

(3)  Former  influence  of  the  friars,  229. 

2.  Establishment  of  public-school  system,  230,  231. 

3.  Industrial  training    232. 

4.  Constabulary,  233. 

111.     Religious  Influences  in  the  Philippines,  233-240. 
1.     Reasons  why  friars  were  disliked,  234-239. 

(1)  Enriched  themselves.  235.' 

(2)  Destroyed  liberty,  236,   237. 


282  Appendix  D 


(3)  Greed,  238. 

(4)  Immorality,  239. 

(5)  Despotism,  239. 

2.  American  Protestantism,  240. 

3.  Aglipay  Movement,  240. 

IV.     The     United     Brethren     Mission     in     the     Philippines. 
241-259. 

1.  Its  beginning,  241,  242. 

2.  Extending  the  work,  243-245. 

3.  Division  and  organization  of  our  field,  246-249. 

(1)  South   District,   240. 

(2)  Central  District,  246. 

(3)  North  Central  District,  247. 

(4)  North  District,  247. 

(5)  New  territory  added,   248,  249. 

4.  Methods  of  work,  249-256. 

(1)  Among  women,   250. 

(2)  Sunday  schools,  250. 

(3)  Native  workers,  250,  251. 

(4)  Circulation  of  the  Bible,  232. 
v.j)  Weekly  paper,  253. 

(6)  Publication  of  hymn-book,  253. 

(7)  Chapel   and   church-buildings,  254,   255. 

(8)  Mission  Conference  organized,  256. 

5.  Difficulties  encountered,  257,  258. 

(1)  Converts  dishonored,  257. 

(2)  No  cemeteries,  257. 

(3)  Opposition  of  officials,  258. 

6.  Open  doors,  258,  259. 


DATE    DUE 

GAYLORD 

PRINTED  IN  US  A 

